Harris Platinum Frame and System Edition

Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Edition T PT-FR MAN
Platinum
Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Edition T
November 2011
Harris Corporation Broadcast Communications Division 4393 Digital Way Mason, OH USA 45040
Copyright 2006-2011 Harris Corporation, 1025 West NASA Boulevard, Melbourne, Florida 32919-0001 U.S.A. All rights reserved. This publication supersedes all previous releases. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work without permission from Harris Corporation. Harris Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of Harris Corporation to provide notification of such revision or change. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following: All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense. Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided by Harris standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide. This publication, or any part thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose, without the written consent of Harris Corporation. Contact Harris Corporation for permission to use materials as well as guidelines concerning foreign language translation and publication. Harris Corporation reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it chooses. This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product, as it exists on the date of publication of this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers. The Harris logo and assured communications are registered trademarks of Harris Corporation. D-Series is a trademark of Harris Corporation. All other trademarks are held by their respective owners. This user guide was created for Platinum Routing Switchers, Edition T. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. AMD and Operton are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Dolby Digital is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Publication Date: November 2011
iii
Contents
About This Manual ................................................................................................xv

Audience ...................................................................................................................xv Revision History .........................................................................................................xv Writing Conventions ............................................................................................... xvii Obtaining Documents ............................................................................................. xvii Applications ............................................................................................................... xviii Unpacking/Shipping Information ............................................................................... xix Unpacking a Platinum Product ................................................................................. xix Returning a Platinum Product ................................................................................... xix Standards ......................................................................................................................xx Platinum Product Standards ......................................................................................xx EMC Compliance Standards ..................................................................................... xxi Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance ......................................... xxi Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance ....................... xxii Safety Standards .................................................................................................... xxiii Safety Information ..................................................................................................... xxiii Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual ............................................................... xxiv
Chapter 1
Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1
Product Description ....................................................................................................... 1 Main Features ................................................................................................................ 2 Frame Architecture ........................................................................................................ 3 Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement ..................................................................... 10 Frame-Specific Components ..................................................................................... 10 Module-Specific Components .................................................................................. 11 Front Panel LED Indicators ........................................................................................... 15 Control Features .......................................................................................................... 17 Physical..................................................................................................................... 17 Parametric ................................................................................................................ 17 Signal ....................................................................................................................... 17 CCS Control System Integration Requirements ......................................................... 18 Real-time Requirements ........................................................................................... 18
Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation
iv
Contents
Applications Integration ........................................................................................... 18 Frame Specifications..................................................................................................... 21
Chapter 2
Frame Modules ....................................................................................................... 23

PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect .................................... 23 Operation ................................................................................................................ 23 Installation ............................................................................................................... 24 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 24 PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module ........................................... 24 Operation ................................................................................................................ 24 Installation ............................................................................................................... 27 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 27 PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module ............................................................................ 27 Operation ................................................................................................................ 27 Installation ............................................................................................................... 28 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 28 PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames ........................................................... 29 Operation ................................................................................................................ 29 Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 31 Installation ............................................................................................................... 32 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 32 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 32 PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames .................................. 34 Operation ................................................................................................................ 34 Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 36 Installation ............................................................................................................... 36 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 36 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 36 PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module Operation ................................................................................................................ 38 Installation ............................................................................................................... 39 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 39 Specifications ...........................................................................................................39 PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module .............................................................. 41 Operation ................................................................................................................ 41 Installation ............................................................................................................... 42 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 42 PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame ..................................................................... 43 Operation ................................................................................................................ 43 Installation ............................................................................................................... 43 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 44 Connecting External Power Supplies ........................................................................ 44 PM-FAN-5: 5RU Frame Fan Modules ........................................................................... 46
Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
Operation ................................................................................................................ 46 Installation ............................................................................................................... 47 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 47 PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frame Fan Modules ........ 48 Operation ................................................................................................................ 48 Installation ............................................................................................................... 48 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 48 PT-SYNC: Sync Module ................................................................................................ 49 Operation ................................................................................................................ 49 Installation ............................................................................................................... 51 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 51 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 51 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 52 Specifications ...........................................................................................................52 PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module ...................................................... 53 Operation ................................................................................................................ 53 Installation ............................................................................................................... 53 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 53
Chapter 3
Input Modules ........................................................................................................ 55

Input Module General Description ............................................................................. 56 Control Requirements ..............................................................................................57 Applications Integration ........................................................................................... 57 Controllable Parameters List ..................................................................................... 58 Submodules ............................................................................................................. 58 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules ........................................... 59 Operation ................................................................................................................ 59 Installation ............................................................................................................... 60 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 60 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 60 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 62 Specifications ...........................................................................................................63 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules ............................................... 63 Operation ................................................................................................................ 63 Installation ............................................................................................................... 64 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 65 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 65 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 66 Specifications ...........................................................................................................66 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules ................................................ 67 Operation ................................................................................................................ 67 Installation ............................................................................................................... 68 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 68 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 68
vi
Contents
Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 70 Specifications ...........................................................................................................71 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules ..................................................... 71 Operation ................................................................................................................ 71 Installation ............................................................................................................... 72 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 72 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 72 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 73 Specifications ...........................................................................................................74 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules Operation ................................................................................................................ 75 Installation ............................................................................................................... 76 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 77 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 77 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 78 Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 79 Specifications ...........................................................................................................80 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability Operation ................................................................................................................ 82 Installation ............................................................................................................... 83 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 84 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 84 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 86 Pinout Diagram ........................................................................................................ 86 Specifications ...........................................................................................................87 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules ...................... 90 Operation ................................................................................................................ 90 Installation ............................................................................................................... 92 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 92 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 92 Functional Block Diagram ......................................................................................... 94 Specifications ...........................................................................................................95 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules ....................................................96 Operation ................................................................................................................ 96 Installation ............................................................................................................... 99 Configuration .......................................................................................................... 99 Controllable Parameters ........................................................................................... 99 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................102 Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................103 Specifications .........................................................................................................103 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability ..........106 Operation ..............................................................................................................106 Installation .............................................................................................................109 Configuration ........................................................................................................109
vii
Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................109 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................113 Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................114 Specifications .........................................................................................................114 PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules ....................116 Operation ..............................................................................................................116 Installation .............................................................................................................117 Configuration ........................................................................................................117 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................118 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................119 Specifications .........................................................................................................119 PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Receiver Modules .....................................................................120 Operation ..............................................................................................................120 Installation .............................................................................................................121 Configuration ........................................................................................................122 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................122 SFP Specifications ...................................................................................................123 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................125 Specifications .........................................................................................................126 PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability Operation ..............................................................................................................127 Installation .............................................................................................................129 Configuration ........................................................................................................129 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................129 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................134 Specifications .........................................................................................................134 PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules .....................................................................................................................135 Power-Up sequence ................................................................................................136 Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image.....................................................................137 Activating PT-FSDMX Functions...............................................................................137 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................144 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................152 LED Indicators .........................................................................................................152 Specifications .........................................................................................................153 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules ......................................................................................................155 Operation ..............................................................................................................155 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module .............................................................................155 PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module ..................................................................................156 Input Expansion .....................................................................................................156 Installation .............................................................................................................157 Configuration ........................................................................................................157
viii
Contents
Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................158 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................161 Specifications .........................................................................................................162 LED Indicators ........................................................................................................162 PT-MADI4C-IBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module ...............................................................................................................................163 MADI Input Module (PT-MADI4C-IBG) ...................................................................164 Controlling the MADI Input Module through Navigator ..........................................165 MADI Presence ......................................................................................................167 TDM Mapping .......................................................................................................167 Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios ..............................................................168 Specifications .........................................................................................................172 Power Consumption ..............................................................................................172 PT-MADI4C-IBG Parameters ...................................................................................172
Chapter 4
Output Modules ...................................................................................................175

Output Module General Description ........................................................................177 Controllable Parameters Lists .................................................................................178 Submodules............................................................................................................179 Signal Flow Diagram ..............................................................................................180 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules 181 Operation ..............................................................................................................181 Installation .............................................................................................................183 Configuration ........................................................................................................183 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................183 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................185 Specifications .........................................................................................................185 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules .....186 Operation ..............................................................................................................186 Installation .............................................................................................................188 Configuration ........................................................................................................188 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................188 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................190 Specifications .........................................................................................................190 PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving ......................................................192 Operation ..............................................................................................................192 Installation ..............................................................................................................194 Configuration ........................................................................................................194 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................194 SFP Specifications ...................................................................................................196 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................198
ix
Specifications .........................................................................................................199 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules ................................................................................................200 Operation ..............................................................................................................200 Installation .............................................................................................................202 Configuration ........................................................................................................203 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................203 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................204 Specifications..........................................................................................................205 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules ...................206 Operation ..............................................................................................................206 Installation .............................................................................................................207 Configuration ........................................................................................................207 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................207 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................209 Specifications .........................................................................................................209 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules ........................210 Operation ..............................................................................................................210 Installation .............................................................................................................211 Configuration ........................................................................................................211 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................212 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................213 Specifications .........................................................................................................213 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules .......215 Operation ..............................................................................................................215 Installation .............................................................................................................216 Configuration ........................................................................................................216 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................217 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................218 Specifications .........................................................................................................218 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules ..........................................220 Operation ..............................................................................................................220 Installation .............................................................................................................221 Configuration ........................................................................................................222 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................222 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................223 Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................223 Specifications .........................................................................................................224 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability ..226 Operation ...............................................................................................................226 Installation .............................................................................................................227 Configuration ........................................................................................................228
Contents
Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................228 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................230 Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................231 Specifications .........................................................................................................232 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules with Dual Output ......................................................................................................233 Operation ..............................................................................................................233 Installation .............................................................................................................235 Configuration ........................................................................................................235 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................235 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................237 Specifications .........................................................................................................238 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules ........239 Operation ..............................................................................................................239 Installation .............................................................................................................240 Configuration ........................................................................................................241 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................242 Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................243 Specifications .........................................................................................................244 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability .....................................................................246 Operation ..............................................................................................................246 Installation ..............................................................................................................247 Configuration ........................................................................................................247 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................247 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................250 Pinout Diagram ......................................................................................................251 Specifications .........................................................................................................252 PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter Module ............254 Operation ..............................................................................................................254 Installation .............................................................................................................255 Configuration ........................................................................................................255 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................255 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................257 Specifications .........................................................................................................257 PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability PT-MUX: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability ...............................................................................................259 Operation ..............................................................................................................259 Installation .............................................................................................................261 Configuration ........................................................................................................261 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................262 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................265 Specifications .........................................................................................................266 PT-MADI4C-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output
xi
Module .......................................................................................................................267 MADI Output Module (PT-MADI4C-OBG) ...............................................................268 Controlling the MADI Output Module through Navigator .......................................268 Reference Locking ..................................................................................................270 TDM Input .............................................................................................................271 TDM Output Mapping ...........................................................................................271 Specifications .........................................................................................................272 Power Consumption ..............................................................................................272 PT-MADI4C-OBG Parameters .................................................................................273
Chapter 5
Crosspoint Modules ...........................................................................................277

Crosspoint Module General Description ..................................................................278 Controllable Parameters Lists .................................................................................279 Signal Flow Diagram ..............................................................................................280 PM-4032-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules ..........................................282 Operation ...............................................................................................................282 Installation ..............................................................................................................282 Configuration .........................................................................................................282 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................283 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................283 Specifications..........................................................................................................283 PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules .....................................284 Operation ...............................................................................................................284 Installation ..............................................................................................................284 Configuration .........................................................................................................285 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................285 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................285 Specifications..........................................................................................................285 PM-7264-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules ..........................................286 Operation ...............................................................................................................286 Installation ..............................................................................................................286 Configuration .........................................................................................................286 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................287 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................287 Specifications..........................................................................................................287 PM-128x128-X9/PM-128128-3G9: 128x128 Crosspoint Module ...........................288 Operation ...............................................................................................................288 Installation ..............................................................................................................288 Configuration .........................................................................................................289 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................289 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................289 Specifications..........................................................................................................289 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128256-3G28: 128x256 Crosspoint Module ....................................................................................................290
xii
Contents
Operation ...............................................................................................................290 Installation ..............................................................................................................291 Configuration .........................................................................................................291 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................291 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................291 Specifications..........................................................................................................291 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules ..............292 Operation ...............................................................................................................292 Installation ..............................................................................................................295 Configuration .........................................................................................................295 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................295 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................296 Specifications..........................................................................................................296
Chapter 6
Output Monitoring Modules ..........................................................................297

Output Monitoring Module General Description ...................................................298 Controllable Parameters List ...................................................................................302 Signal Flow Diagram ..............................................................................................302 PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module ....................................................303 Operation ...............................................................................................................303 Installation ..............................................................................................................304 Configuration .........................................................................................................304 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................304 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................305 Specifications..........................................................................................................305 PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video Output Monitoring Module ......................................................................................307 Operation ...............................................................................................................307 Installation ..............................................................................................................309 Configuration .........................................................................................................309 Controllable Parameters .........................................................................................309 Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................311 Specifications..........................................................................................................312
Chapter 7
Installation
..........................................................................................................313
Before You Begin ......................................................................................................314 Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware ...................................................................................315 Installing Input and Output Modules ......................................................................319 Installing Crosspoint Modules ..................................................................................321 Module Placement .................................................................................................321 Installing Modules ..................................................................................................322
xiii
Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules ...............................323 Installing Modules ..................................................................................................323 Removing Modules ................................................................................................324 Inspecting and Cleaning Fiber Optic Connections ...................................................325 Installing Output Monitoring Modules ....................................................................328 Installing Sync Modules .............................................................................................328 Installing Alarm Modules ...........................................................................................329 Installing Back Panel Modules ..................................................................................330 Installing Resource Modules .....................................................................................331 Replacing Resource Module Firmware......................................................................331 Use Cases ...............................................................................................................331 Installing Power Supplies ..........................................................................................335 Replacing Fans ...........................................................................................................337 Configuration .........................................................................................................340 Installing a Platinum Frame .......................................................................................340 Common Issues and Things to Check .....................................................................340 Commonly Performed Procedures ..........................................................................341 Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components .....................................342
Chapter 8
Configuration........................................................................................................343
Card-Edge Controls ....................................................................................................344 Using the Card-Edge Controls ................................................................................344 Read-Only and Adjustable Parameters ....................................................................344 Card-Edge Screen Saver .........................................................................................345 Controllable Parameters List Appearance ...............................................................345 Navigating the Parameters List ...............................................................................345 Frame Controllable Parameters ................................................................................346 Default Settings .....................................................................................................346 Application Parameters ..........................................................................................347 Fail-Safe Parameters ...............................................................................................347 Configuring via Navigator or RouterMapper ..........................................................350 Adding Platinum Frames by Polling ........................................................................351 Adding Platinum Frames by Discovering .................................................................351 Adding Platinum Frames using the Create or Add Command .................................351 Frame Application Parameters Available Through Navigator or RouterMapper ........351 Configuring Sync Reference Switch Points ..............................................................356 Sync Reference Switch Modes ................................................................................356 Configuring TDM Audio Matrices .............................................................................363 Routing Configuration (Analog Stereo/AES/Multiplex) ..........................................363 Adding a TDM Matrix to the Database ...................................................................363 Configuring Outputs for Audio Partitions ...............................................................368 Editing the Logical Database ..................................................................................374
xiv
Contents
Chapter 9
Terminal Operation ............................................................................................383

Establishing Terminal Operations Session................................................................383 Establishing Terminal Operation Sessions for Serial Control Interface Products .384 Establishing Telnet Sessions for Ethernet Control Interface Products ...................384 Protocol Support for Platinum Routers.....................................................................385
Appendix A
Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances ...............................387

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual ..............................................................388 Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product...............................................................388 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge ...........................................................................389 Injury Precautions ......................................................................................................390 Product Damage Precautions ....................................................................................392 EMC and Safety Standards .......................................................................................394 Additional EMC Information ..................................................................................394
Appendix B
Laser Safety Guidelines ..................................................................................397

General Laser Information .........................................................................................397 Lasers and Eye Damage ............................................................................................398 Classification of Lasers ...............................................................................................398 Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber Communication Systems .....................398 Laser Safety ...........................................................................................................399 Precautions for Enclosed Systems ...........................................................................399 Precautions for Unenclosed Systems .......................................................................400 Labels .........................................................................................................................401 Specifications ..............................................................................................................401
Index .........................................................................................................................403
xv
About This Manual
This manual provides information on the features and applications for the Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for installation, setup, maintenance, and/or operation of the product, and is useful to operations personnel for purposes of daily operation and reference.
Revision History
Table P-1 Revision History of Manual Edition A B Date March 2006 October 2006 Comments Initial production release

Added PT-A2-DTB connector information Added PT-AEC-BOC connector information Added pinout diagrams for PT-ADC-IB and PT-DAC-OB modules Added 9RU support Added new crosspoint sizes Added pinout information for RS-232 and RS-422 serial ports Updated PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB and PM-DAC-OB/ PT-DAC-OB specifications Added TDM support Added PT-SYNC information Added PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB information Updated PT-EXPS information Added 3 Gb/s input/output module information Updated specification information for PM-HSIB+ and PT-HSIB+ modules Updated specification information for PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules Updated RouterMapper-configurable parameters list Added fiber-optical module information
December 2006
October 2007
December 2007
January 2008
February 2008
xvi
About This Manual
Table P-1 Revision History of Manual (Continued) Edition H Date March 2008 Comments

Updated PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB linearity deviation Updated crosspoint installation procedures Added 5RU support Added DC power supply information Updated fiber optical modules information Added firmware upgrade procedures for 3 Gb input, output, and crosspoint modules Added 3 Gb fiber optical modules Added configuration of TDM audio matrices information Updated DC power supply information Added information concerning upgrading Platinum resource module firmware Updated information concerning fan replacement Added information concerning Platinum power saving modules Updated information concerning the PT-SYNC module Updated information concerning return loss Added information concerning PT-DX-SB and PT-MX-SB modules Added information concerning switch reference point configuration Added information concerning PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules Updated 9RU frame output monitoring architecture Added information concerning Navigator Updated PT-DEC-IB parameter list Added information concerning PT-HSRAEC-OM modules Removed information concerning audio delay parameter Added new parameter to PT-DACT-OB parameter list Updated parameters in PT-ADCT-IB parameter list Added PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG module support Added directions for connecting cables on external power supplies. Added Platinum MADI Input and Output Modules (PT-MADI4C-IBG and PT-MADI-OBG). Added PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules.
June 2008
October 2008
December 2008
February 2009
August 2009
October 2009
April 2010
August 2010
Q R S
November 2010 February 2011 July 2011
Platinum Frames and Modules
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual Table P-1 Revision History of Manual (Continued) Edition T Date November 2011 Comments
xvii
Added information on SFPs for PT-HSO-IB+ and PT-HSRO-OBG+ - Fiber Optical Serial Video Receiver and Transmitter Modules (3G HD-SDI/ 1.5G HD-SDI/SD-SDI).
Writing Conventions
To enhance your understanding, the authors of this manual have adhered to the following text conventions: Table P-2 Writing Conventions Term or Convention Bold Description Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields, buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes, menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection names Indicates email addresses, the names of books or publications, and the first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere Indicates a jump to a website or URL Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems To perform a procedure Indicates the introduction to a procedure or series of procedural steps
Italics
CAPS Code > or hyperlink Internet address
Obtaining Documents
The installation and operation manuals for most Harris BCD products are included on your Documentation and Product Resources DVD as individual Adobe Acrobat PDF files. Most of the software applications contained on the DVD include Online Help (electronic documents integrated into their respective software applications). While working in the application, you can open the Online Help and print out individual topics. The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
xviii
About This Manual
Applications
SDTV/HDTV/AES core routing: The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher can be used as an on-air router for up to 512x512 applications; for example, core facility routing, master control distribution, transmission solutions, etc. SD to HD migration: The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher will pass and reclock both standard SD (including 143, 177, 270, 360, and 540 Mb/s) and HD (1.485 Gb/s) signals, which allows you to route both SD and HD signals in the same router. Consequently, it provides you with a high degree of investment protection, in that an SD facility could easily migrate to HD without the need to replace the router. AES/EBU digital audio, SD, and HD in the same platform: The Platinum wideband digital multirate routing switcher can switch signals from 3 Mb/s to 1.5Gb/s, thereby providing a truly digital signal diagnostic solution. The Platinum I/O boards will route digital audio, SD and HD. Now you can route nearly any digital audio or video signal within the same router platform. Analog audio conversion Analog video conversion ASI / SSI routing applications Digital signal monitoring Distributed routing Central casting: Link two or more Platinum routers together between facilities, and control and operate as if using one large routing system from your central facility.
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual
xix
Unpacking/Shipping Information
Unpacking a Platinum Product
All products have been carefully inspected, tested, and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble-free service. 1 2 3 4 5 Check the equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during transit. Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list. Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing. Contact the carrier if any item is damaged. Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated components before you install the unit.
Returning a Platinum Product

In the unlikely event that a product fails to operate properly, please contact our Customer Service Department to obtain a Return Authorization (RA) number, then send the unit back for servicing. Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service. If the original package is not available, you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteria:

The packaging must be able to withstand the products weight. The product must be held rigid within the packaging. There must be at least 2 in. (5 cm) of space between the product and the container. The corners of the product must be protected.
If the product is still within the warranty period, we will return it to you by prepaid ground shipment after servicing.
xx
About This Manual
Standards
There are three sets of standards used in the development of the Platinum product line: product standards, compliance standards, and safety standards.
Platinum Product Standards

The following product standards apply to the Platinum router. Please reference the pertinent standard for more information.
Professional Video
SMPTE 259M SMPTE Standard for Television - 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 292M SMPTE Standard for Television - Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High Definition Television Systems SMPTE 344M SMPTE Standard for Television - 540 Mb/s Serial Digital Interface SMPTE 424M SMPTE Standard for Television - 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcasting Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar Professional Equipment SMPTE-170M For Analog Video Signal quality FCC 73.699 U.S. Federal guidelines for NTSC analog composite video ITU-R.BT 470 Guidelines for PAL analog composite video ITU-R BT601-4 For Serial Digital Video
Digital Audio
AES3-2003 AES Recommended Practice for Digital Audio Engineering - Serial Transmission Format for Two-Channel Linearly Represented Digital Audio Data AES3id-2001 AES Information Document for Digital Audio Engineering - Transmission of AES3 Formatted Data by Unbalanced Coaxial Cable
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual SMPTE 276M-1995 SMPTE Standard for Television - Transmission of AES-EBU Digital Audio Signals Over Coaxial Cable
xxi
PT-PS Power Supply

Safety TUV approved to latest revision of UL 60950-1 and CSA 22.2 complete with CB Report with all country deviations1 CE Mark EMC Compliance tested under EN 55103-1, 2 as a Class A Device in an E4 environment NEBS Level 3 Certification, Type 4 Environment, SBC Special Requirements, AT&T NEDS
EMC Compliance Standards

The following EMC compliance standards apply:

EN 50081-1 EN 55022 EN 50082-1 IEC 1000-4-2 1995-01 IEC 801-3 1984 IEC 1000-4-4 1995-01 Part 15 of the FCC Rules ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications
Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance

Directive 2002/95/EC commonly known as the European Union (EU) Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) sets limits on the use of certain substances found in electrical and electronic equipment. The intent of this legislation is to reduce the amount of hazardous chemicals that may leach out of landfill sites or otherwise contaminate the environment during end-of-life recycling. The Directive, which took effect on July 1, 2006, refers to the following hazardous substances:

Lead (Pb) Mercury (Hg) Cadmium (Cd) Hexavalent Chromium (Cr-V1) Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE)
1 A total of 8 PT-PS power supplies can be used in the Platinum chassis. TUV will test for chassis leakage
currents using all 8 power supplies operating simultaneously to determine the total chassis leakage current. This total chassis leakage current value must meet EN60950 and CSA 22.2.
xxii
About This Manual
In accordance with this EU Directive, all products sold in the European Union will be fully RoHS-compliant and lead-free. Spare parts supplied for the repair and upgrade of equipment sold before July 1, 2006 are exempt from the legislation. Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a RoHS-compliant emblem, as shown in Figure P-1.
Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance

The European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) deals with the collection, treatment, recovery, and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products. The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products. As of August 13, 2005, producers or users are required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life, and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods. (Some EU member states may have different deadlines.) In accordance with this EU Directive, companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled. Contact your Sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling. Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE-compliant emblem, as shown in Figure P-2.
xxiii
Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem
Safety Standards
The following safety standards apply (full descriptions of these standards can be found in Appendix A, Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances on page 387):

IEC-950 UL 60950-1 EN60950: 1992 + A1: 1993 + A2: 1993 +A3: 1995 A4: 1997 +A11: 1997 EMKO-TSE (74-SEC) 207/94 UL1419 CSA C22.2 No. 1
Safety Information
Carefully review all safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it. You will find a complete list of safety precautions in Appendix A, Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances on page 387. Any user-serviceable components (such as fuses or batteries) are only replaceable by those components listed in the manual. IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
xxiv
About This Manual
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

WARNING: Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is present. CAUTION: Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property.
T
Introduction
The Platinum routing switcher system extends both the matrix size and functionality of our routing switcher product line. Its flexible modular architecture accommodates both standard definition and high definition digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system. This combination allows high performance, multi-format video routing within a single, flexible frame. This chapter covers the following topics:

Control Features on page 17 Frame-Specific Components on page 10 Frame Specifications on page 21 Front Panel LED Indicators on page 15 Main Features on page 2 Module-Specific Components on page 11 Product Description on page 1
Product Description
The Platinum routing switcher system provides matrix expandability beyond 88, to 512512 in a single frame. The 88 building block provides ideal growth and flexibility for mixed applications such as high definition and serial digital interface, and other integrated processing opportunities such as analog and/or digital conversion. With its ability to route signals ranging from 3.0 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s, the Platinum router offers a clear growth path from lower bit rate signals to high bandwidth, high definition format signals. This router will also handle both AES and polarity sensitive ASI/SSI signal formats. The Platinum router is available in these frame sizes:

The 5RU (PM-FR-5) frame supports matrices up to 7264. The 9RU (PM-FR-9) frame supports matrices up to 128128. The 15RU (PT-FR-15) frame supports matrices up to 256256. The 28RU (PT-FR-28) frame supports matrices up to 512512.
All of these frames use common, front-loadable, and hot-swappable input and output modules. The 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames use common crosspoint modules. (The 5RU frame uses a different crosspoint module). Each frame has a passive module interconnect (MI) signal distribution module interconnecting the routing system.
Chapter 1 Introduction
The frames support user-friendly, self guiding insertion and extraction: No module can be inserted into the wrong area where damage (electrical or physical) may occur. The frames are designed so that, during module insertion or extraction, damage to other modules is prevented. All modules ground before any active components are energized. This includes standard make-before-break power connectors and grounding tabs, where necessary, on modules. Each frame is accessible from the front via sectioned, removable doors. Status LEDs can be viewed through these doors; these LEDs indicate power supply presence (and status), resource module usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Two tri-color LEDs that indicate user-defined alarm conditions are also viewable through the door. (See Figure 1-8 on page 16.) The frames are designed to be compliant with NEBS certification requirements (for example, non-removable door option, locking power supplies, etc.). Platinum frames are compatible with all of Harriss router control software products, such as CCS Navigator and RouterMapper. A key advantage of the Platinum router is that it provides redundant crosspoint paths in the 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames. This function, a common concern of professional broadcast customers, is not offered by many current competitive products. By using redundant crosspoint modules, a fully redundant path through the system is available. While the 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU Platinum frames provide complete hardware crosspoint redundancy, all frames offer redundant path operation based on advanced rule sets integrated into the control system, thus providing a more robust operation than typically found in competitive offerings.
Main Features
Routing for large systems

7264 in a 5RU frame 128128 in a 9RU frame 256256 in a 15RU frame 512512 in a 28RU frame HD-SDI digital multirate from 3.00 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s Digital video signals including SMPTE 310, SDI, ASI, HD-SDI Analog video via conversion to/from SDI on I/O modules Digital audio signals including balanced and unbalanced (coaxial) AES Analog stereo audio via conversion to/from AES on I/O modules
Video routing

Audio routing

Module I/O in groups of 8 Route to/from digital and analog signals with no external processing Front-loading, hot swappable modules Redundancy (power supplies, resource modules, signal paths) throughout Enhanced control and monitoring capabilities Secure access rights with restrictions by level, source, and destination CCSP, SNMP, and third-party protocol support
Frame Architecture
Platinum routing switchers are available in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frame sizes. Each size can accommodate any signal format or combination of signal formats, and has different options available for customizing. (Some aspects of frame customization and matrix size specifics will be discussed in detail in each signal formats individual section). For illustrations of each frame sizes physical architecture, see Figure 1-1 on page 4 through Figure 1-4 on page 6. Table 1-1 Platinum Series Architectural Information Architecture Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight fully loaded (approx.) Matrix size Matrix module capacity Input slots Output slots Crosspoint slots Resource slots TDM slots Sync slots PSU slots Monitoring slots Alarm slots Streaming slots Standard equipment Power supply Fan module Upgrade options Redundant power supply Redundant resource module Redundant sync options Redundant crosspoint Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 1 1 1 2 1 4 2 9 8 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 2 1 1 16 16 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 4 4 1 1 32 32 4 (2 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 4 4 1 1 64 64 8 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 2 (1 redundant) 8 4 1 1 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7cm) 26.25 in.(66.7 cm) 210 lb (95 kg) 256256 17.5 in. (44.5 cm) 18.4 in.(46.7cm) 49.0 in.(124.5 cm) 350 lb (159 kg) 512512 5RU
(PM-FR-5)
9RU
(PM-FR-9)
15RU
(PT-FR-15)
28RU
(PT-FR-28)
8.75 in. (22.2 cm) 15.75 in.(40.0 cm) 68 lb (31 kg) 7264 125 lb (57 kg) 128128
Figure 1-1 7264 Physical Architecture (Front View)
Power supplies
MI module
Crosspoint module (128128)
Outputs 1-128
Inputs 1-128
Output modules
Reclocker Driver
Input modules EQ Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)
Power supplies
MI module
Outputs 1-128
Inputs 1-128
Outputs 129-256 4 3
Inputs 129-256
Output modules
Reclocker Driver
Input modules EQ
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)
Power supplies
Outputs 1-128
Inputs 1-128
MI module
Outputs 129-256
Inputs 129-256
Resource (2), TDM XPT (2), Sync (2), OM (4)
Outputs 257-384
Inputs 257-384
Output modules
Reclocker Driver
Input modules
EQ
Outputs 385-512
Inputs 385-512
Power supplies
The Platinum router's modular architecture consists of separate input and output modules, each of which contains eight inputs or outputs; and crosspoint matrixes (redundant crosspoint paths can be configured for robust operation). Depending on the configuration, one or more modules may be present in the frame for various optional functions. See Table 1-1 on page 3 for frame population information.
Detailed information about input modules (such as configuration, installation, block diagrams, and specifications) is outlined in Chapter 3. Detailed information about output modules is outlined in Chapter 4. Detailed information about crosspoint modules is outlined in Chapter 5. Detailed information about output monitoring submodules is outlined in Chapter 6.
A resource module (PT-RES) is required for system control. A second resource module may be added for redundancy. See page 27 for detailed information about the resource module. A single power supply supplies the core components for each frame size. Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies; or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy. Table 1-1 on page 3 shows the number of total power supplies required for each frame size. See page 38 for detailed information about the power supply module. The Platinum router supports several output monitoring modules, which are available as options. See page 14 for brief descriptions of these options. Detailed information about these options (such as configuration, installation, block diagrams, and specifications) is outlined in Chapter 6. Status LEDs, viewable through the door, indicate power supply presence and status, resource card usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Two bicolor LEDs, also viewable through the door, indicate user-defined alarm conditions. Since the door is removable, frame cooling is fully functional whether or not the door is present. (For maximum cooling, we recommend leaving the door closed.) Frame modular components include the following items. These items are illustrated in Figure 1-5 on page 8, Figure 1-6 on page 8, and Figure 1-7 on page 9.
Input modules are located on the right side of the frame, and output modules are located on the left side, as viewed from the front when the front panel door is opened. Both module types are visible from the front when the front panel door is opened. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.) The resource module and optional redundant resource module are located in the middle of the frame in 28RU frames, and below the output modules in 5RU, 9RU and 15RU frames. Resource modules are visible when the front panel door is opened. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.) The sync module and optional redundant sync module are located below the resource modules in 5RU frames and above the resource modules in 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.) Sync modules are visible when the front panel door is opened.
Figure 1-5 Platinum 5RU Frame Modular Components
Figure 1-6 Platinum Frame Modular Components (15RU Shown)
Power supply modules are located at the bottom of the frame in 5RU frames, at the top of the frame in 9RU and 15RU frames, and at the top and the bottom of the frame in 28RU frames. (See Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6.)
Back panel I/O modules mount to the rear of the frame (behind the input and output modules) and provide input and output connections for the system. (See Figure 1-7.) The same BNC back panel I/O module is used for the inputs as well as the outputs. Fans are located on the rear of the frame and are individually removable in case of a failure. (See Figure 1-7.) The communications back panel is located bottom of the frame, below the back panel connectors for the output modules. (See Figure 1-7.)
Figure 1-7 Platinum 15RU Frame Showing Back Panel
10
Frame Matrix Functional Arrangement

Frame-Specific Components
Table 1-2 Platinum Frame-Specific Modules Part Number PM-ALARM-5 Description Alarm module for 5RU frames; monitors power supplies and fans; provides both LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters within a Platinum frame (for example, signal presence, etc.) (see page 29 for more information) Alarm module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames; monitors power supplies and fans; provides both LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters within a Platinum frame (for example, signal presence, etc.) (see page 34 for more information) Communications back panel module for 5RU frames; interfaces between communications connectors and resource modules (see page 24 for more information) Communications back panel module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames; interfaces between communications connectors and resource modules (see page 24 for more information) Fan module for 5RU frames; cools all modules (see page 48 for more information) Fan module for 9RU frames; cools all modules (see page 48 for more information) Fan modules for 15RU and 28RU frames; cool input, output, and resource modules (see page 48 for more information) Module interconnect; passive central signal distribution modules for Platinum frames (see page 23 for more information)
PT-ALARM
PM5-CBP
PT-CBP
PM-FAN-5 PM-FAN-8 PT-FAN-14 PT-FAN-16 PM-MI-5 PM-MI-9 PT-MI-15 PT-MI-28 PT-PD
Power distribution module; interfaces with power supplies and distributes power to a Platinum system (see page 41 for more information) AC power supply module (see page 38 for more information) DC power supply module (see page 38 for more information) Resource module; provides control logic for a Platinum frame (see page 27 for more information) Sync module; allows for distribution of 1-4 independent channels of sync signals to input and output modules placed within a Platinum frame (see page 49 for more information) Module interconnect; central signal distribution module for a Platinum frame (see page 53 for more information)
PT-PS PT-PS-DC PT-RES PT-SYNC
PT-SYNC-MI
11
Module-Specific Components
Input modules, output modules, and crosspoint modules are available in PM and PT series. PM-series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT-series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Input Modules
Note: See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for information about installing input modules. See Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 323 for information about installing PT-HS1310S-IB fiber optical modules. Table 1-3 Input Modules Part Number PM-ADC-IB PT-ADC-IB PM-ADCT-IB PT-ADCT-IB PM-AEB-IB PM-AEC-IB PT-AEB-IB PT-AEC-IB PM-AEBT-IB PM-AECT-IB PT-AEBT-IB PT-AECT-IB PM-DEC-IB PT-DEC-IB PT-DMX-3G PT-DMX PT-FSDMX-IBG PT-FSDMXO-IBG PT-HS1310S-IB PM-HS-IB PT-HS-IB PM-HS-IB+ PT-HS-IB+ PT-HSO-IB+ PT-HSR8C1D-IBG PT-HSR1D-IBG (New) Description Audio A/D input module (see page 96) Audio A/D input module with TDM capability (see page 106) AES input front module (see page 75)
AES input front module with TDM capability (see page 82)
Video A/D input module (decoder) (see page 90) Submodule designed to de-embed embedded audio and distribute audio and video signals to separate crosspoints (see page 127) Frame synchronizer and demultiplexing input modules (see page 135) Fiber optical receiver module (see page 116) Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s (see page 59) Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s (see page 63) Fiber optical 3 Gb HD-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI serial video receiver (see page 120) Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules (see page 155)
12
Table 1-3 Input Modules (Continued) Part Number PM-S-IB PT-S-IB PM-S-IB+ PT-S-IB+ PT-MADI4C-IBG (New) Description Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s (see page 71) Digital multi-rate version designed to support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s (see page 67) Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module (see page 163)
Output Modules
Note: See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for information about installing output modules. See Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 323 for information about installing PT-HSR1310S-OB fiber optical modules. Table 1-4 Output Modules Part Number PM-AEB-OB PM-AEC-OB PT-AEB-OB PT-AEC-OB PM-AEBT-OB PM-AECT-OB PT-AEBT-OB PT-AECT-OB PM-DAC-OB PT-DAC-OB PM-DACT-OB PT-DACT-OB PM-ENC-DOB PT-ENC-DOB PM-ENC-OB PT-ENC-OB PT-HSR1310S-OB PM-HSR-DOB PT-HSR-DOB Description AES balanced/unbalanced (coaxial) output front module (see page 218)
AES output front module with TDM capability (see page 224)
AES to analog audio converter output module (see page 237) Audio D/A output module with TDM capability (see page 244) SDI to analog video encoder module and dual output back panel (see page 231) SDI to analog video encoder module (see page 231) Fiber optical transmitter module (see page 252) Dual wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with reclocking for all standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual outputs (see page 198) Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s with reclocking for all standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 198) Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s with reclocking for 270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, and 3 Gb/s data rates (see page 186)
PM-HSR-OB PT-HSR-OB PM-HSR-OB+ PT-HSR-OB+
13
Table 1-4 Output Modules (Continued) Part Number PM-HSR-OBG+ PT-HSR-OBG+ PT-HSRO-OB+ PT-HSRO-OBG+ PT-MUX-3G PT-MUX PT-MADI-OBG (New) PM-SR-DOB PT-SR-DOB PM-SR-OB PT-SR-OB PM-SR-OB+ PT-SR-OB+ PM-SR-OBG+ PT-SR-OBG+ Description Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s with reclocking for 270 Mb/s, 1.5 Gb/s, and 3 Gb/s data rates (see page 181) Fiber 3 Gb HD-SDI/HD-SDI/ SD-SDI optical transmitter module (see page 192) Fiber 3 Gb HD-SDI/HD-SDI/ SD-SDI optical transmitter module with power saving (see page 192) Submodule designed to embed audio and video signals (see page 257) Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output Module (see page 265) Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for all standard SMPTE data rates in this range; dual outputs (see page 213) Digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for all standard SMPTE data rates in this range (see page 213) Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for 270 Mb/s data rate (see page 208) Wideband, digital multi-rate version designed to support bilevel digital signals between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with reclocking for 270 Mb/s data rate (see page 204)
Crosspoint Modules
Note: See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Crosspoint Modules on page 321 for information about installing crosspoint modules. Table 1-5 Crosspoint Modules Part Number PM-4032-3G5 PM-6464-X9 PM-6464-3G9 PM-7264-3G5 PM-128128-X9 PM-128128-3G9 Description 33 Gb HD-SDI 4032 crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see page 282 for more information) 6464 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 284 for more information) 3 Gb HD-SDI 6464 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 284 for more information) 3 Gb HD-SDI 7264 crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see page 286 for more information) 128128 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 286 for more information) 3 Gb HD-SDI 128128 crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 286 for more information)
14
Table 1-5 Crosspoint Modules(Continued) Part Number PT-128256-X15 PT-128x256-XPT PT-128256-3G15 PT-128256-3G28 PM-ATDM9-X5 PM-ATDM16-X9 PT-ATDM16-X15 PT-ATDM32-X15 PT-ATDM32-X28 PT-ATDM64-X28 Description 128256 crosspoint module for 15RU and 28RU frames (see page 290 for more information) 3 Gb HD-SDI 128256 crosspoint module for 15RU and 28RU frames (see page 290 for more information)
98 TDM crosspoint module for 5RU frames (see page 292 for more information) 1616 TDM crosspoint module for 9RU frames (see page 292 for more information)
1616 TDM crosspoint module for 15RU frames (see page 292 for more information) 3232 TDM crosspoint module for 15RU frames (see page 292 for more information) 3232 TDM crosspoint module for 28RU frames (see page 292 for more information) 6464 TDM crosspoint module for 28RU frames (see page 292 for more information)
Output Monitoring Modules

Note: See Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 328 for information about installing output monitoring modules. Table 1-6 Output Monitoring Modules Part Number PT-HSR-OM PT-HSRAEC-OM Description HD/SD output monitoring input/output module (see page 303 for more information) 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI serial video and AES audio output monitoring module (see page 307 for more information)
Back Panel Input/Output (I/O) Modules

Note: See Installing Back Panel Modules on page 330 for information about installing back panel modules. Table 1-7 Back Panel Modules Part Number PT-A2-BP PT-A2-DTB PT-AEB-IBP PT-AEB-OBP Description Analog stereo audio back module Terminal block adapter, accommodates wiring of individual signals to a frame (see page 98 and page 237 for more information) AES balanced input back module (see page 76 and page 83 for corresponding input modules) AES balanced output back module (see page 219 for corresponding output module)
15
Table 1-7 Back Panel Modules (Continued) Part Number PT-AEC-BOC Description Coaxial AES break-out cable for use with PM-AEC-IBP, PM-AEC-OBP, PT-AEC-IBP, and PT-AEC-OBP back modules (see page 76, page 83, and page 219 for more information) AES coaxial input back module (see page 76 for corresponding input module) AES coaxial output back module (see page 219 for corresponding output module) Coaxial AES audio input back module with PT-AEC-BOC (requires PT-x-ATDM-XPT) Coaxial AES audio output back module with PT-AEC-BOC (requires PT-x-ATDM-XPT) Fiber optical input back module (see page 117) Fiber optical output back module (see page 253) Back panel module for Platinum power saving modules (see page 186 for corresponding output modules) Fiber optical input back module (see page 121 and page 193 for corresponding modules) 8-BNC back module (HS, S, ENC, DEC)
PT-AEC-IBP PT-AEC-OBP PT-AECT-IBP PT-AECT-OBP PT-FO-BMI PT-FO-BMO PT-HS-BP+ PT-SFP2X4+BM PT-V-BP
Front Panel LED Indicators

The front panel LED indicators originate on the resource module(s) and power supply module(s).
Status LEDs indicate power supply status, resource module usage, and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports. Alarm LEDs indicate user-defined alarm conditions.
The LEDs on the front of these two module types shine through a lens in the front panel door. These LED indicators are shown in Figure 1-8.
16
These front panel LED indicators reflect the status of subsystems inside the frame. The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supplys fan. The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frames resource module. These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists. CAUTION Both alarm LEDs simultaneously flashing red indicates that the PT-RES resource module has experienced a failure condition and needs to be rebooted. Reboot the PT-RES module as soon as possible, and then notify Customer Service
Figure 1-8 Front Panel LED Indicators
17
Control Features
Your Platinum router makes use of the most innovative control systems available on the market today. The operating system used for the Platinum router is a real-time embedded operating system that uses an interrupt-driven and priority-based task scheduling algorithm to control the operations of the router. This means that switches will occur in a timely manner, which allows the Platinum router to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is crucial to the success of the facility.
Physical
The control system reports information related to the physical properties of the control subsystem components, such as

Number of control modules actually installed Hardware revision(s) of installed modules Number of coprocessors actually installed Type, number and revision of internal control communications network components that are installed.
Parametric
The control system reports information related to the control system itself, such as

Number of operational logic/resource modules Condition of operation (for example, active/standby, etc.) Installed firmware/software version(s) Available memory (volatile/nonvolatile/internal or external) Installed communications ports Configuration parameters important to the control system (for example, communication port parameters, condition of ports, ports in use) Installed file systems/memory devices
Signal
Physical
The control system reports information related to the physical components involved in switching, monitoring and/or processing signals/data streams, such as

Number of components (for example, input/output modules, etc.) that may be installed Number of components installed (for example, number of crosspoint modules, processing modules, other signal handling components) Type of components installed Hardware, software, and firmware revision(s) for each installed component Condition (operational/standby/fault) of each device
Parametric
The control system can report and set, as appropriate, information about configuration (or can provide the status) of all components involved in signal switching, processing, or monitoring, such as
18
Status of all controllable or readable settings/values on installed components These settings and values include all parameters affecting the signal path (e.g. processing settings such as EQ, gain, reclocker) or otherwise related to the signal path (for example, signal presence; reclocker lock; sync signal presence, type, and lock).
Note: Other than physical frame failure alarms (fans, power supplies, and so forth), no default alarms are specified.

Logical configuration of the signal components (e.g. partitioning, offsets) All parameters may be defined as alarms with user-definable alarm states. All alarms support user-settable threshold and hysteresis with local and remote alarm acknowledgement and disable functionality.
CCS Control System Integration Requirements

The Platinum router is supported by the CCS Navigator architecture with the router module installed. Also, support for SNMP interface is routed directly to the frame; no gateway is required.
Real-time Requirements
All switches referenced to the same sync signal will occur within the same vertical interval. If multiple sync signals are provided to the frame, all switches will occur within the same number of frames as there are sync signals (i.e., if three sync signals are provided, all switches will occur within three frames). If no sync signals are present, the switches occur asynchronously after a reasonable time-out period (less than 0.1 seconds from reception of command), resulting in deterministic operation. If a sync signal was present and then removed, the switches will remain timed to that sync for a specified period of time (based on sync type); this provides robust operation in case of sync failure in the system (for example, wiring fault, etc.).
Applications Integration
The CCS control system supports the Platinum router via the new Navigator architecture with the Router module installed, and is available for control and monitoring from any Harris-or SNMP-supported control application. And with RouterMapper, the frame supports upload/download of configurations and macro/salvo commands. All reportable/controllable information is available through a central/core Programming interface that allows any or all protocol interfaces (terminal, message-based or otherwise) to monitor, control, or query these values, to the extent that is provided for by each protocol or interface and that satisfies product feature requirements.
Frame
The frame is the physical frame that houses the router and provides the physical structure to which all hardware components are mounted, power supplies and their associated fans and means of distributing power, and all fans responsible for airflow through the frame. Physical information related to this system involves the presence/absence and type of the installed components. Parametric information related to this system generally describes status of the physical components operation.
19
Physical
The control system allows the reporting of physical frame components installed in the system, such as

Frame size and frame firmware revision(s) Number of cooling fans installed Number of power supplies installed
Parametric
The control system allows the reporting (as simple status parameters) the condition of all frame related status information, such as

Upper-, lower-, and control-fan group alarms Power supply operation for all installed power supplies Condition of power supply voltage rails Internal temperature of frame External ambient temperature
Control Subsystem
The control subsystem consists of components such as resource modules and associated firmware/software programs, coprocessor hardware and associated firmware/software programs, and the internal (to the product) networks responsible for their communications.
Control Panels
You can control the Platinum routing system with the Harris standard line of control panels via X-Y over serial, coax, or Ethernet. You can find control panel operating information in the following manuals:
NUCLEUS network control panel NUCLEUS Control Panel Installation and Operation Manual LCD programmable control panel RCP-IDe Control Panels Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual ABA control panels RCP-ABA Programmable Control Panel Series Configuration and Operation Manual and RCP-ABAe Alphanumeric Breakaway Programmable Control Panel Series Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual Programmable control panels RCP-p Programmable Control Panel Series Configuration and Operation Manual
Configuration and System Status Information

Card-edge controls located on the front of the resource modules provide configuration and basic system status information. The card-edge controls replace DIP switches. You can find more information about card-edge controls in Chapter 8, Configuration.
20
Protocol Support
The Platinum router supports X-Y (serial, coax, and Ethernet) and SNMP directly to the frame. Other protocol modules supported within the standard protocol architecture are uploadable for use in the Platinum router.
Integration Required With Other Products, Applications, Services

Platinum routers coexist in our CCS control system, and can be controlled and monitored from any Harris-or SNMP-supported control application.
Software Control Applications

There are several software options available to control your Harris products through the Platinum router.
CCS Pilot
CCS Pilot is an integrated software application that contains the tools you need to configure, control, monitor, and secure access to our equipment on your network, regardless of how geographically dispersed your equipment is.
CCS Navigator
CCS Navigator software provides graphical tools that will enable you to create easy-to-use graphical pages that visually represent your networks many devices, systems, and environments. These graphical pages allow you to consolidate and ease network-wide status monitoring, leading to more efficient deployment of human resources for monitoring and troubleshooting tasks.
RouterMapper
RouterMapper configuration utility software is an easy-to-use Microsoft Windows1-based application for programming RouterWorks, other router frames, control panels, and the Opus master controller. For a more information about these software products, contact our Sales Department or visit the Harris website.
Operating Modes
Harris also offers a wide variety of programmable control panels that can be used to control your Platinum router. The Programmable Panel Series uses Navigator and/or RouterMapper to program a panel for customization. Visit the Harris website, see your dealer, or contact us for more information on the Programmable Panel Series of control panels. See Chapter 8, Configuration, for more information on the control and configuration of the Platinum routing system.
1 Windows
is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
21
Frame Specifications
The specifications in this section are for the Platinum frame and system-wide components. Specifications for individual modules are listed with their detailed descriptions. Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 1-8 Power Supply Specifications Item Power Output Specification Maximum 620 W power supply V1 = +5 VDC @ 10A V2 = +24 VDC @ 12A V3 = +24 VDC @ 12A Diode isolated Hot swappable 41F (5C) to 104F (40C) at 100% power rating 32 F (0C) to 122F (50C) at 100% power rating
Current sharing Performance temperature Operating temperature
Table 1-9 Frame Indicators Item

Control Indicators
Specification
5RU 9RU 15RU 28RU
CPU2: PWR, ACTV, FAN CPU1: PWR, ACTV, FAN
Power Supply Indicators for Fully-Configured Frame*
5RU 9RU 15RU
PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS4: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS3: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS8: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS6: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS4: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS2: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS7: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS5: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS3: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN PS1: 5V, 24V1, 24V2, FAN
28RU
* A fully-configured frame is one that has encoders and decoders, as well as all other modules and options, installed.
22
23
Frame Modules
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the frame-specific modules available for the Platinum router. Each module is described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters (if applicable), installation, configuration, functional block diagram (if applicable), and specifications (if applicable). This chapter covers the following topics:

PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames on page 29 PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames on page 34 PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module on page 24 PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame on page 43 PM-FAN-5: 5RU Frame Fan Modules on page 46 PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frame Fan Modules on page 48 PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect on page 23 PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module on page 41 PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module on page 38 PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module on page 27 PT-SYNC: Sync Module on page 49 PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module on page 53
PM-MI-5/PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/PT-MI-28 Module Interconnect

Operation
The PM-MI-5 (for 5RU frames), PM-MI-9 (for 9RU frames), PT-MI-15 (for 15RU frames), or PT-MI-28 (for 28RU frames) module interconnect is the central signal distribution module for the Platinum frame. This module provides all of the signal distribution between the input, output, and crosspoint modules. Along with the signal distribution, this module interconnects the control infrastructure and distributes the required power to the appropriate signal modules. There are no active components on the module interconnect.
24
Chapter 2 Frame Modules
Installation
The module interconnect is installed at our manufacturing facility. This module is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
This module requires no specialized configuration procedures.
PM5-CBP/PT-CBP: Communications Back Panel Module

Operation
Figure 2-1 PM5-CBP/PT-CBP Communications Back Panel The PM5-CBP (for 5RU frames) or PT-CBP (for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames) communications back panel provides the interface between all communications connectors and the resource modules. All control ports remain mute until, and only if, the router has fully booted and has established communications. Even in a powered-down state, a router connected to any communications system must not interfere with that system, and therefore must not violate the communications standard (RS-232, RS-422, IEEE 802, etc.) when in this state. A temperature sensor on the PM5-CBP/PT-CBP monitors the external ambient temperature. These connector types are available on every PM5-CBP and PT-CBP module:

Two X-Y ports Four sync ports Two serial ports Two Ethernet ports One USB port One alarm port
25
X-Y Ports
Each PM5-CBP/PT-CBP module includes two isolated coaxial X-Y ports with auto-switchover functionality in redundant X-Y operation. (When used with a safe hub in a star configuration, the frame automatically switches over to the second X-Y port when failure is detected on the first; this implies that only one is active at any given time). In standard operation, both X-Y ports are active and repeat communications on the X-Y bus between each other. This function can be set via the card-edge control interface on the resource module.
Sync Ports
Each PM5-CBP/PT-CBP module includes four looping sync inputs. Each sync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD Tri-Level, or AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals are made available to and are distributed by the resource modules to every crosspoint and output monitoring I/O module in a frame. The sync signals distributed from the resource module will remain undisturbed when switching over to a redundant resource module. In addition, the resource modules automatically generate and distribute an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present. If needed, optional sync distribution modules may be added to the frame to distribute external and internal sync signals to all input and output modules. These sync distribution modules also support redundant operation, and have the capability to seamlessly switch over when the redundant module is removed. Table 2-3 on page 50 shows the Sync Reference types and default switch points supported by Platinum.
Serial Ports
Frames support two serial ports with either RS-232 or RS-422 communication standards. This setting is configurable via the card-edge control interface on the resource module. Standard baud rates (9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200) are supported on the frame, and are configurable via the card-edge control interface on the resource module. Table 2-1 RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments
1 2 3 4
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Function Frame Ground RxD (Data received by router) TxD (Data sent by router) Data Terminal Ready* Ground Data Set Ready (DSR)* Request to Send (RTS)**
26
Table 2-1 RS-232 Signal Format Pin Assignments (Continued)

1 2 3 4
Pin 8 9
Function Clear to Send (RTS)** Frame Ground * Pins 4 and 6 connected internally. ** Pins 7 and 8 connected internally
Table 2-2 RS-422 Signal Format Pin Assignments

1 2 3 4
Pin 1 2 7 6 8 3 4 9 5
Signal (Tributary) FG Ta (Tx-) Tb (Tx+) Tc Ra (Rx-) Rb (Rx+) Rc FG SP
Description Frame ground Transmitted data (twisted pair) Received data shield Received data (twisted pair)
Connection to Remote Computer (Controller) Frame ground Ra (Rx-) Rb (Rx+) Received data shield Ta (Tx-) Tb (Tx+)
Transmitted data shield Transmitted data shield Frame ground (Not connected) Frame ground (Not connected)
Ethernet Ports
Frames support two isolated Ethernet ports, and one of these ports supports Fast Ethernet (10/100 full and half duplex communications). The connectors follow IEEE standards for the interface. Note: The resource module provide one host-based USB-A port for file transfer (USB flash module interconnect).
USB Port
The PM5-CBP/PT-CBP contains a peripheral USB-B port used for application interface and terminal emulation.
27
Alarm Port
An alarm relay port on the PM5-CBP/PT-CBP supports normally open and normally closed operation for frame alarms (for module failure, fan failure, or power supply failure). In addition to these standard ports, an additional ready line port is available to synchronize operations in a multi-frame system where other synchronization support is unavailable (for example, NTP).
Installation
All communications back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. This module is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
PT-RES: Platinum Resource Module

Operation
Figure 2-2 PT-RES Module The resource module (PT-RES) provides control logic for the Platinum frame. All parameters and settings are stored in non-volatile memory to prevent any changes from occurring due to a power interruption. Consequently, no power-down condition or sequence will affect the router control system in such a way as to prevent full recovery. Each Platinum frame can have up to two PT-RES modules operating redundantly. If one module detects failure of the other module, it will switch over control and continue router operation.
28
The PT-RES module also provides the sync processing necessary to determine the switch timing for the frame. This includes the standard sync separators for AES, PAL, NTSC, or Tri-Level HD reference inputs, along with support for Network Time Protocol (NTP), if an NTP server is available in the system. The NTP functionality supports time-sensitive operations, logging, and security. Each sync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC, PAL, analog HD Tri-Level, or AES signals. The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four inputs. These synchronization signals are available to and distributed by the PT-RES module to every crosspoint, streaming, and output monitoring module in the frame. Since the PT-RES module distributes these sync signals, it can tristate its sync outputs when a redundant module is present, and seamlessly switch over when the redundant module fails or is removed. In addition, the PT-RES module automatically generates and distributes an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present. The PT-RES module, and necessary communications between the crosspoint and I/O, support line accurate switching per RP-168. Switch setting resolution is in banks of 8 outputs (for example, outputs 1-8 switches referenced to sync 1, outputs 9-16 switches referenced to sync 2, outputs 17-512 switches referenced sync 3, etc.). For customers not using RP-168, the Platinum router supports advanced reference configuration, allowing the customer to set the time from the incoming sync pulse for switching. Each PT-RES module contains a card-edge control interface for frame configuration, and has LED indicators for the following:
The green LED labelled POWER is the power supply indicator. It shows that power is present on the module and that the +24V power rails are operational. The green LED labelled ACT RES is the active resource module indicator This LED shows which module is active in redundant configurations. It also blinks to indicate when the inactive module is downloading information from the active module. The green LED labeled ENET LINK displays the standard Ethernet link LED (in addition to the Link LED present on the connector at the rear of the frame). The two yellow and red LEDs labeled ALARM indicate user-defined alarm conditions.
CAUTION Both alarm LEDs simultaneously flashing red indicates that the PT-RES resource module has experienced a failure condition and needs to be rebooted. Reboot the PT-RES module as soon as possible, and then notify Customer Service. Along with these LEDs, there are labeled power and ground test points accessible on the front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification.
Installation
All PT-RES modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See page 331 for information about replacing the PT-RES module. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
29
PM-ALARM-5: Alarm Module for 5RU Frames

Operation
Figure 2-3 PM-ALARM-5 Module The alarm module for 5RU frames (PM-ALARM-5) monitors the core operating components of the Platinum system, and reports critical component failures via an external interface, so that you can take any actions necessary to maintain system integrity.

PM-ALARM-5 modules can control PM-FAN-5 fan speed and report fan failures. PM-ALARM-5 modules can externally report four user-defined alarms comprised of any mix of signals reported to the alarm module. In addition to internal alarms, PM-ALARM-5 allows you the ability to monitor legacy equipment via two remote inputs.
The PM-ALARM-5 module is accessible from the rear of the frame, located at the bottom. It provides normally open and normally closed alarm relay contacts for all frame- and user-configurable alarm options. This setup allows you to configure alarm contacts based on internal frame/port information (for example, signal presence on output 1 fails). The module is hot swappable and interconnects between the fan module and the module interconnect. (See page 329 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules.) The module reports alarms through the RouterMapper or Navigator software interface, and through hardware via relay contact closures and illuminated LEDs.
Controlling Fan Speed

The PM-ALARM-5 module allows you to control the speed of PM-FAN-5 via Navigator or RouterMapper. The selectable fan speeds are OFF, low, medium, and high. To set the fan speed, you must access the Fan_Speed_x parameter. Follow the appropriate steps (as described in the Navigator or RouterMapper manual) to open the Module Parameters list box, and then change the Fan Speed_x parameter instance to the desired setting.
30
Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures

The PM-ALARM-5 monitors the status signal of core components and report any instance of a critical failure. Reporting is done internally (through controls) and externally (via relay contact closure and illuminated red LEDs).
Figure 2-4 PM-ALARM-5 LEDs The PM-ALARM-5 module provides eight alarm outputs:
Four user-definable internal alarms On user-defined outputs 1 through 4, the alarm module communicates directly to the resource module via the PRTI interface. This communication provides you with access to any status signal reported within the entire Platinum system.
Two user-definable remote input failure alarms User-defined inputs 1 and 2 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/ failures and opens the ability to report these failures through the latest versions of control software such as Navigator and RouterMapper.
One power supply failure alarm Each power supply will provide a presence signal and four critical alarm signals: +24VA, +24VB, +5VL, and PS-FAN. All four components are critical to power supply and frame operation. If any the components reports a failure, a red LED will be illuminated to signal the critical fault. An LED that is not illuminated indicates that no alarm conditions exist.
One fan failure alarm The PM-FAN-5 fan module reports an alarm for each of 6 fans. On the PM-FAN-5 module, there is one LED for each fan. When a fan failure alarm occurs, you will be able to determine the fan failure by the color of the corresponding LED.

A green LED indicates that all fans are operational. A red LED indicates that at least one fan is not operational. An LED that is not illuminated indicates that fans have been turned off.
The DB-25 alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame.
Normally open/normally closed
Normally closed is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition does not exist and the frame is powered Normally open is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition exists
Relay common
31
The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions: Table 2-3 Alarm Conditions Alarm Condition PS fail Description Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure (in systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm will be asserted if any power supply fails) Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame cooling fans Provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/ failures and report those failures through control software Provide access to any status signal reported within the Platinum system
Fan (module) fail User-defined outputs 1-4 Remote inputs 1-2
The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the alarm condition does not exist. The relay is energized when power is applied to detect when power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted. If a relay fails or if the circuit controlling a relay fails, the relay will de-energize causing the corresponding alarm to be asserted. If the frame loses power, the alarm relay will become de-energized, and the alarm condition will be asserted.
Alarm port NC = Normally closed; contact shorted with common when alarm condition exists or frame not powered NO = Normally open; contact shorted with common when alarm does not exist and frame is powered
14 15 2 16 1
NC Common NO
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Alarm condition detected
25
Relay closed when alarm not asserted Relay open when alarm asserted or frame power is off
Figure 2-5 Typical Alarm Operation
Pinout Diagram
Table 2-4 PM-ALARM-5 Pinout Information
1+ 13 1S 25 112 2+ 24 2S 11 223 3+ 10 3S 22 39 4+ 21 4S 8 420 5+ 7 5S 19 56 6+ 18 6S 5 617 7+ 4 7S 16 73 8+ 15 8S 2 814 Spare 1
Pin No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Description
Reserved Common (user-defined 1) Normally closed (user-defined 1) Normally open (user-defined 1) Common (user-defined 2) Normally closed (user-defined 2) Normally open (user-defined 2)
13
12
11
10
Pin No.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Description
Normally closed (power supply alarm) Normally open (power supply alarm) Common (Power supply alarm) Normally closed (fan alarm) Normally open (fan alarm) Common (fan alarm) Floating
32
Table 2-4 PM-ALARM-5 Pinout Information

8 9 10 11 12 13 Common (user-defined 3) Normally closed (user-defined 3) Normally open (user-defined 3) Common (user-defined 4) Normally closed (user-defined 4) Normally open (user-defined 4) 21 22 23 24 25 Remote In 1 Common In 1 Floating Remote in 2 Common in 2
Installation
All alarm modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Alarm Modules on page 329 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
Controllable Parameters
The PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are enabled and/or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only.
Table 2-5 PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter User Configurable Alarm Out (1-4) Description Provides alarm reporting for any status signal reported within the Platinum system Controls fan speeds on the PM-FAN-5 module Options

No alarm Alarm Off Low Med Hi No Yes No Yes No Yes
Fan Speed (1-6)
PS Alarm (1-16) [RO] FAN Alarm [RO] FAN_CRTL Alarm [RO] Board Level Hysteresis
Trips relay if power to the module is lost I/O fan fail alarm Control area fans Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
The Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab. The Module Parameters list box is available through the Detected Matrices tab.
33
Table 2-5 PM-ALARM-5 Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Power Supply Presence (1-16) [RO] +24VA Fail (1-16) [RO] +24VB Fail (1-8) [RO] +5VL Fail (1-16) [RO] PS Fan Fail (1-16) [RO] Power Supply Zon (1-16) [RO] Description Power supply failure alarm +24 VA alarm failure +24 VB alarm failure +5VL alarm failure Internal power supply fan alarm Determines the zone that a power supply powers Options

No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 No Yes Low High No Yes Auto Manual
External Alarm Enable (1-2) External Alarm Trigger Valve (1-2) External Alarm Fan Control Mode
Enables alarms on GPI inputs to alarm module Determines value on GPI input that will trigger alarm Alarm reporting based on GPI input Determines if fan speed is automatically- or user-controlled
34
PT-ALARM: Alarm Module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frames

Operation
Figure 2-6 PT-ALARM Module The alarm module for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames (PT-ALARM) monitors the core operating components of the Platinum system, and reports critical component failures via an external interface, so that you can take any actions necessary to maintain system integrity. PT-ALARM can externally report four user-defined alarms comprised of any mix of signals reported to the alarm module. In addition to internal alarms, PT-ALARM allows you the ability to monitor legacy equipment via two remote inputs. PT-ALARM provides eight alarm outputs:

Two critical system component failure alarms: power supply and fan Four user definable internal alarms Two user-definable external alarms
You can control alarm parameters as follows:
User-defined inputs 1 and 2 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/ failures and opens the ability to report these failures through the latest versions of control software such as Navigator and RouterMapper. On user-defined outputs 1 through 4, the alarm module communicates directly to the resource module via the PIPE interface. This communication provides you with access to any status signal reported within the entire Platinum system.
The PT-ALARM module is accessible from the rear of the frame, located mid-frame between the 2 fan modules in a 28RU system, and at the bottom for 9RU and 15RU systems. It provides normally open and normally closed alarm relay contacts for all frame- and user-configurable alarm options. This setup allows you to configure alarm contacts based on internal frame/port information (for example, signal presence on output 1 fails). The module is hot swappable and interconnects between both fan modules and the module interconnect. (See page 329 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules.) The module reports alarms through software via the PIPE interface, and through hardware via relay contact closures and illuminated LEDs.
35
The DB-25 alarm/comm port reports alarms as they occur in the frame.
Normally open/normally closed
Normally closed is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition does not exist and the frame is powered Normally open is shorted with the common (closed) when an alarm condition exists
Relay common
The alarm port provides indication of these alarm conditions: Table 2-6 Alarm Conditions Alarm Condition PS fail Description Alarm asserted in the event of a power supply failure (in systems with multiple power supplies, the alarm will be asserted if any power supply fails) Alarm asserted in the event of a failure of the frame cooling fans Provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm/ failures and report those failures through control software Provide access to any status signal reported within the Platinum system
Fan (module) fail User-defined outputs 1-4 Remote inputs 1-2
The alarm relay circuitry has been designed so the relays are energized when the alarm condition does not exist. The relay is energized when power is applied to detect when power is lost and to allow the alarm to be asserted. If a relay fails or if the circuit controlling a relay fails, the relay will de-energize causing the corresponding alarm to be asserted. If the frame loses power, the alarm relay will become de-energized, and the alarm condition will be asserted.
Alarm port NC = Normally closed; contact shorted with common when alarm condition exists or frame not powered NO = Normally open; contact shorted with common when alarm does not exist and frame is powered
14 15 2 16 1
NC Common NO
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Alarm condition detected
25
Relay closed when alarm not asserted Relay open when alarm asserted or frame power is off
Figure 2-7 Typical Alarm Operation
13
12
11
10
36
Pinout Diagram
Table 2-7 PT-ALARM Pinout Information
1+ 13 1S 25 112 2+ 24 2S 11 223 3+ 10 3S 22 39 4+ 21 4S 8 420 5+ 7 5S 19 56 6+ 18 6S 5 617 7+ 4 7S 16 73 8+ 15 8S 2 814 Spare 1
Pin No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Description
Reserved Common (User-defined 1) Normally Closed (User-defined 1) Normally Open (User-defined 1) Common (User-defined 2) Normally Closed (User-defined 2) Normally Open (User-defined 2) Common (User-defined 3) Normally Closed (User-defined 3) Normally Open (User-defined 3) Common (User-defined 4) Normally Closed (User-defined 4) Normally Open (User-defined 4)
Pin No.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Description
Normally Closed (Power supply alarm) Normally Open (Power supply alarm) Common (Power supply alarm) Normally Closed (Fan alarm) Normally Open (Fan alarm) Common (Fan alarm) Floating Remote In 1 Common In 1 Floating Remote In 2 Common In 2
Installation
All alarm modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Alarm Modules on page 329 for the procedure for field expansion of alarm modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
The PT-ALARM Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are enabled and/ or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only.
37
Table 2-8 PT-ALARM Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter User Configurable Alarm Out (1-4) Description Provides alarm reporting for any status signal reported within the Platinum system Trips relay if power to the module is lost I/O fan fail alarm Control area fans Power supply failure alarm +24VA alarm failure +24VB alarm failure +5VL alarm failure Internal power supply fan alarm Determines zone that a power supply powers Options

No alarm Alarm No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 No Yes No Yes Low High No Yes
PS Alarm (1-16) [RO] Upper Fan Alarm FAN_CRTL Alarm [RO] Power Supply Presence (1-16) [RO] +24VA Fail (1-16) [RO] +24VB Fail (1-16) [RO] +5VL Fail (1-16) [RO] PS Fan Fail (1-16) [RO] Power Supply Zone (1-16) [RO]
Lower Fan Alarm External Alarm Enable External Alarm Trigger Value External Alarm
I/O fan fail alarm Enables alarms on GPI inputs to alarm module Determines value on GPI input that will trigger alarm Enables alarm reporting based on GPI input
38
PT-PS: AC Power Supply Module PT-PS-DC: DC Power Supply Module

Operation
Table 2-1.
PT-PS AC Power Supply Module
PT-PS-DC DC Power Supply Module
Figure 2-8 PT-PS Power Supply Modules Each Platinum 5RU and 9RU frame comes with one power supply module as a standard feature. A fully-configured1 5RU or 9RU frame needs one power supply. Each Platinum 15RU frame comes with one power supply module as a standard feature. A fully-configured 15RU frame needs two power supplies. Each Platinum 28RU frame comes with two power supply modules as a standard feature. A fully-configured 28RU frame needs four power supplies.
PT-PS power supply module: The 750 W universal input (100 to 240 VAC input) Platinum power supply provides two isolated 24 V rails and one isolated 5 V rail to the frame. See Installing Power Supplies on page 335 for details on power supply replacement. PT-PS-DC power supply module: The 750 W DC input (-40 to -60 VDC input) Platinum power supply provides two isolated 24 V rails and one isolated 5 V rail to the frame. See Installing Power Supplies on page 335 for details on power supply replacement.
A fully-configured frame is one that has encoders and decoders, as well as all other modules and options, installed.
39
Note: The Platinum frame is configured at the factory to operate either from an AC input voltage or a DC input voltage, but not both. This configuration is based on a customers order and cannot be changed once the frame leaves the factory. The AC and DC power supply modules are mechanically compatible with all Platinum frames and are similar in appearance, so you can easily install the wrong power supply module into a Platinum frame. For your safety, the configurations of both the AC input voltage and DC input voltage Platinum frames are such that, if the wrong power supply module is installed, no electrical fault will occur, no circuit breakers will trip, and the power supply module will not attempt to power up and will not be damaged. Most important, you will not be in any danger. If you find that either an AC or a DC power supply module will not power up in a Platinum frame that has been connected to the power mains of a facility, you should first confirm the correct power supply module was installed. Platinum frames configured to use 100-240 VAC require the AC power supply module; Platinum frames configured to use -40 to -60 VDC require the DC power supply module.
Installation
All power supplies are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Power Supplies on page 335 for the procedure for field expansion of power supplies. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 2-2 PT-PS/PT-PS-DC Electrical Specifications Specification Item Input voltage Input frequency PT-PS Universal AC input (100 VAC to 240 VAC) 47 63 Hz PT-PS-DC -40 VDC to -60 VDC
Power factor correction > 97% efficient, active, meets EN61000-3-2 as a Class A device when under 50% load Inrush current Output voltages* 35 Amps peak at 264 VAC Power supply efficiency 75% at full load V1 = 5 VDC V2 = 24 VDC V3 = 24 VDC 5 VDC @ 10 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps 750 watts (continuous) < 0.1%
35 Amps peak at -72 VDC 75% at full load V1 = 5 VDC V2 = 24 VDC V3 = 24 VDC 5 VDC @ 10 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps 24 VDC @ 15 amps 750 watts (continuous) < 0.1%
Output currents
Output power Line regulation
40
Table 2-2 PT-PS/PT-PS-DC Electrical Specifications (Continued) Specification Item Load regulation Output noise PT-PS 2.0% 100 mV P-P (20 Mhz bandwidth, measured across 0.1 uF and 10 uF capacitors connected in parallel) Non-destructively limit current to 120% rated load, square current limit with auto recovery Entire power supply shuts down if any output rail reaches 15% above rated voltage PT-PS-DC 2.0% for both 24 VDC outputs +6.0/-2.0% for 5 VDC output 100 mV P-P (20 Mhz bandwidth, measured across 0.1 uF and 10 uF capacitors connected in parallel) Non-destructively limit current to 120% rated load, square current limit with auto recovery Entire power supply shuts down if any output rail reaches 15% above rated voltage No damage will occur if the input voltage lines are connected with the incorrect polarity Active, all outputs, N+1 hot swappable (diode isolation), 20% tolerance on loads greater than 50% LEDs indicating 5 VDC, 24 VDC, 24 VDC present and fan fail on front cover LEDs indicate complete failure of voltage rails or fan, not deviation from specified voltages or fan speed PM-ALARM-5/PT-ALARM monitors all three voltage rails and cooling fan, and makes these four status signals available at the main connector for remote monitoring > 250,000 hours @ 30 C (excludes fan life)
Overcurrent protection
Overvoltage protection
Input polarity protection Current sharing
Active, all outputs, N+1 hot swappable (diode isolation), 20% tolerance on loads greater than 50% 20 milliseconds LEDs indicating 5 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V DC present and fan fail on front cover LEDs indicate complete failure of voltage rails or fan not deviation from specified voltages or fan speed PM-ALARM-5/PT-ALARM monitors all three voltage rails and cooling fan, and makes these four status signals available at the main connector for remote monitoring > 250,000 hours @ 30C (excludes fan life)
Holdup time Indicators
Alarms
MTBF
* All outputs are isolated both from the chassis and from each other. 5 VDC rail should rise to rated voltage 100 ms before the other two voltage rails. Fan MTBF per manufacturers specifications.
41
PM5-PD/PT-PD: Power Distribution Module

Operation
Figure 2-9 PM5-PD/PT-PD Module The PM5-PD (for 5RU frames) and PT-PD (for 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames) power distribution module is the interface between the power supplies and the Platinum system. The PM5-PD/PT-PD module facilitates 2N power redundancy through a configuration of internal and/or external power supplies. The PM5-PD/PT-PD also provides the means for powering the rear fan module(s), and acts as an intermediary point for the power supply alarm signals.
Power Distribution
On 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames, power is distributed throughout the backplane via a bus bar. (The 5RU frames do not require a bus bar.) The bus bar distributes power for each zone. Each zone of the bus bar is divided into four groupings (or distribution points) located evenly between every four I/O modules. Note: See Installing Power Supplies on page 335 for more information about power distribution zones.
Frame
Platinum 5RU frames use one PM5-PD module, which is located at the bottom of the frame. Platinum 5RU frames do not require a bus bar. Platinum 9RU frames use one PT-PD module, which is located at the top of the frame. To properly distribute power, Platinum 9RU frames require a single BUS-9 bus bar. Platinum 15RU frames use one PT-PD module, which is located at the top of the frame. To properly distribute power, Platinum 15RU frames require a single BUS-15 bus bar. Platinum 28RU frames use two PT-PD modules, located at the top and bottom of the frame. The top PT-PD module distributes power to zones 1 and 2. The bottom PT-PD module distributes power to zones 3 and 4.
Fan Module
The PM5-PD/PT-PD supplies power to the fan module(s) via a 6-pin power cable connector. See page 48 for more information about the fan module.
42
Power Redundancy
Power redundancy has been designed to meet a 2N criterion; that is, the PM5-PD/PT-PD provides 2N redundancy as an option to the user. This redundancy allows you to back up the router based on a fully independent AC line. (For example: A 15RU frame requires two power supplies, but supports four.) Redundancy within the frame is configurable via PS3 and PS4. (PS3 and PS4 are configured at the factory to power zone 2). PS3-PS4 can be configured to provide 2N redundancy for zone 1. Call your Customer Service representative for more information.
Alarm Reporting
While the PM5-PD/PT-PD does not have any control requirements or reportable parameters, it acts as intermediary device for alarm signals being passed from power supplies to the alarm module.
Power Requirements
+24 VA: Each rail can source up to 12 amps. Once combined (including 2N redundancy) the total power the +24 VA line can source is 1200 W. +24 VB: Each rail can source up to 12 amps. Once combined (including 2N redundancy) the total power the +24 VB line can source is 1200 W. +5 VL: Individually the +5 VL rail can source 10 amps. Once combined (including 2N redundancy) the total power the +5 VL line can source is 200 W.
Installation
All power distribution modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. This module is not user-replaceable. If you need to upgrade or replace this module, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
All power distribution modules are configured at our manufacturing facility. This module is not user-configurable. If you need a customized configuration for your location, please contact our Customer Service Department.
43
PT-EXPS: External Power Supply Frame

Operation
Note: External redundancy is not needed on 5RU or 9RU frames. These frame sizes already support the necessary number of redundant power supplies.
Figure 2-10 PT-EXPS External Power Supply Frame The optional external power supply frame (PT-EXPS) provides 2N power redundancy for expansion in high power applications. This frame holds up to four power supplies. Each of these four supplies connect to the Platinum frame via individual cables carrying two +24 volt rails, the +5 VL rail, and alarm signal lines. The 15RU frames support one PT-EXPS, while the 28RU frame supports two (one connected at the top and the other at the bottom of the 28RU frame). Call your Customer Service representative for more information.
Installation
For a standard PT-EXPS unit installation, the units should be located as follows:

15RU directly above the Platinum unit 28RU 1 PT-EXPS unit installed directly above and 1 PT-EXPS unit installed directly below the 28RU frame
This installation offers the optimal connection scheme. For non-standard installation, extension cables are also available that allow the PT-EXPS unit to be located up to 5 feet from the connection point of the Platinum frame. Consult you Customer Service representative for non-standard installations. This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-EXPS installation, please contact our Customer Service Department.
44
Configuration
The Platinum frame must be configured to interface with the PT-EXPS unit. All new Platinum orders that include a PT-EXPS unit will be configured at the manufacturing facility. For existing in-field Platinum units, please consult your Customer Service representative to arrange proper frame configuration.
Connecting External Power Supplies

Follow these instructions to connect the cables on the external power supplies.
Top Power Supplies Connections

Connect cables as shown for the top power supplies.
Figure 2-11 PT-FR-EXPS rear view
45
Figure 2-12 28 RU/15 RU rear-top view
Bottom Power Supplies Connections

Connect cables as shown for the bottom power supplies.
Figure 2-13 28RU bottom rear view
46
Figure 2-14 PT-FR-EXPS rear view
Connecting the D-SUB connectors

1 Connect the D-SUB connectors according to their respective labels. i.e. Label # 1 male connector to # 1 female connector, # 2 male connector to # 2 female connector etc. Secure the 2 halves by using the thumbscrews on the metal housing.
PM-FAN-5: 5RU Frame Fan Modules

Operation
Note: In case of a fan failure, only individual fans need replacement; the entire fan module does not need to be replaced.
47
Figure 2-15 PM-FAN-5 Module The fan module for 5RU frames (PM-FAN-5) contains 6 fans per module. A 5RU frame requires one PM-FAN-5 module. These fans are responsible for cooling all installed modules. The fans draw air from the front of the frame and exhaust the air to the rear. Each fan is monitored by the PM-ALARM-5 for rotor movement, which signals an alarm if a rotor stalls. The fan module will produce two failure alarms: one for failure of control section fans and one for failure of I/O section fans. You will need to visually inspect the fan module to determine which fan has failed. Control section fan failure will be reported as a critical failure alarm. I/O section fan failure will be reported as a general alarm. The fan speed is variable, and can be adjusted via the control system (see page 29). Each fan is accessible from the frame rear and connects to the fan module via a three-pin locking connector to allow for removal and replacement in the event of a fan failure.
Installation
All fan modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Replacing Fans on page 337 for details on individual fan replacement. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
48
PM-FAN-8/PT-FAN-14/PT-FAN-16: 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU Frame Fan Modules

Operation
Note: In case of a fan failure, only individual fans need replacement; the entire fan module does not need to be replaced.
Figure 2-16 Platinum Fan Module (PT-FAN-16 Shown) The Platinum fan module contains 8, 14 or 16 fans per module.

A 9RU frame requires one PM-FAN-8 module. A 15RU frame requires one PT-FAN-16 module. A 28RU frame requires one PT-FAN-14 and one PT-FAN-16 module.
These fans are responsible for cooling all installed modules. The fans draw air from the front of the frame and exhaust the air to the rear. Each fan is monitored by the PT-ALARM for rotor movement, which signals an alarm if a rotor stalls. The fan module will produce two failure alarms: one for failure of control section fans and one for failure of I/O section fans. You will need to visually inspect the fan module to determine which fan has failed. Control section fan failure will be reported as a critical failure alarm. I/O section fan failure will be reported as a general alarm. Fan modules maintain a constant speed and air flow whenever a frame is powered. The fans are grouped by power zone, so that each group of fans is responsible for cooling modules within a particular zone. Each fan is accessible from the frame rear, and connects to the fan module via a three-pin locking connector to allow for removal and replacement in the event of a fan failure.
Installation
All fan modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Replacing Fans on page 337 for details on individual fan replacement. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
49
PT-SYNC: Sync Module

Operation
Note: In 5RU Platinum frames with TDM, the sync capability is built into the crosspoint module. A separate sync module is not required.
Figure 2-17 PT-SYNC Module As part of the Platinum routing system, the PT-SYNC module allows for the distribution of up to four independent channels of sync signals to the various input and output modules placed within the Platinum frame. Using BNC connectors on the communications back panel (PT-CBP) located on the rear of the frame, you can distribute AES digital audio (DARS), analog video (black/burst), or HD tri-level sync to be used as required by the various I/O modules. Card-edge LEDs indicate the presence of sync. If no sync signal is presented to channel 1, the PT-SYNC module automatically distributes a timing reference signal (generated on the resource module) to be used for internal lock and switching purposes. If the TDM subsystem is used to route audio within the Platinum frame, an external AES reference (on Sync input 1, 2, or 3) is required by I/O modules. Sync 4 is used for internal synchronization and will be unavailable as an input. The AES reference must come from an external DARS or any other genlocked AES source. If TDM is present in a 9RU, 15RU, or 28RU Platinum router, a PT-SYNC module is required to distribute synchronizing information. The 5RU TDM crosspoint integrates all sync functionality, so PT-SYNC modules are not used in 5RU frames. Using both a Slot ID scheme and Inhibit signal, the PT-SYNC module is able to establish a primary/secondary redundancy with a second module. Upon failure of the primary module, it tri-states its outputs and passes functionality to the secondary module. Additional card-edge LEDs include the following:
The green LED labelled POWER is the power supply indicator. It shows that power is present on the module and that the +24 V power rails are operational. The LED labelled ACT CTRL is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a steady red when the module is being initialized, and then turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the module. It flashes green if there is an alarm condition on this module. The LED labelled ACT CARD indicates that the PT-SYNC module is in the primary mode and actively distributing the sync signals. (In certain failure modes, the module will still distribute sync signal even if the ACT-CARD LED is not lit on either module.
50
Along with these LEDs, there are power and ground test points accessible on the front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification. All Platinum frames support redundant sync distribution modules. Since the PT-SYNC can operate in a redundant configuration, it has the capability of tristating the sync outputs when the redundant card is present, and to seamlessly switch over when the redundant card fails or is removed. Table 2-3 shows the sync reference types and default switch points supported by Platinum. Table 2-3 Sync Reference Types and Default Switch Points Sync Reference Type Analog 525/60 Analog 525/60 / 1.001 Analog 625/50 19201080/60I 19201080/60I / 1.001 19201080/50I 19201080/30P 19201080/30P / 1.001 19201080/25P 19201080/24P 19201080/24PsF 19201080/24P / 1.001 19201080/24PsF / 1.001 1280720/60P 1280720/60P / 1.001 1280720/50P Default Switch Point Line 10 Line 10 Line 6 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7
Reporting
Each of the four sync channels will provide reporting of signal presence using a LED for each channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame control system. As well, four additional LEDs will indicate the following:

Internal / external sync Power supply indicator (all power rails are operational) Control system acknowledgment (control system is communicating with the module) Active module (output is in use or on-air)
Control Requirements
The PT-SYNC module uses the DA core control system for cost-effective basic functionality, which adheres to the Platinum Slot ID and PIPE control schemes. All settings for the redundancy circuitry are reset to a default configuration on module insertion.
51
Installation
All sync modules are installed at the manufacturing facility. See Installing Sync Modules on page 328 for the procedure for field expansion of sync modules. If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or the Sales Department.
Configuration
The PT-SYNC Parameters List includes all of the available parameters that are enabled and/or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only.
Table 2-4 PT-SYNC Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Distribution Enable (1-4) Reference Lock (1-4) AES Data Rate (1-4) Description Determines how sync is distributed through the Platinum router Signifies sync lock on PT-SYNC inputs Displays AES Ref data rate (if any) connected to PT-SYNC inputs Options

Raw Disable No Yes Unknown 192 kHz 96 kHz 88 kHz 48 kHz 44 kHz 32 kHz TDM sync pulse
Module ID
Displays unique module identifier of PT-SYNC
String
1 The Configure Module Parameters list box is available through the Configured Matrices tab. The Mod-
ule Parameters list box is available through the Detected Matrices tab.
52
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 2-18 PT-SYNC Module Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 2-5 PT-SYNC Coaxial Inputs Item Number of inputs Output type Band width Input connector Specification 4 Unbalanced Up to 50 MHz 75 BNC per IEC 169-8
53
Table 2-5 PT-SYNC Coaxial Inputs (Continued) Item Impedance Signal type Input amplitude Specification Hi-Z, looping AES (DARS), analog black/burst, HD tri-level sync 1.0 to 4.0Vp-p 10% into 75 load
PT-SYNC-MI: Sync Module Interconnect Module

Operation
Figure 2-19 PT-SYNC-MI Module Interconnect The PT-SYNC-MI module interconnect provides the interface between the PT-SYNC modules and the central signal distribution module for the Platinum frame (PM-MI-9/PT-MI-15/ PT-MI-28 module interconnect). It is located behind the PT-SYNC, and interconnects these modules with the MI module.
Installation
All PT-SYNC-MI modules are installed at our manufacturing facility.
Configuration
54
55
Input Modules
This chapter contains both a general description and additional detailed descriptions of the input modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum input module operates. Each input module is further described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block diagram, and specifications. Where appropriate, a modules corresponding back panel I/O module is identified. See Input Module General Description on page 56 This chapter covers the following modules:

Input Module General Description on page 56 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules on page 96 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability on page 106 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules on page 75 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability on page 82 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules on page 75 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability on page 82 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules on page 90 PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability on page 127 PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability on page 127 PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules on page 135 PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules on page 116 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 63 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 59 PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Receiver Modules on page 120
56
Chapter 3 Input Modules
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 71 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules on page 67 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules on page 155 PT-MADI4C-IBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module on page 163
Input Module General Description

Signal Input Connectors
Card-edge connector
Power
Control
Power
+3.3V +3.3V +5VL +24V GND +5V ?V ?V ?V ?V ?V
Test points
System
ACTCTRL POWER
Signal Presence
INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8
Handle cutout
System LEDs
ACTIN
Signal Presence LEDs
Figure 3-1 Typical Platinum Input Module
57
The hot-swappable Platinum input module contains 8 video input or 16 audio input channels, each of which are recovered and distributed to the crosspoint matrix module or audio TDM module. There are three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
The green LED labelled POWER is the power supply indicator. It shows that +24V is present on the module. The yellow LED labelled ACTIN is the input usage warning. It shows that the controller has recognized that there is an input on this module being used by an output. The LED labelled ACTCTRL is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a steady red when the module is being initialized, and then turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the module. It flashes green if there is an alarm condition on this module.
The green signal presence LEDs, labeled Input 1 to Input 8 (or to Input 16 on an audio module), are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input. There are test points near the front edge of the module for power supply voltages and GND. Each input module may be inserted into, or extracted from, a frame while a frame is powered and functioning. The system controller will recognize the addition or removal of an input module from any of the input module slots, and will update the change automatically. When the controller recognizes the addition of an input module, it will allow the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix. When inserted into the frame, each input module mates with a passive connector assembly (back module), which is mounted in the rear of the frame. This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module, without requiring any active components. Frames that are not fully populated with input modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non-populated slots. If an input module is added to the frame at a future time, the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module. Each input module provides signal presence indication via card edge LEDs and the control software, both of which have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software, along with a user-selectable hysteresis period.
Control Requirements
All settings for the input circuitry are reset to the input slots configuration on module insertion. Settings follow module location, not modules themselves. This way, modules can be moved from slot to slot without the need to reconfigure the input parameters.
Applications Integration
The CCS Control System supports each input module via the Navigator architecture with the router module installed, and is available for control and monitoring from any Harris- or SNMP-supported control application.
58
Controllable Parameters List

The Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings. These parameters are enabled and/or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only. Input module parameters lists are provided on the following pages: Table 3-1 Input Modules User-Controllable Parameters Lists Module Name PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Receiver Modules PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules PT-MADI4C-IBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module Parameter List Location Page 99 Page 109 Page 77 Page 84
Page 92 Page 118 Page 65 Page 60 Page 122 Page 72 Page 68 Page 158 Page 172
Submodules
A variety of submodules are available for Platinum input modules. See the pertinent input module section for a description of its associated submodules.
59
PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
Note: PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 3-2 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Module The PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ digital multirate input module receives any AC-coupled digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s terminated with 75. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the output of the equalizer will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module. The equalizer function may be bypassed if EQ is not desired. The PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional submodules.
Back Panel I/O Modules for PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB+ and the PT-HS-IB+ modules.
Submodules
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB+ and the PT-HS-IB+ modules. See page 127 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PM-HS-IB+DX are PM-HS-IB+ modules equipped with PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules. Modules marked as PT-HS-IB+DX are PT-HS-IB+ modules equipped with PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.
60
Installation Input Module Installation

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Back Panel I/O Module Installation

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Back Panel Modules on page 330 for the procedure for field expansion of back panel modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
This module requires no additional configuration procedures besides those described for frame configuration.
Table 3-2 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HS-IB+ and PT-HS-IB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-2 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Bypass (1-8) Mute (1-8) Cable Length Adjust (1-8) Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Sets the EQ mode Mutes the output of the board Sets the equalization cable length (for data rate not higher than 360 Mb/s) Options

Signal absent Signal present EQ bypass Equalized Normal operation Output of board is muted Max: > 350 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Short: 50 to 100 m Belden 1694A or equivalent No signal processing Signal processing enabled
Proc Enable
Enables signal processing (if submodule is present)
61
Table 3-2 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Pre-Emphasis (1-16) Description Sets the output pre-emphasis control for the onboard switchers Options

0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 5 dB
Receiver EQ (1-5) Board Level Hysteresis Module ID
Sets the receiver equalization for onboard switchers Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Displays module identifier of PM-HS-IB+ or PT-HS-IB+ module
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps String
62

Equalizer HD/SD input 1 Feedback from PT-XP Fanout 44 crosspoint HD/SD output 1A HD/SD output 1B
Equalizer HD/SD input 2
Fanout
42 crosspoint HD/SD output 2A
HD/SD output 2B
Equalizer HD/SD input 3
Fanout
22 crosspoint HD/SD output 3A
HD/SD output 3B

HD/SD input 8
Optional processing submodule
Equalizer
Fanout
22 crosspoint

HD/SD output 8A HD/SD output 8B
TDM output Sync inputs IB2IB Ethernet
+3.3 V
+1.2 V
+24 V
+3.3 V
EQ 1-8 cable length adjust
+24 VA +24 VB +5 VL SLID Power conversion and voltage monitoring DA core FPGA
D/A converters EQ 1-8 bypass/mute EQ 1-8 signal detect
PIPE
CPLD
Figure 3-3 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Functional Block Diagram
63
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-3 PM-HS-IB+/PT-HS-IB+ Input Specifications Item Number of inputs Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 424M*, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s 880 mV 800 mV 10% > 18 dB, up to 1.485 GHz > 10 dB, 1.485 GHz to 2.97 GHz Automatic 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A 492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A 230 ft (70 m) Belden 1694A
Maximum input amplitude Nominal input amplitude Return loss Equalization 270 Mb/s data rate 1.485 Gb/s data rate 2.97 Gb/s data rate
* Tested using JBERT (PRBS 23 and pathogenic signal types). As new test equipment becomes available, further compliance testing will continue.
PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
64
Figure 3-4 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Module The PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB digital multirate input module receives any AC-coupled bi-level digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s terminated with 75. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module.
Back Panel I/O Modules for PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HS-IB and the PT-HS-IB modules.

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

65
Configuration
Table 3-4 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HS-IB and PT-HS-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-4 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Bypass (1-8) Cable Length Adjust (1-8) Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Sets the EQ mode Sets the equalization cable length (for data rate not higher than 360 Mb/s) Options

Signal absent Signal present EQ bypass Equalized Max: > 350 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Short: 50 to 100 m Belden 1694A or equivalent
Board Level Hysteresis
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it
66

IN1 EQ IN2 EQ IN3
EQ 12
OUT1A 12
OUT1B
OUT2A 12
OUT2B OUT3A
OUT3B IN4 EQ
IN5 OUT4A
12 OUT4B
OUT5A Power-up Microprocessor System control
EQ IN6 EQ IN7 EQ IN8

EQ
12
OUT5B OUT6A
12
OUT6B OUT7A
Signal presence Bypass MCL ADJ

FPGA & D/A System control
12
OUT7B
OUT8A
12
+3.3V
Power supply
+24V
OUT8B
Figure 3-5 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-5 PM-HS-IB/PT-HS-IB Specifications Item Number of inputs Input connector Impedance Signal type Maximum input amplitude Nominal input amplitude Return loss Equalization 270 Mb/s data rate 1.485 Gb/s data rate Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s 880 mV 800 mV 10% > 16 dB, up to 1.5 GHz Automatic 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A 492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A
67
PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-6 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Module The PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ digital multirate input module receives any AC coupled digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s terminated with 75. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module. The PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional submodules.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+ modules.
Submodules
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule module corresponds to the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+ modules. See page 127 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PM-S-IB+DX are PM-S-IB+ modules equipped with PT-DMX-3G/ PT-DMX submodules. Modules marked as PT-S-IB+DX are PT-S-IB+ modules equipped with PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.
68

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion of input modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

Configuration
Table 3-6 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-S-IB+ and PT-S-IB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-6 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Bypass (1-8) Mute (1-8) Cable Length Adjust (1-8) Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Sets the EQ mode Mutes the output of the board Sets the equalization cable length (for data rate not higher than 360 Mb/s) Options

Signal absent Signal present EQ bypass Equalized Normal operation Output of board is muted Max: > 350 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Short: 50 to 100 m Belden 1694A or equivalent No signal processing Signal processing enabled
Proc Enable
Enables signal processing (if submodule is present)
69
Table 3-6 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Pre-Emphasis (1-16) Description Sets the output pre-emphasis control for the onboard switchers Options

0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 5 dB
Receiver EQ (1-5) Board Level Hysteresis Module ID
Sets the receiver equalization for onboard switchers Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Displays module identifier of PM-S-IB+ or PT-S-IB+ module
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps String
70

Equalizer Fanout 44 crosspoint SD output 1A SD output 1B Feedback from PT-XP
SD input 1
Equalizer
Fanout
42 crosspoint SD output 2A
SD input 2 SD output 2B
Equalizer
Fanout
22 crosspoint SD output 3A
SD input 3 SD output 3B Optional processing submodule

SD input 8
Equalizer
Fanout
22 crosspoint

SD output 8A SD output 8B
TDM output Sync inputs IB2IB Ethernet
+3.3 V
+1.2 V
+24 V
+3.3 V
EQ 1-8 cable length adjust
D/A converters EQ 1-8 bypass/mute EQ 1-8 signal detect
PIPE
CPLD
Figure 3-7 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Functional Block Diagram
71
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-7 PM-S-IB+/PT-S-IB+ Specifications Item Number of inputs Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s 880 mV 800mV 10% > 18 dB, up to 540 MHz Automatic 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A
Maximum input amplitude Nominal input amplitude Return loss Equalization 270 Mb/s data rate
PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB: Digital Multirate Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-8 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Module
72
The PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB digital multirate input module receives any AC coupled digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 880 mV from 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s terminated with 75. The module automatically compensates the cable loss if the cable length is within the assigned limitation. The equalized output is split into two identical data streams and fed to the MI module via a module edge connector. If the amplitude of the input data is smaller than the limitation (i.e., the cable is longer than the limitation), the EQ output will be muted and no data will be fed to the MI module.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-S-IB and PT-S-IB modules.


Configuration
Table 3-8 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-S-IB and PT-S-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list.
73
See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-8 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Bypass (1-8) Cable Length Adjust (1-8) Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Sets the EQ mode Sets the equalization cable length (for data rate not higher than 360 Mb/s) Options

Signal absent Signal present EQ bypass Equalized Max: > 350 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Mid: 150 to 200 m Belden 1694A or equivalent Short: 50 to 100 m Belden 1694A or equivalent
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it

IN1 EQ IN2 EQ IN3
EQ 12
OUT1A 12
OUT1B
OUT2A 12
OUT2B OUT3A
OUT3B IN4 EQ
IN5 OUT4A
12 OUT4B
OUT5A Power-up Microprocessor System control
EQ IN6 EQ IN7 EQ IN8

EQ
12
OUT5B OUT6A
12
OUT6B OUT7A
Signal presence Bypass MCL ADJ

FPGA & D/A System control
12
OUT7B
OUT8A
12
+3.3V
Power supply
+24V
OUT8B
Figure 3-9 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Functional Block Diagram
74
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-9 PM-S-IB/PT-S-IB Specifications Item Number of inputs Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s 880 mV 800mV 10% > 16 dB, up to 540 MHz Automatic 1,148 ft (350 m) Belden 1694A
Maximum input amplitude Nominal input amplitude Return loss Equalization 270 Mb/s data rate
75
PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules
Operation
Figure 3-10 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB Module (Shown with Connector Module)
Figure 3-11 PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB Module (Shown with Connector Module) The AES input front module receives any AC-coupled digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 2V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75 with the coaxial back module installed, and any digital signal with amplitude not exceeding 7V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110 with the balanced back module installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies the signal before distributing it to the crosspoint matrix. It allows for the connection of 8 channels of AES digital audio. Each of the inputs is presented to separate input buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to
76
balanced Low Voltage Differential Signals (LVDS) for use in the FPGA-based signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry. Figure 3-13 on page 78 shows the functional block diagram for the AES input module. The AES input module supports connection of 8 AES channels and performs basic signal presence detection. The optional 16-channel version includes the time division multiplexed (TDM) AES routing scheme (see page 82).
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB and PM-AEC-IB/ PT-AEC-IB

The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEB-IB and PT-AEB-IB input modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEC-IB and PT-AEC-IB input modules. DB-25 connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.
Figure 3-12 PT-AEC-BOC Cables


77
Configuration
Table 3-10 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEB-IB, PT-AEB-IB, PM-AEC-IB, and PT-AEC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-10 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB/PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Board Level Hysteresis Bypass (1-8) Back Module Type Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Bypass Platinum auto crosspoint mute if signal is not present Displays back module type connected to PM-AEB-IB, PT-AEB-IB, PM-AEC-IB, or PT-AEC-IB module Options

Signal absent Signal present

Off On PT-AEBT-BMI PT-AECT-BMI PT-AEB-BMI PT-AEC-BMI
78
Figure 3-13 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB and PM-AEC-IB/PT-AEC-IB Functional Block Diagram
79
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-11 PM-AEB-IB/PT-AEB-IB Pinout Information
1+ 13 1S 25 112 2+ 24 2S 11 223 3+ 10 3S 22 39 4+ 21 4S 8 420 5+ 7 5S 19 56 6+ 18 6S 5 617 7+ 4 7S 16 73 8+ 15 8S 2 814 Spare 1 1+ 13 1S 25 112 2+ 24 2S 11 223 3+ 10 3S 22 39 4+ 21 4S 8 420 5+ 7 5S 19 56 6+ 18 6S 5 617 7+ 4 7S 16 73 8+ 15 8S 2 814 Spare 1
J2 (Inputs 1 8) 1+ 11 Gnd 2+ 22 Gnd 3+ 33 Gnd 4+ 44 Gnd 5+ 55 Gnd 6+ 66 Gnd 7+ 77 Gnd 8+ 88 Gnd Spare Gnd
DB-25 Pin No. 13 12 25 24 23 11 10 9 22 21 20 8 7 6 19 18 17 5 4 3 16 15 14 2 1
Not Used
80
Specifications AES Balanced Digital Audio

Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-12 PM-AEB-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 Balanced, transformer coupled DB-25 110 AES3 AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.2 Vpp 7 Vp-p 5 Vp-p 1 V
Input amplitude Nominal input amplitude
Table 3-13 PT-AEB-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 Balanced, transformer coupled DB-25 110 AES3 AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.2 Vpp 7 Vp-p 5 Vp-p 1 V
AES Coaxial Digital Audio

Table 3-14 PM-AEC-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Specification 8 AC coupled 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter) 75
81
Table 3-14 PM-AEC-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs (Continued) Item Signal type Specification AES3id, SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p 1.0Vp-p 10% > 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz > 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Input amplitude Nominal input amplitude Return loss
Table 3-15 PT-AEC-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 AC coupled 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter) 75 AES3id, SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p 1.0Vp-p 10% > 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz > 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
82
PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB: AES Balanced Input Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB: AES Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability
Operation
Figure 3-14 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Module
Figure 3-15 PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Module Note: PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
83
The AES input front module with TDM capability receives AES3 inputs with amplitude not exceeding 2 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 75 with the coaxial back module installed, with amplitude not exceeding 7 V from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s terminated with 110 with the balanced back module installed. The front module recovers, reslices, and amplifies the signal before distributing it to the routers matrices. This module provides a TDM version of all input signals to be distributed to the audio-specific crosspoint module or, optionally, it can pass the first eight AES inputs to the wideband crosspoint. It allows for the connection of 16 channels of AES digital audio using either a balanced or unbalanced coaxial back module, routed within the Platinum platform. Using the optional 8- or 16-channel 110 balanced back module (PT-AEB-IBP), or 8- or 16-channel 75 coaxial unbalanced back module (PT-AEC-IBP), the AES input front module with TDM will accept up to 16 AES digital audio signals. Each of the inputs is presented to separate input buffers, which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) for use in the FPGA-based signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry. Figure 3-17 on page 86 shows the functional block diagram for the AES input front module with TDM.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB and PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB

The PT-AEB-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEBT-IB and PT-AEBT-IB input modules. The PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AECT-IB and PT-AECT-IB input modules. DB-25 connectors are used on both the PT-AEB-IBP and PT-AEC-IBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-IBP for connection to coaxial cables.

84

TAll back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Back Panel Modules on page 330 for the procedure for field expansion of back panel modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
Table 3-16 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEBT-IB, PT-AEBT-IB, PM-AECT-IB, and PT-AECT-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-16 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-16) [RO] Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO] Polarity Reversal (1-32) Tone (1-16) Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain Indicates type of tone to send out AES output Options

Signal absent Signal present No phase error Phase error Normal polarity Invert polarity Pass input Silence 500 Hz 1K No swap Swap left and right Copy left to right Copy right to left
Swap/Copy (1-16)
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels (NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing) Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude
Audio Level Adjustment (1-32) Clipping Detect (1-32) [RO]
10 dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments

Signal OK Signal clipping
85
Table 3-16 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Summing (1-16) Description Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2 (NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy) For signals routed to wideband xpt only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence Enables SRC, if licensed Determines crosspoint matrix requirement Options

No summing Right to left Left to right Both No bypass Ignore signal presence No SRC SRC enabled TDM XPT Wideband Both TDM and wideband Undefined Sync 4 Sync 3 Sync 2 Sync 1
Bypass (1-16)
Src Enable XPT Type
Audio Reference
Selects AES reference input for source
Board Level Hysteresis Back Module Type
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Displays the back module type connected to the PM-AEBT-IB, PT-AEBT-IB, PM-AECT-IB, or PT-AECT-IB module

PT-AEBT-BMI PT-AECT-BMI PT-AEB-BMI PT-AEC-BMI
86
AES input 1 AES input 2 AES input 3 AES input 4 AES input 5 AES input 6 AES input 7 AES input 8 AES input 9 AES input 10 AES input 11 AES input 12 AES input 13 AES input14 AES input 15 AES input 16 FPGA-based signal presence detection and internal distribution
Output 1A Output 1B Output 2A Output 2B Output 3A Output 3B Output 4A Output 4B Output 5A Output 5B Output 6A Output 6B Output 7A Output 7B Output 8A Output 8B All 16 inputs distributed to TDM matrix TDM output First 8 inputs distributed to crosspoint matrix
Internal control bus
+24VA in from frame +24VB in from frame +5VL in from frame
On-board supply
+5V +3.3V +2.5V +1.2V
Card status and signal presence LEDs Back module ID signals Control logic
PIPE PRTI
Figure 3-17 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB/PM-AECT-IB/PT-AECT-IB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-17 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information
J2 (Inputs 1 8) 1+ 11 Gnd
DB-25 Pin No. 13 12 25
J1 (Inputs 9 16) 9+ 99 Gnd
DB-25 Pin No. 13 12 25
87
Table 3-17 PM-AEBT-IB/PT-AEBT-IB Pinout Information (Continued) 2+ 22 Gnd 3+ 33 Gnd 4+ 44 Gnd 5+ 55 Gnd 6+ 66 Gnd 7+ 77 Gnd 8+ 88 Gnd Spare Gnd 24 23 11 10 9 22 21 20 8 7 6 19 18 17 5 4 3 16 15 14 2 1 10+ 1010 Gnd 11+ 1111 Gnd 12+ 1212 Gnd 13+ 1313 Gnd 14+ 1414 Gnd 15+ 1515 Gnd 16+ 1616 Gnd Spare Gnd 24 23 11 10 9 22 21 20 8 7 6 19 18 17 5 4 3 16 15 14 2 1
Specifications AES Balanced Digital Audio

Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-18 PM-AEBT-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Specification 16 Balanced, transformer coupled DB-25 110
88
Table 3-18 PM-AEBT-IB with PM-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs Item Signal type Specification AES3 AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.2 Vpp 7 Vp-p 5 Vp-p 1 V
Table 3-19 PT-AEBT-IB with PT-AEB-IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 16 Balanced, transformer coupled DB-25 110 AES3 AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.2 Vpp 7 Vp-p 5 Vp-p 1 V
89
AES Coaxial Digital Audio

Table 3-20 PM-AECT-IB with PM-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 16 AC coupled 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter) 75 AES3id, SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p 1.0Vp-p 10% > 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz > 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
Table 3-21 PT-AECT-IB with PT-AEC-IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 16 AC coupled 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adapter) 75 AES3id, SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% - 60% duty cycle digital signals 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s 0.1Vp-p to 2Vp-p 1.0Vp-p 10% > 30 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz > 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz
90
PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB: Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-18 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Module The PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB analog video to SDI decoder input module converts a block of eight composite NTSC or PAL video signals to high quality, 10-bit serial digital signals (SDI) for routing within the Platinum platform. This module also may be used for analog to analog video routing with the optional PM-ENC-OB or PT-ENC-OB encoder output module.
Hardware Reporting
Each of the eight channels will provide standard reporting of signal presence using a card-edge mounted LED1 in each channel for on-site troubleshooting and via the frame control system. These additional system LEDs are available:

Power supply indicator Control system acknowledgment Input usage warning
Composite Analog Input Processing

The PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB accepts eight 1 Vpp analog NTSC or PAL video signals terminating into 75 BNC connectors. Using the built-in automatic (AGC) or manual gain settings, the input signal level can be adjusted 6 dB in each channel to compensate for variances in upstream equipment. As well, each input is back-porch clamped to the proper blanking level prior to conversion in the analog to digital converter (ADC) and offers the ability to handle signals with a luminance pedestal (+7.5 IRE Setup).
1 See
page 57 through page 57 for more information about input module LEDs.
91
Composite Analog to Digital Conversion

Once the analog clamping and level processing has taken place, each channel of video is presented to a 10-bit analog to digital converter, which is phase and frequency locked by an internal PLL. Considering that the desired conversion is to component digital on this card, the analog to digital converters are 2X oversampling at 27MHz (4:2:2 data rate of 13.5MHz times 2). As a benefit of the 2X oversampling, a half-band decimation filter is applied right after the digital conversion to reduce the data rate to 1X the pixel rate, which effectively adds up to 3dB to the overall signal to noise ratio (SNR). Although sampled at a component data rate, the digitized composite signal is band pass filtered into separate luminance and chrominance channels (Y/C). The chrominance channel is sent through a quadrature demodulator for further separation into the base component color difference channels (R Y / B - Y). As the color demodulation process is likely to cause artifacts in the video, the R Y and B - Y signals are sent through low-pass filters to reduce those artifacts and achieve optimum bandwidth, and through a five-line adaptive comb filter to compare possible color phase shift issues from line to line. As the next step in the color demodulation process, a color space converter is used to convert the red and blue color components to U and V color difference components (Cr/Cb) as needed for ITU-R 601i and SMPTE-125M type signals. The RGB to YUV color space conversion is defined in the following system of equations:

Y = 0.299R + 0.587G + 0.114B U = -0.172R - 0.339G + 0.511B + 512 V = 0.511R - 0.428G - 0.083B + 512
In cases where the U/V bandwidth needs to be limited, as to prevent aliasing or chrominance crosstalk, a set of user-adjustable notch filters is provided. Although more of an issue in the companion encoder / digital to analog (DAC) cards, careful attention has to be paid to the implementation of these filters as a trade-off between frequency response and out of band noise is often encountered. In the interest of keeping the luminance or Y signal bandwidth, a peaking filter is available to the user. There are also controls for the user to set the brightness, contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and hue of the incoming video signal. Once the chrominance signals have been processed, they are reunited with the luminance (Y) channel to complete the 10-bit YUV component digital signal.
Component Digital Packaging

The parallel 10-bit component output of the ADC conversion is presented to the next process, where it is packaged with the digitized sync information and given the proper start of active video (SAV) and end of active video (EAV) headers for a SMPTE-125M compliant parallel output signal. Along with the parallel 10-bit video signal, a 27 MHz clock signal is provided for latching the data words in the downstream serializer device.
Parallel to Serial Converter

The parallel 10-bit video and clock signal are presented to the FPGA-based serializer for conversion to SMPTE-259C serial digital component video at 270 Mb/s. The 10-bit parallel word is latched into the serializer on the rising edge of the accompanying 27 MHz clock signal and serialized at 10 times the data rate (270 MB/s). As the serial data is used to clock downstream devices, the serial signal is scrambled and encoded using a non-return to zero (NRZI) algorithm to ensure that clock transitions occur during long periods of all 1s or 0s to keep the receiving PLLs locked. The NRZI / scramble polynomial is defined as
92
G1 (X) = X9 + X4 + 1 and G2 (X) = X + 1 The completed NRZI serial signal is buffered into two copies of itself for distribution to the crosspoint module(s) within the Platinum frame.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DEC-IB and PT-DEC-IB modules.


Configuration
Table 3-22 on page 93 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DEC-IB and PT-DEC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
93
Table 3-22 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Video Standard (1-8) Description Reports presence or absence of valid input signal Sets video standard Options

Signal absent Signal present Auto NTSC PAL B PAL M Combination PAL N NTSC 4.43 SECAM PAL 60 Enabled Disabled Luminance adaptive comb filter enabled Trap filter enabled Both filters disabled
Pedestal Enable (1-8)
When Enabled, removes 7.5 IRE video setup level; when Disabled, leaves the incoming signal level as is Enables or disables luminance adaptive comb filter type
Luminance Filter Type (1-8)
Brightness (1-8) Contrast (1-8) Chrominance Saturation (1-8) Chrominance Hue (tint) (1-8) Chrominance Adaptive Comb Filter (1-8) Wideband Chrominance Lowpass Filter (1-8) Chrominance Notch Filter Select (1-8)
Sets brightness level Sets contrast level Sets chrominance saturation level Sets chrominance hue level Enables chrominance adaptive comb filter Color lowpass filter selection Color notch filter selection
0 - 255 (128) 0 - 255 (128) 0 - 255 (128) 180 to +180 (0)

Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Notch 1 Notch 2 Notch 3
Board Level Hysteresis Bypass (1-8)
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint mute if signal is not present
0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps (1 s)

No Yes
94
Local I2C
Local I2C Bidirectional frame control signals
ENET PIPE
Control Logic
Card health and signal presence LEDs
Power failure monitoring +5 V +24VA Power from frame +24VB On-board supply -5 V +3.3 V +2.5 V +1.8 V
+1.5 V
Figure 3-19 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Functional Block Diagram
95
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-23 PM-DEC-IB/PT-DEC-IB Specifications Item Number of inputs Input connector Impedance Signal type Input coupling Maximum input amplitude Nominal input amplitude Return loss Clamping Quantization Filter Output data rate Frequency response Differential gain Differential phase Signal to noise ratio Bulk delay Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 NTSC, PAL DC coupled 2.0 Vpp 1.0 Vp-p + 10% Better than 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz Automatic 10 bits Five line adaptive comb, notch, or trap 270 Mb/s per SMPTE 259C 0.1 dB to 5.75 MHz < 1% < 1 > 65 dB < 80 s typically
96
PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules

Operation
Figure 3-20 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Module The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two optional builds (one option with High Z inputs, the other with 600 terminated inputs) provide 8 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum I/O module features. To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample data = 0) when the analog input is lost. The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable, and includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function. The duration for which this minimum amplitude is maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined. The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal (DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference signal. When this reference signal is absent, the PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance.
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB provides 8 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high impedance inputs; optional 600 terminated inputs are also available. Input signals are received by high-quality, audio line receivers containing internal laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common mode rejection. The signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers, and are then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators.
97
Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings. The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators. The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
A/D Conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling delta-sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These converters provide DC bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass filtering, and audio input clipping detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and CRC bits, and then encodes the data into biphase AES signals. Two copies of each AES signal are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the Platinum crosspoints.
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge mounted LEDs.
Eight green signal presence LEDs, labeled Input 1 to Input 8, are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input. Eight red signal clipping LEDs, labeled Input 1 to Input 8, are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included See page 57 through page 57 for a description of the system LEDs.
Operating Modes
The PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB operates in one of three modes: External, internal, and auto mode:.
In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES reference (DARS). The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference. In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators. These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the most common AES frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz). Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance.
98
In auto mode, the PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB detects whether a usable external reference is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it will operate as described in External mode; however, if the reference is lost or becomes unusable, the PM-ADC-IB/ PT-ADC-IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the reference is restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection

Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude. This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators. (The reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated. If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time duration, the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters. Conversely, the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to this function.
The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A/D converter. When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale capability of the converter, the red Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control system. The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADC-IB and PT-ADC-IB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
99
Figure 3-21 PT-A2-DTB Terminal Block Adapter


Configuration
Table 3-24 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ADC-IB and PT-ADC-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list.
100
See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-24 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-8) [RO] Clipping Detect (1-8)8 [RO] Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude Sets signal presence threshold for all inputs Sets 0 DBFS level Sets PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB operating mode Options

Signal absent Signal present Signal OK Signal clipping
Signal Presence Threshold 0 Dbfs Setting Operating Mode
0x00 to 0x7F

+13 dBu to +28 dBu +7 dBm to +22 dBm Auto mode Internal mode External mode 32 kHz 44.1 kHz 48 kHz 88.2 kHz 96k Hz 192 kHz
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Select
Sets the sampling frequency when in internal mode
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Adjust External Reference Frequency [RO] Board Level Hysteresis Ch. A Presence (1-8) Ch. B Presence (1-8) Ext. Reference Lock Error Ext. Reference CRC Error Ext. Reference Validity Error Ext. Reference Confidence Error Ext. Reference Parity Error
Adjusts internal mode sampling frequency Reports external reference frequency Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel A Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel B Reports lock error on external reference Reports CRC error on external reference Reports validity error on external reference Reports confidence error on external reference Reports parity error on external reference
0x00 to 0xFF 32 kHz -192 kHz 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps

Absent Present Absent Present No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
101
Table 3-24 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Ext. Reference Biphase Error Bypass (1-8) Presence hysteresis Silence Delay (1-16) Description Reports biphase error on external reference Bypasses Platinum auto crosspoint mute if signal is not present Sets hysteresis for signal presence parameters Sets the time duration between loss of signal presence and audio muting Disables feature of generating AES silence when signal is not present Options

No Yes Off On
7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps 100 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Silence Disable (1-16)
No Yes
102

Input Channel 1
Signal Presence Detection
Attenuator To FPGA
Receiver
A/D Converter 1
In 1 Vcom12 In 2
FPGA
Serial Data AES out Clip Detect
Analog Input 1A
AES Output 1A
Analog Input 1B
0dBFS adjust from FPGA Buffer, Filter, Single to DC Bias Diff.
Clocks, control
In 3
AES out
AES Output 1B
Analog Input 2A Input Channel 2 Analog Input 2B
Vcom34 In 4
Serial Data
Clip Detect

Analog Input 7A Analog Input 7B

AES Output 8A
AES out
A/D Converter 4 AES out

In 1
AES Output 8B
Input Channel 7
Serial Data
Vcom12 In 2
Clip Detect
Clocks, control Analog Input 8A Input Channel 8

Analog Input 8B In 3 Vcom34 In 4 Serial Data
Clip Detect
Sync Inputs
Sync Select
AES Reference Receiver
Clocks
I2C
Clocks VCXOs Control
+24VA +24VB +5VL
Power Conversion and Voltage Monitoring Thor Core

SLID PIPE PRTI
Control
PRTI
Figure 3-22 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Functional Block Diagram
103
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-25 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB Pinout Information
Inputs 14
1A+ 1A1A Gnd 1B+ 1B1B Gnd 2A+ 2A2A Gnd 2B+ 2B2B Gnd 3A+ 3A3A Gnd 3B+ 3B3B, 4A Gnd 4A+ 4A4B+ 4B4B Gnd
DB-44 Pin No.

15 30 44 43 28 42 14 13 29 41 26 40 12 11 27 24 39 25 10 9 23 38 37
Inputs 58
5A+ 5A5A, 6A Gnd 5B+ 5B5B Gnd 6A+ 6A6B+ 6B6B, 7A Gnd 7A+ 7A7B+ 7B7B Gnd 8A+ 8A8A, 8B Gnd 8B+ 8B-
DB-44 Pin No.

8 7 22 36 21 35 6 5 34 19 20
Not Used
4 3 32 17 33 1 2 18 31 16
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-26 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input Standard Version Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 Balanced DB-44 > 20k Stereo analog audio
104
Table 3-26 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input Standard Version(Continued)(Continued) Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Maximum input amplitude Full scale adjustment range CMRR Conversion type Resolution Sampling rates Specification +28 dBu 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB > 75dB rejection @ 60Hz 128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma 24 bits 32 kHz 192 kHz using external AES reference 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators 0.01 dB 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, 1 dBFS = +23 dBu < 100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical < 90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case > 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical > 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Gain stability Frequency response Linearity deviation THD+N Idle channel noise Dynamic range Crosstalk
Table 3-27 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input 600 Version Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Maximum input amplitude Full scale adjustment range CMRR Conversion type Resolution Specification 8 Balanced DB-44 600 Stereo analog audio +22 dBm 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB > 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz 128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma 24 bits
105
Table 3-27 PM-ADC-IB/PT-ADC-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input 600 Version (Continued) Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Sampling rates Specification 32 kHz 192 kHz using external AES reference 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators 0.01 dB 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, 1 dBFS = +17 dBm < 100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical < 90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case > 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical > 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
106
PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB: Audio A/D Input Modules with TDM Capability

Operation
Figure 3-23 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Module The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB audio A/D input module provides analog audio to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. Two optional builds (one option with High Z inputs, the other with 600 terminated inputs) provide 16 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum I/O module features. This option will provide the user higher conversion capacity (16 stereo channels), made available via Harriss TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) architecture. To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters, audio level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output (i.e., set all sample data = 0) when the analog input is lost. The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable, and includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function. The duration for which this minimum amplitude is maintained before muting occurs is also user-defined. The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal (DARS), to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference signal. When this reference signal is absent, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of several of the most common AES frame rates. Users will have the ability to adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance.
107
Analog Inputs
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB provides 16 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the PT-A2-BP back module. The standard option provides high impedance inputs; optional 600 terminated inputs are also available. Input signals are received by high-quality, audio line receivers containing internal laser-trimmed, matched resistors for maximum common mode rejection. The signals are converted from balanced to single-ended by the receivers, and are then attenuated and AC-coupled to the second stage attenuators. Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to a variety of analog audio levels. These low-noise, low distortion attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings. The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters, along with a gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators. The final analog stage provides low-pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before presenting the audio signal to the A/D converter.
A/D Conversion
Analog-to-digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24-bit oversampling delta-sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz. These converters provide DC bias voltage outputs, digital decimation and high pass filtering, and audio input clipping detection.
AES Outputs
The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into AES data streams. The FPGA inserts channel status, parity, and CRC bits, and then encodes the data into biphase AES signals. Two copies of the first eight AES signals are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the wideband Platinum crosspoints. The FPGA also provides a TDM version of all sixteen AES signals for distribution to the audio-specific crosspoint module(s).
Reporting
Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card-edge mounted LEDs.
The green signal presence LEDs, labeled Input 1 to Input 16, are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input. The red signal clipping LEDs, labeled Input 1 to Input 16, are located in a row on the front of the input module. Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude or level adjust available through TDM scales the digital signal beyond AES limits.
In addition, the usual three system LEDs are included See page 57 through page 57 for a description of the system LEDs.
108
Operating Modes
The PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operates in one of three modes: External, internal, and auto mode:.
In external mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES reference (DARS). The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference. In internal mode, all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators. These oscillators have been chosen to provide for many of the most common AES frame rates (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, and 192 kHz). Voltage-controlled crystal oscillators, or VCXOs, allow adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance. In auto mode, the PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB detects whether a usable external reference is present or not. If it is able to lock to the reference, it will operate as described in External mode; however, if the reference is lost or becomes unusable, the PM-ADCT-IB/ PT-ADCT-IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode. If the reference is restored, the board will again automatically switch over to operate as described in External Mode.
Analog Level Detection

Analog input level detection is provided in two forms:
The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are used to detect a user-defined minimum signal amplitude. This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile, digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators. (The reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all inputs.) If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator reference voltage, the green LED for that channel is illuminated. If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user-defined time duration, the sampled data output from the A/D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA. This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A/D and D/A converters. Conversely, the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an associated time duration before muting is released, providing hysteresis to this function.
The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A/D converter. When the analog level exceeds the digital full-scale capability of the converter, the red Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated, and the condition is reported to the control system. The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
109


Configuration
Table 3-28 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ADCT-IB and PT-ADCT-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list.
110
See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 3-28 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Signal Presence (1-16) [RO] Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal (determined by signal presence threshold, signal absence before mute, signal presence before mute release, and tone generation) Sets signal presence threshold (all inputs) Sets the time duration between loss of signal presence and audio muting Sets the time duration between acquisition of signal presence and release of audio muting Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain Indicates type of tone to send out AES output Options

Threshold (1-8) Silence Delay (1-16)
0x00 to 0x7F 7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Presence Hysteresis (1-16)
7.5 ms to 32.76 s in 500 ns steps
Phase Alarm (1-16) [RO] Polarity Reversal (1-32) Tone
No phase error Phase error Normal polarity Invert polarity Pass input Silence 500Hz 1K No swap Swap left and right Copy left to right Copy right to left
Swap/Copy (1-16)
Swap/Copy left and right audio channels (NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing) Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude For signals routed to wideband crosspoint only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence Determines crosspoint matrix requirement
10dB to -30dB in 0.5dB increments

Signal OK Signal clipping No bypass Ignore signal presence
Bypass (1-16)
Xpt Type
TDM XPT Wideband Both TDM and wideband Undefined
0dBFS setting
Sets 0 dBFS setting for analog to digital conversion
13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments
111
Table 3-28 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Operating Mode Description Sets PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB operating mode Options

Auto mode Internal mode External mode 32 kHz 44.1 kHz 48 kHz 88.2 kHz 96k Hz 192 kHz
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Select
Sets the sampling frequency when in internal mode
Internal Mode Sampling Frequency Adjust External Reference Frequency [RO]
Adjusts internal mode sampling frequency Reports external reference frequency (NOTE: Must be a sample rate supported by TDM)
0x00 to 0xFF

Unlocked Out of Range 192 kHz 96 kHz 88.2 kHz 48 kHz 44.1 kHz 32 kHz Sync 4 Sync 3 Sync 2 Sync 1
Audio Reference
Selects AES reference input for source
Board Level Hysteresis Ch. A Presence (1-16) Ch. B Presence (1-16) Ext. Reference Lock Error Ext. Reference CRC Error Ext. Reference Validity Error Ext. Reference Confidence Error Ext. Reference Parity Error
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel A Reports absence or presence of a signal on Channel B Reports lock error on external reference Reports CRC error on external reference Reports validity error on external reference Reports confidence error on external reference Reports parity error on external reference

Absent Present Absent Present No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes
112
Table 3-28 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Ext. Reference Biphase Error Summing (1-16) Description Reports biphase error on external reference Add left and right audio samples, and then divide by 2 (NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy) Disables feature of generating AES silence when signal is not present (wideband mode only) Options

No Yes No summing Right to left Left to right Both No Yes
Silence Disable (1-8)
113

Input Channel 1
Signal Presence Detection
Attenuator To FPGA
Receiver
A/D Converter 1
In 1 Vcom12 In 2
FPGA
Serial Data AES out Clip Detect
Analog Input 1A
AES Output 1A
Analog Input 1B
0dBFS adjust from FPGA Buffer, Filter, Single to DC Bias Diff.
Clocks, control
In 3
AES out
AES Output 1B
Analog Input 2A Input Channel 2 Analog Input 2B
Vcom34 In 4
Serial Data
Clip Detect

Analog Input 7A Analog Input 7B

A/D Converter 8
In 1

AES Output 8A
AES out
AES out Input Channel 7

Serial Data
AES Output 8B
Vcom12 In 2
Clip Detect
Clocks, control Analog Input 8A Input Channel 16

Analog Input 8B In 3 Vcom34 In 4 Serial Data
Clip Detect
TDM Output
Sync Inputs
Sync Select
AES Reference Receiver
Clocks
I2C
Clocks VCXOs Control
+24VA +24VB +5VL
Power Conversion and Voltage Monitoring Thor Core

SLID PIPE PRTI
Control
PRTI
Figure 3-25 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Functional Block Diagram
114
Pinout Diagram
Table 3-29 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB Pinout Information
Inputs 14
DB-44 Pin No.

15 30 44 43 28 42 14 13 29 41 26 40 12 11 27 24 39 25 10 9 23 38 37
Inputs 58
DB-44 Pin No.

8 7 22 36 21 35 6 5 34 19 20 4 3 32 17 33 1 2 18 31 16
Inputs 9 12
DB-44 Pin No.

15 30 44 43 28 42 14 13 29 41 26 40 12 11 27 24 39 25 10 9 23 38 37
Inputs 13 16
DB-44 Pin No.

8 7 22 36 21 35 6 5 34 19 20 4 3 32 17 33 1 2 18 31 16
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-30 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input Standard Version Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type
Specification 16 Balanced DB-44 > 20k Stereo analog audio
115
Table 3-30 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input Standard Version(Continued)(Continued) Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Maximum input amplitude Full scale adjustment range CMRR Conversion type Resolution Sampling rates Specification +28 dBu 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB > 75dB rejection @ 60Hz 128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma 24 bits 32 kHz 192 kHz using external AES reference 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators 0.01 dB 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB typical < 1.0 dB worst case < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, 1 dBFS = +23 dBu < 100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical < 90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case > 100 dB CCIR-RMS, typical > 90 dB CCIR-RMS, worst case > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
Table 3-31 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input 600 Version Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Number of inputs Input type Input connector Impedance Signal type Maximum input amplitude Full scale adjustment range CMRR Conversion type Resolution Specification 16 Balanced DB-44 600 Stereo analog audio +22 dBm 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB > 60 dB rejection @ 60Hz 128x oversampling, 1-bit, delta-sigma 24 bits
116
Table 3-31 PM-ADCT-IB/PT-ADCT-IB with PM-A2-BP Analog to Digital Audio Input 600 Version (Continued) Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Sampling rates Specification 32 kHz 192 kHz using external AES reference 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz, or 192 kHz using internal oscillators 0.01 dB 0.15 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB typical < 1.0 dB worst case < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, 1 dBFS = +17 dBm < 100 dBFS CCIR-RMS, typical < 90 dBFS CCIR-RMS, worst case > 100 dB CCIR-RMS typical > 90 dB CCIR-RMS worst case > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
PT-HS1310S-IB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Receiver Modules

Operation
Note: PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 3-26 PT-HS1310S-IB Module (PT-FO-BMI Back Panel I/O Module Attached)
117
The PT-HS1310S-IB is a fiber optical HD/SD serial video receiver module. These modules have eight fiber optical receiver receptacles mounted on the metal back panel of the back module. Each receptacle contains an ST connector, a PIN type photodiode, and a transimpedance amplifier. The receptacle receives light modulated by digital video data in the range of 1100 nm1650 nm, and converts it to an electrical signal via the internal PIN. An internal transimpedance amplifier amplifies this electrical signal to obtain the required amplitude for the following processing stage. The following stage consists of a limiting amplifier, which enlarges the electrical data to an 800 mV differential signal and feeds it to the front module. The front module receives eight-channel data through the module edge connector. Each channel is equipped with a 22 CML crosspoint switch, which is configured to 12. The outputs of this CML are sent out to PT-MI AND PT-XP for switching. If the input of this 12 selects a data from system FB (via an optional 1-8 buffer), the CML outputs to the module interconnect and crosspoint modules could be used for system test and diagnosis purpose. The output stage of this switch also provides a function of pre-emphasis. This function precompensates the transmission line loss for high-speed data, to reduce ISI jitter. The limiting amplifier in each channel of the back module provides an input data loss report. It is used to drive LEDs on the front edge of the front module. An FPGA provides control and communication required. Except for common functions (such as pipe line port, PRTI port, slot ID, power start trigger) this FPGA also control pre-emphasis amount for each output, normal/diagnosis selecting and data loss reporting, back module identification.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-HS1310S-IB

The PT-FO-BMI back module corresponds to the PT-HS1310S-IB modules.

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 323 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of PT-HS1310S-IB modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 397, for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Back Panel Modules on page 330 for the procedure for field expansion of back panel modules. If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
118
Table 3-32 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HS1310S-IB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 3-32 PT-HS1310S-IB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read only parameter Parameter Signal presence detect [RO] Bypass (1-8) PreEmphasis Description Reports presence or absence of valid signal Enables or disables the reclock bypass function Precompensates the transmission line loss for high-speed data Options

Signal absent Signal present No bypass Ignore signal presence 0% 25% 50% 100%
Represents hysteresis for all parameters that require it
119
Figure 3-27 PT-HS1310S-IB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-33 PT-HS1310S-IB Specifications Item Connector Mode Detector Wavelength Max. input power Min. input power (sensitivity) Specification ST Multimode (62.5m) PIN 1100 1650 nm > 7.5 dBm < 20 dBm for HD < 25 dBm for SD
120
Table 3-33 PT-HS1310S-IB Specifications Damage threshold Return loss Bit error ratio +1 dBm 20 dB 10E-12
PT-HSO-IB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Receiver Modules
Operation
Figure 3-28 PT-HSO-IB+ Module (PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Panel I/O Module Attached) The PT-HSO-IB+ fiber optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI serial video receiver module has 8 SFP-type fiber optical receivers that receive 3 Gb HD, 1.5 Gb HD, and SD serial digital video data from an LC fiber connector. Four SFP modules, each containing two channels, are mounted on the metal back panel of the back module. The receivers accept fiber optical signal within wavelength range of 1260 nm ~ 1610 nm. The SFP module can be replaced or changed from the back of the frame without removing the front module or disturbing traffic other than that on the SFP. The front module receives 8 channel data through the module edge connector. Each channel is equipped with a reclocker. The reclocker output is split into two identical data streams by an onboard crosspoint switcher and fed to the MI module via a module edge connector. The output stage of the switcher also provides a function of pre-emphasis. This function pre-compensates the transmission line loss for high-speed data, to reduce ISI jitter. The PT-HSO-IB+ has the capability to support a variety of optional submodules.
121
The SFP modules provide input data loss report, which is used to drive LEDs on the front edge of the front module and on the back panel of the back module. The SFP modules also provide input optical signal power measurement. Note: Ensure that you upgrade to the latest firmware version (3.5 or later) before installing an SFP. For details on supported SFPs, see SFP Specifications on page 123.
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-HSO-IB+

The PT-SFP2X4+BM back module corresponds to the PT-HSO-IB+ modules.
Figure 3-29 PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Panel I/O Module
Submodules
The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule module corresponds to the PT-HSO-IB+ modules. See page 127 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PT-HSO-IB+DX are PT-HSO-IB+ modules equipped with PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules.

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion of PT-HSO-IB+ modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 397, for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department. Note: Module fuses are designed to operate throughout normal operations. In the unlikely event that a fuse fails, return the module to Harris Engineering for diagnostic testing. Please contact Customer Service to obtain a return authorization number, and then refer to page xix for information about returning a product.
122

Configuration
Table 3-34 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HSO-IB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 3-34 PT-HSO-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read only parameter Parameter Sync Select Description Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference Options

0 1 2 3
Main Module ID [RO] Parameter Hysteresis (us (0.5 inc)) SFP(1-4) Type [RO]
Displays the Module Hardware ID. Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Reports type of SFP that plugged in back module 0 to 10 seconds in 500 ns steps
OP+SFP+RR See OP+SFP+RR Specifications. Unknown Invalid SFP On Off -29 dBm ~ +1 dBm ---Main module Submodule Auto
Signal Presence [RO] Input Optical Power [RO] Output Mode
Reports presence or absence of valid signal Reports input optical signal power level Determines if output signal comes from main module or submodule (if installed)
123
Table 3-34 PT-HSO-IB+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read only parameter Parameter Pre-Emphasis Description Sets the output pre-emphasis control for the onboard switchers Options

0 dB 3 dB 6 dB 9 dB 12 dB 5 dB Yes No Auto 270 Mb/s 1.48 Gb/s 2.97 Gb/s SD HD Unknown
Receiver EQ Lock Detect [RO] Reclocker Mode
Sets the receiver equalization for onboard switchers Reports if data is locked by reclocking stage Sets the reclock mode to automatic or to one of three manual fixed rates
Rate Detect [RO]
Detects data rate
HD is displayed for both 1.48 & 2.97 Gbps rates and SD is displayed for 270 Mbps.
SFP Specifications
The following are specifications for the supported SFPs. Ensure that you upgrade to the latest firmware version 3.5 or later before installing a new SFP.
OP+SFP+RR Specifications
Table 3-35 OP+SFP+RR specs Item Number of LC input connectors Input wavelength Optical power monitor accuracy Sensitivity at 270 Mb/s (SMPTE 259M) Sensitivity at 1.5 Gb/s (SMPTE 292M) Minimum 1260 nm -2 dB Typical -22 -22 Maximum 2 1620 nm 2 dB -20 -20 Pathological* Pathological Notes
124
Table 3-35 OP+SFP+RR specs Item Sensitivities at 3 Gb/s (SMPTE 424M) Overload Minimum 0 dBm Typical -20 Maximum -18 Notes Pathological 2.97 Gb/s*
*BER = 1E-12 against SDI matrix. Check field signals for video applications.
125
Figure 3-30 PT-HSO-IB+ Functional Block Diagram
126
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-36 PT-HSO-IB+ Specifications* Item Connector Number of inputs Specification LC 8
* For optical input performance specifications (Wavelength Range, Overload Input Power, Input Sensitivity, Maximum Back Reflection, etc.) please refer to individual SFP module specification datasheets.
Note: Datasheets of customer-replaceable optical SFP parts are available by request. Please contact your Customer Service representative for more information.
127
PT-DMX-3G: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability PT-DMX: SDI Audio De-Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability
Operation
Figure 3-31 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX Submodule When installed on PM-HS-IB+, PT-HS-IB+, PM-S-IB+ or PT-S-IB+ input modules, the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodule operates as an audio de-embedder.1 It demuxes up to 4 groups (16 channels) of audio per SDI path, and transmits up to 128 channels to the Platinum audio TDM crosspoint. When operating as an audio de-embedder the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX supports an audio TDM transmitter. In this mode, all 128 channels will be sample rate converted to 48kHz sampling frequency and locked to the provided reference.
Each SDI channel supports the following video processing standards:
SD-SDI

525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50

1.5 HD-SDI

All embedded audio must be synchronous to the video in order to de-embed.
128
720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
3.0 HD-SDI1

1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60
Each SDI channel supports the following audio functionality:

Embedded 4 groups (16 mono channels) Embedded audio at 48 kHz sample rate Audio Proc (gain, invert, mute) Audio Swap with quiet switching Audio Sum
Provides a simple test pattern generator (75% bars, 100% bars, Equalization Test, and PLL Test)
Note: All video channels need to be either SD, 1.5 G HD-SDI, or 3.0 G HD-SDI. All video channels must operate at the same frame rate (that is, 29.97 Hz, or 25 Hz, and so on.), and must be genlocked.
Operation Notes
A Genlock reference must be applied to the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX. All SDI channels applied to the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX must be locked to the applied Genlock Reference. All signals on an individual input module must have the same format (SD, 1.5G HD, or 3G HD). All SDI channels applied to the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX must be of the same data rate (SD, 1.5G HD, or 3G HD) and must have the same frame rate.
1 3G
HD-SDI is available as a licensed option.
129
The module will determine its data rate by the Input Rate parameter. The user can specify it to be SD, 1.5HD or 3G HD. If set to Auto, the data rate is determined by the first detected SDI signal (for example, if signals are applied to SDI 1-8, the data rate is determined by SDI1. If SDI1 is removed, then SDI2 determines the data rate). The PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX will automatically bypass a specific SDI channel under the following conditions:

No signal is detected and LOV mode is set to Pass Input The signal is not locked to the reference and Unlocked SDI Bypass is enabled The signal data rate does not match the modules data rate
Audio Order of Operations

1 2 3 4 5 Insert Tone (if enabled) Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust Sum Swap/Copy Mute (if enabled)
Installation
This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX hardware/firmware requirements and installation, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
Table 3-37 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX submodules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Note: Because the PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX parameter list has multiple levels, Table 3-37 includes a Parameter Tree column. This column indicates the parameters location on the Navigator parameter tree list.
130
Table 3-37 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection
Parameter Name
GenLock Video Present GenLock Video Locked GenLock Standard
Parameter Tree
Genlock Genlock Genlock
No. of Instance s
1 1 1
Instance Type
Description
Indicates if a Genlock reference signal is detected Indicates if the module is locked to the Genlock reference Indicates the video standard of the Genlock reference
Options
Yes No Yes No Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24 Yes No CH1 CH2 CH12 CH3 CH13 CH23 CH123 CH4 CH14 CH24 CH124 CH34 CH134 CH234 CH1234 Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No
Group Presence (1-8)
Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group Presence Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group Active Channels
Audio Groups 1- 4 Audio Groups 1- 4
Indicates which audio groups are present Indicates which channels are active in each audio group
Group Active Channels (1-8)
Group Checksum Error (1-8) Group Parity Error (1-8) Group DBN Error (1-8)
Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group Checksum Error Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group Parity Error Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group DBN Error Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group ECC Error
Audio Groups 1- 4 Audio Groups 1- 4 Audio Groups 1- 4 Audio Groups 1- 4
Indicates if there is a checksum error in each audio group Indicates if there is a parity in each audio group Indicates if there is a DBN in each audio group Indicates if there is an ECC in each audio group
Group ECC Error (1-8)
131
Table 3-37 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection
Parameter Name
Group Sampling Rate (1-8) Audio Format (1-8)
Parameter Tree
Input > Embedded Audio Status > Group Sampling Rate Input > Embedded Audio Status > Audio Format Input > Video
No. of Instance s
4
Instance Type
Audio Groups 1- 4 Audio Channels 1-16
Description
Indicates the audio sampling rate for each group Indicates if the audio channel is PCM or non-PCM audio Specifies at which data rate the module should operate; if set to Auto, the data rate is determined by the first detected input For proper operation all SDI channels must operate at the same data rate (SD, 1.5G HD or 3G HD) and must be locked to the applied Genlock reference Indicates the detected video standard
Options
48KHz N/A PCM Non-PCM Auto SD 1.5 HD 3.0 HD
16
Input Rate
SDI Video Std. Feedback (1-8)
Input > Video > SDI Video Std. Feedback
Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24 Yes No Yes No
SDI Video Present (1-8) EDH Present (1-8) Y CRC Error Counter (1-8) C CRC Error Counter (1-8) EDH Error Counter (1-8) CRC/EDH Error Clear (1-8) Loss of Video (1-8)
Input > Video > SDI Video Present Input > Video > EDH Present Input > Video > Y CRC Error Counter Input > Video > C CRC Error Counter Input > Video > EDH Error Counter Input > Video > CRC/ EDH Error Clear Processing > Video > Loss of Video
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Indicates if the a SDI signal is present Indicates if EDH is present (applies to 525i 59.94 and 625i only) Displays the number of Y CRC errors that have been detected Displays the number of C CRC errors that have been detected Displays the number of EDH errors that have been detected Clears the Y and C CRC Error and EDH Error counters Specifies whether to continue to pass the input or switch to black on the loss of video
0-255 0-255 0-32767
Yes No Pass Black
132
Parameter Name
TSG Override
Parameter Tree
Processing > Video > TSG
No. of Instance s
1
Instance Type
Description
Enables/Disables TSG Override mode This mode of operation is used when the PT-DMX is meant to operate as a standalone TSG; that is, no SDI signals are applied When enabled, the data rate and frame rate is determined by the TSG Standard 1 For example, if TSG Standard 1 is 720p60, then the data rate is 1.5G HD and the frame rate is 60Hz This data rate and frame rate apply for all 8 SDI channels However, for 1.5G data rates it is possible to mix 1080i and 720p standards e.g. some can be 720p60 and others 1080i60 You cannot mix SD, 1.5G HD and 3.0G HD data rates You cannot mix 50Hz, 59.94Hz and 60Hz modes; all standards need to be either 1/1 or 1/1.001 This mode should be used with caution and is intended to be used when the system is being tested or commissioned Enables and disables the TSG Selects the video standard for the TSG (default is to follow the detected standard)
Options
Yes No
TSG Enable (1-8) TSG Standard (1-8)
Processing > Video > TSG Enable Processing > Video > TSG Standard
1 1
Yes No Follow RX 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24 Bar 75 Bar 100 Eq. Test PLL Test Repeat Mute
TSG Pattern (1-8)
Processing > Video > TSG Pattern
Selects the test pattern for the TSG
Group DeEmbed Control (1-8)
Processing > Deembedding > Group DeEmbed Control
Audio Groups 1- 4
Specifies the operation of the audio de-embedder when an error occurs; it will either repeat the last audio sample or mute when an error occurs
133
Parameter Name
Group DBN Error Report (1-8)
Parameter Tree
Processing > Deembedding > Group DBN Error Report
No. of Instance s
4
Instance Type
Audio Groups 1- 4
Description
Specifies the operation of the audio de-embedder when a DBN error occurs
Options
Alert Ignore
If set to Alert the de-embedder will operate as defined by the Group DeEmbed Control parameter If set to Ignore, DBN errors will be ignored by the audio de-embedder
Audio Level Adjust (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Level Adjust
16
Audio Channels 1-16
Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each audio channel
-18 dB to +18 dB in 0.1 dB steps (0 dB) No Swap Swap Left to Right Right to Left Yes No On Off
Swap/Copy (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Swap_Copy
Audio Pairs 1-8
Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair; able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted Specifies whether the audio channel should be muted Specifies the fade rate
Polarity Reversal (1-8) Audio Mute (1-8) Fade Rate (1-8) Summing (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Polarity Reversal Processing > Audio > Mute Processing > Audio > Fade Rate Processing > Audio > Summing
16 16 1 8
Audio Channels 1-16 Audio Channels 1-16
0 - 10 s, in 1 s steps (1 s)
Audio Pairs 1-8
Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels Enables tones for the audio channels (there are two tone frequencies to choose from) Note that the tones are at 0dBFS by default When enabled, if a video input is not locked to the applied Genlock reference, this video path will be automatically bypassed Status indication of the bypass state for each SDI channel
None Left To Right Right To Left Both
Tones (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Tones
16
Audio Channels 1-16
Pass Input 500 Hz 1 kHz Yes No Yes, No Input Yes, Not Locked Yes, Rate Mismatch No Slow Medium Fast
Unlocked SDI Bypass
Output
Sub Module Bypass (1-8)
Output > Sub Module Bypass
Parameter Update Rate
General
Specifies the rate at which the parameters are updated
Module ID License Key Licensed Options Temperature H/W Version
General General General General General
1 1 1 1 1
Indicates the module serial number Enter license key to enabled licensed options Indicates which licensed options are available Indicates the temperature of the FPGA Indicates the hardware version
String String String String String
134
SDI IN
De-serializer Video Mux Serializer SDI OUT To Crosspoint
TSG
De-embed
Audio Invert & Scale
Audio Sum
Audio Swap/ Copy
Audio TDM Crosspoint
Figure 3-32 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-38 PT-DMX-3G/PT-DMX Specifications Item Number of inputs Standard 3.0 HD-SDI 1.5 HD-SDI SMPTE 424M, 1080p 50, 1080p 59.94, 1080p 60 SMPTE 292M, 720p 25, 720p 29.97, 720p 30, 720p 50, 720p 59.94, 720p 60, 1080p 23.98, 1080p 24, 1080p 29.97, 1080p 30, 1080p 25, 1080i 50, 1080i 59.94, 1080i 60, 1035i 59.94, 1035i 60, 1080sF 23.98, 1080sF 24 SMPTE 259M-C, 525i 59.94, 625i 50 Specification 8
SD-SDI Power consumption Max. operating temperature 30 W 105F (40C)
135
PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules

The PT-FSDMX-IBG back module provides BNC connectors, while the PT-FSDMXO-IBG back module provides optical inputs through SFP (Small Formfactor Pluggable) fiber optical receiver modules. The PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSMDXO-IBG boards consume up to 50 watts per board, depending on operating conditions. Ensure that the Platinum frame system has a sufficient number of power supplies to meet the demand resulting from the actual number of boards installed. PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 3-33 PT-FSDMX-IBG Module
Figure 3-34 PT-FSDMXO-IBG Module
136
The 8 Channel Platinum Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Board (PT-FSDMX-IBG) adds Video and Audio processing to input boards in the Platinum Frame. Each SDI path is processed independently, and supports SD, 1.5Gb/s HD, 3Gb/s HD and Dual Link formats. Key processing features for each channel are:

Video ProcAmp: gain, hue, black/white clip SMPTE 352M video payload detection and insertion EDH (SD) and CRC (HD) detection and insertion Simple test signal generator Audio de-embedder: 4 groups, 4 mono channels per group Audio Sample Rate Conversion (SRC) after de-embedding Audio delay Audio test tone generator Audio ProcAmp: gain, mute, invert, sum, and swap
The de-embedded, sample rate converted and processed audio data of all 8 SDI channels is provided to the audio crosspoint for distribution. In addition, modules with the Frame Sync license have these features:

Video frame synchronizer and delay Audio embedder with append or overwrite mode Audio synchronizer
Modules with the Frame Sync license installed operate in the following modes:
Framesync modeSDI channels are genlocked to a common reference source, which can be either NTSC, PAL or TriLevel. Your video reference has to be the same frame rate as your input. The input channels can be asynchronous to each other. Delay modeSDI channels will be processed in their recovered input clock domain. In Delay mode, some restrictions apply to the processing of Audio data. See Table 3-44 on page 144 for more details. Mixed operationSome channels run in Framesync mode while others run in Delay mode.
Power-Up sequence
Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list, it takes about 2.5 minutes after power-cycling a board before it is fully operational. About 30 seconds after power-cycling, a board is ready to detect input signals, but it outputs a 75% color bar test pattern of the same video standard as the detected input signal until the PT-Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration (parameters). The readiness of the board is reflected by the read-only Control Status parameter. See Table 3-44, General -> Control Status for details.
137
Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image
The PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times. In the event of an upgrade failure, the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board. You can verify the version that is current running on the module by looking at the version parameters: Software Version, Control FPGA Version and Processing FPGA Version. Upgrading the firmware on PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules takes approximately 50 minutes. Multiple (identical) boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards (= one 'zone'). A 'batch' upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board. Always wait for the 'Firmware upgrade successful' message before power-cycling the system, exchanging boards, or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade process. Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress. This could corrupt the firmware, necessitating a restart of the upgrade process. Note: If the Software Version shows 0.00, this indicates that the PT-FSDMX-IBG is in failsafe mode. In this mode, the board will only support upgrade operations and basic control with the Platinum Resource module. You can perform software upgrades as usual while the module is in failsafe mode, but after the upgrade is completed, the module will need to be hot-swapped in order to have the new firmware take effect.
Activating PT-FSDMX Functions
The following topics are described in this section:

Audio Order of Operations on page 137 Operating with the Frame Sync on page 137 Fast Video Switch on page 138 Audio Test Tones on page 138 Group (1-4) Deembedding Control on page 138 Audio Embedding Modes on page 138 Video Frame Synchronization on page 142 Audio Synchronization on page 143 Dolby-E Automatic Header Alignment on page 144

1 2 3 4 5 Insert Tone (if enabled) Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust Sum Swap/Copy Mute (if enabled)
Operating with the Frame Sync

The frame sync is a licensable option. If you do not have the Frame Sync license, this feature will not be available. To acquire a Frame Sync license, contact your Customer Service representative. A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter in Table 3-44.
138
When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode, the audio embedders are automatically turned off. Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed (aside from any video delay). If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel, that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode. This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter.
Fast Video Switch

When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking, use the Fast Switch parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources. In this mode, output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place.
Audio Test Tones

Table 3-39 describes the frequency and levels of each audio output test tone, available as a selection from each of the Output Ch (116) Source Select parameters: Table 3-39 Audio Test Tones Test Tone Test Tone 1 Test Tone 2 Test Tone 3 Test Tone 4 Frequency 400 Hz 1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz
Group (1-4) Deembedding Control

Table 3-40 describes options for the Group (14) Deembedding Control parameter. Table 3-40 Deembedding Control Options Item Repeat Description Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder repeats the last good AES sample. Upon detection of a de-embedding error, the de-embedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample.
Mute
Audio Embedding Modes

Note: For SMPTE372M Dual link audio-embedding, ADS Clean must be turned on for proper operation PT-FSDMX has eight video channels. Each channel has an audio embedder component composed of several smaller subcomponent blocks:
One ancillary data stripper (ADS)
139
Four audio embedding subcomponents
The first subcomponent is an ancillary data stripper (ADS). This block removes all ancillary data packets in the input SDI stream, prior to embedding. Following the ADS block are four separate audio-embedding subcomponents. Each subcomponent has the ability to operate on only one audio group, either appending or overwriting a predetermined group onto the SDI stream. The audio embedding modes are Audio Group (14) Embedding Mode parameters. Table 3-41 briefly describes the Append, OverWrt, and Auto options available from each of the embedding modes. Table 3-41 Embedding Mode Options Options Append Description Attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control packet in the horizontal ancillary region (see Append Embedding on page 139) Attempts to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data (see Overwrite Embedding on page 141) Attempts first to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same audio group number; failing that, it appends the new audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data/control packet (refer to the Audio Group (14) Exists parameters to determine what audio groups are already present in the incoming SDI signal)
OverWrt
Auto
Append Embedding
When you select Append embedding, the PT-FSDMX attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing data/control packet in the horizontal ancillary data space (ADS). Append embedding is only valid if the audio group to be embedded does not already exist. Figure 3-35 shows how append embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is no previous audio or other data.
ADS after embedding group

1
EAV
Group 1
ADS before embedding

EAV
Other auxilliary data A Other auxilliary data B
Figure 3-35 In Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When No Other Data is Present
140
When auxiliary data exists in the ancillary data space, appended audio appears following that data, as shown in Figure 3-36.

EAV
Other auxilliary data A Other auxilliary data B
ADS after embedding group

1
EAV
Other auxilliary data A
Other auxilliary data B
Group 1
Figure 3-36 In Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 1 When Auxiliary Data is Present If you attempt to insert audio into Group 1 when Group 1 audio data already exists in the ancillary data space, no audio will be embedded, as shown in Figure 3-37.

EAV Pre-existing Group 1
ADS after attempting to embed group 1

Pre-existing Group 1 No audio is embedded EAV
Figure 3-37 Append Embedding Mode When Adding Group 1 and a Group 1 Already Exists If you insert Group 2 audio when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio in the ancillary data space and no Group 2 audio, the Group 2 audio will be inserted following the Group 1 audio, as shown in Figure 3-38.
ADS before embedding EAV GROUP 1
ADS after embedding group 2 EAV GROUP 1 GROUP 2
Figure 3-38 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1
141
If you insert Group 1 audio when there is pre-existing Group 2 audio in the ancillary data space and no Group 1 audio, the Group 1 audio will be inserted following the Group 2 audio, as shown in Figure 3-39.
ADS before embedding EAV GROUP 2
ADS after embedding group 1 EAV GROUP 2 GROUP 1
Figure 3-39 Append Embedding Mode, Adding Group 2 Following Group 1 An audio group cannot be divided. In Append embedding, the audio group is always added following the last block in the ADS. If there is not enough room to append the audio group following the last block of auxiliary data or audio in the ADS, no audio will be embedded, as shown in Figure 3-40.
ADS before embedding EAV

Other auxiliary data Other auxiliary data Other auxiliary data
ADS after attempting to embed group 1 EAV

Other auxiliary data Other auxiliary data Other auxiliary data
Result: No audio is appended
Figure 3-40 Append Embedding Mode Fails to Append When Auxiliary Data Exists in all Audio Groups
Overwrite Embedding
When you select Overwrite embedding, the module attempts to overwrite any existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data. This setting is valid only if the audio group to be embedded already exists. If the new sample distribution does not exactly match the existing audio data packet sample distribution, the embedder will mark some audio data packets for deletion (DID word will be set to 180h). Note: To avoid sample distribution issues, activate the ADS Clean feature. When you attempt Overwrite embedding and there is no previous audio (as in Figure 3-41), no audio is embedded because there is nothing to overwrite.

EAV

EAV No audio is embedded
Figure 3-41 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is No Pre-existing Audio
142
Figure 3-42 shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is auxiliary data where Group 1 should be inserted.

EAV
other auxilliary data other auxilliary data

EAV
other other auxilliary data auxilliary data
No audio is embedded
Figure 3-42 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Auxiliary Data on Group 1 Figure 3-43 shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is pre-existing Group 1 audio. This operation is successful.

EAV
Pre-existing Group1
ADS after embedding group 1 (with overwrite group specified as Group 1)

EAV
Group 1
Figure 3-43 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Group 1 Audio in the Group 1 Space
Video Frame Synchronization

The frame synchronizer offers two modes of operation: Delay mode and Synchronizer (Sync) mode. These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync Mode parameter.
In Delay mode, the output video is synchronized to the input video.
143
In Sync mode, the output video is synchronized to the reference video. The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard you have set, as outlined in Table 3-42.
Table 3-42 Supported Reference and Output Video Standard Combinations in Sync Mode Reference Standard 525i 59.94 Output Video Standard

Reference Standard 1080i 60 1080p 30
Output Video Standard

1080i 59.94 1080p 59.94 1080p 29.97 720p 59.94 525i 59.94 1080p 59.94 DL 1080i 50 1080p 50 1080p 25 720p 50 625i 50 1080p 50 DL 720p 60 1080p 60 1080p 60 DL
1080i 60 1080p 60 1080p 30 720p 60 1080p 60 DL 1080i 59.94 1080p 29.97 1080p 59.94 720p 59.94 525i 59.94 1080p 59.94 DL 1080i 50 1080p 50 1080p 25 720p 50 625i 50 1080p 50 DL 1080p 24 1080sF 24 1080p 23.98 1080sF 23.98
625i 50
1080i 59.94 1080p 29.97
720p 60
1080i 50 1080p 25
720p 59.94
720p 59.94 1080p 59.94 1080p 59.94 DL 720p 50 1080p 50 1080p 50 DL
1080p 24 1080sF 24
720p 50
1080p 23.98 1080sF 23.98
In both Sync mode and Delay mode, PT-FSDMX provides several controls to manipulate the output video signal:

Horizontal timing Vertical timing Adjustable frame delay Manually freeze output video on first or second field (interlaced standards), or on the whole frame (all standards)
Audio Synchronization
By default, PT-FSDMX-IBG and PT-FSDMXO-IBG synchronize de-embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re-embedding the audio.
144
When Pair Delay Track is set to sync tracking, the audio will be automatically delayed to match the video delay. Additionally, up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Audio Channel Delay parameter.
Dolby-E Automatic Header Alignment

When you embed Dolby E audio, the module automatically adjusts input audio delay such that the Dolby E header resides on the line specified by the Dolby E Start Line parameter, with a tolerance of up to +1 line. Table 3-43 shows the ranges for the Dolby E Start Line parameter. Table 3-43 Dolby E Automatic Header Alignment by Video Standard Video Standard 525 625 1080i/p/sF 720p Range (line) 1325 930 1554 2071 Default 15 11 19 25
For Dolby-E automatic header alignment to operate correctly, the following conditions must be met:

The Dolby E Auto Align parameter must be set to Yes. The Frame Sync Mode parameter must be set to Sync Mode. The module must be locked to the same reference video source as the Dolby-E source.
Table 3-37 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Note: Because the PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG parameter list has multiple levels, Table 3-37 includes a Path column. This column indicates the parameters location on the N Navigator parameter tree list. Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Number of input [RO] Number of Output [RO] General Serial Number [RO] License Key Displays the modules unique identifier Activates the Frame Sync option <String> <String> Description Options 8 0
145
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Licensed Options [RO] Parameter Update Rate Description Displays activated options Defines the rate at which parameters are updated Recalls the factory default settings Options

None Frame Sync Slow Medium Fast No Yes Please Wait Ready to Set
Factory Recall Control Status [RO] Temperature (x 2) [RO] Parameter Hysteresis Fan Status
Indicates the temperature of the FPGA Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Indicates proper functioning of the modules fan unit Indicates proper functioning of the DDR memory Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
<string> in Degrees Celcius 0 - 10000000 (2000000)

Bad Good Bad Good
FPGA (x 2) DDR Memory Status (x 2) Genlock Sync Select
1 2 3 4 No Yes No Yes Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98

Genlock Video Present [RO] Genlock Video Locked [RO] Genlock Standard [RO]
Reports the presence of the reference video signal Reports the locked status of the reference video signal Indicates the video standard detected on the genlock input
1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
146
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Description Options
Input > Optical Input Optical Power [RO] This parameter appears for PT-FSDMX-IBG Optical modules only. SFP Type [RO] This parameter appears for PT-FSDMX-IBG Optical modules only. Input > Video SDI Video Standard (x 8)[RO] Displays the SDI video signal standard

Reports input optical signal power level
Too Low -32 - 1 dBm Too High Unknown N/A (G)Dual-Rx PIN
Shows the type of optical receiver installed
Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 No Yes No Yes
1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1080p 50 DL 1080p 59.94 DL 1080p 60 DL 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
Signal Presence (x 8)[RO] EDH Present (x 8) [RO] CRC/EDH Error Counter (x 8) [RO] CRC/EDH Error Clear (x 8) Input > Embedded Audio Status Group Presence (8 x 4) [RO]
Reports the presence of the SDI input video signal Reports the presence of EDH in the input SDI signal Reports the number of chrominance CRC/EDH errors that have occurred Clears all CRC/EDH error counters Reports the presence of the specified audio group in the SDI signal
0 to 65535
No Yes No Yes
147
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Group Active Channels (8 x 4) [RO] Description Indicates which channels are active Options

None CH1 CH2 CH12 CH3 CH13 CH23 CH123 48.0 kHz 44.1 kHz 32.0 kHz N/A FreeRun PCM Non-PCM
CH4 CH14 CH24 CH124 CH34 CH134 CH234 CH1234
Group Sampling Rate (8 x 4) [RO]
Reports the sampling rate from the control packet of the specified audio group
Audio Format (8 x 16) [RO]
Reports the AES format (PCM/non-PCM) of specified output embedded audio channel Enables and disables the test signal generator Selects the test pattern for the test signal generator
Processing > Video > TSG TSG Enable (x 8) TSG Pattern (x 8)

No Yes Bar 75 Bar 100 Eq. Test PLL Test Follow RX 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97

TSG Standard (x 8)
Selects the video standard for the TSG (default is to follow the detected standard)
1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1080p 50 DL 1080p 59.94 DL 1080p 60 DL 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
Processing > Embedding ADS Clean (x 8) Cleans the Ancillary Data Space prior to audio embedding

No Yes
148
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Group Embedding Mode (8 x 4) Description Selects the embedding mode for the specified audio group Options

Off Append OverWrt Auto No Yes
Dolby E Auto Align
Provides a fixed delay to the video processing path to compensate for audio processing delay Specifies the starting video line of embedded Dolby bitstreams Enables automatic muting of audio outputs when the V-bit is set Muting on a detected V-Bit applies to PCM audio channels only. Non-PCM audio channels will not be muted. Engages or disengages the sample rate converter Selects the tone level for the specified audio channel
Dolby E Start Line (x 8)
9 - 71 (19)
Processing > Audio V-Bit Mute Enable

No Yes
SRC Control (8 x 8)
Auto Enable Bypass Off 400 Hz 1 KHz 2 KHz 4 KHz
Tone (8 x 16)
Level Adjust (8 x 16)
Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each audio channel Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted Enables muting for the specified output channel
-18 dB - 18 dB (0) in 0.1 dB steps
Polarity Reversal (8 x 16) Audio Mute (8 x 16)
No Yes Off On
149
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Summing (8 x 8) Description Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair; able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left Specifies the fade rate Specifies the audio word length for all audio channels within the SDI stream Controls the audio option when the specified demuxed audio group is present with an error Selects the audio tracking type Selects the amount of delay applied to the audio channel Adjusts gain for the Y channel Adjusts gain to the Cb color difference component Adjusts gain to the Cr color difference component Adjusts offset for the Y channel Adjusts offset for the Cb channel Adjusts offset for the Cr channel Options

None Right to left Left to right Both
Swap/Copy (8 x 8)
No Swap Swap Right to left Left to right
Fade Rate (x 8) Word Length (x8)
0 - 10 (10) s, in 1-second steps 16 bits 20 bits 24 bits
Processing > Deembedding > Group Deembed Control Group Deembed Control (8 x 4)

Mute Repeat
Processing > Audio Sync Pair Delay Track (8 x 8) Audio Channel Delay (8 x 16) Processing > Video Proc Amp Y Gain (x 8) Cb Gain (x 8) Cr Gain (x 8) Y Offset (x 8) Cb Offset (x 8) Cr Offset (x 8) -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps -3.0 to +3.0 dB (0 dB) in 0.1 dB steps 100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments 100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments 100.6 mV (0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments

No Tracking Synch Tracking
0 - 3000 ms in 1 ms steps
150
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name White Clip Enable (x 8) Description Controls level clipping according to the White Clip Level control Sets the white clip level Controls level clipping according to the Black Clip Level control Sets the black clip level Adjusts the hue of the incoming digital video signal Adjusts the horizontal timing
Note: The usable range depends on the video standard.
Options

Disable Enable
White Clip Level (x 8) Black Clip Enable (x 8)
636.9 to 763.1 mV (700 mV) in 0.8 mV increments Disable
Enable
Black Clip Level (x 8) Hue (x 8)
-47.9 to +47.9 mV (0.0 mV) in 0.8 mV increments -180 to +180 (0)
Processing > Frame Sync Horizontal Phase (x 8)
0.000 us to 29.616 us (1080p 30, 1035i 60) 0.000 us to 14.808 us (1080p 60, 1080p 60 DL) 0.000 us to 29.646 us (1080p 29, 1080i 59) 0.000 us to 14.823 us (1080p 59, 1080p 59.94 DL) 0.000 us to 35.542 us (1080p 25, 1080i 50) 0.000 us to 17.771 us (1080p 50, 1080p 50 DL) 0.000 us to 37.024 us (1080p 24, 1080sF 24) 0.000 us to 37.061 us (1080p 23.98, 1080sF 23.98) 0.000 us to 31.987 us (1080i 50_295) 0.000 us to 22.209 us (720p 60) 0.000 us to 22.231 us (720p 59.94) 0.000 us to 26.653 us (720p 50) 0.000 us to 44.431 us (720p 30) 0.000 us to 44.475 us (720p 29) 0.000 us to 53.320 us (720p 25) 0.000 us to 63.518 us (525i 59.94) 0.000 us to 63.963 us (625i 50)
151
Table 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection; = Frame Sync License enabled only Path Parameter Name Vertical Phase (x 8) Description Adjusts the vertical timing
Note: The usable range depends on the video standard.
Options

01124 lines (1080p/I/sF) 01249 lines (1080i 50 SMPTE 295M) 0749 lines (720p) 0524 lines (525i 59.94) 0624 lines (625i 50)
Frame Offset (x 8)
Determines the number of frames the video is offset Sets the operational mode of the frame sync, delay or sync. This parameter is only available with the optional Frame Sync license.
Frame Sync Mode (x 8)
0 - 17 frames (Delay mode) 0 - 16 frames (Sync mode) Delay mode
Sync mode
Frame Sync Status (x 8)
Indicates whether the frame sync is locked, and what it is locked to
Sync Ext Lock Sync Local Lock Delay Mode Delay Mismatch No Yes Field 1 (1080i/525i 59.94/625i 50/1080sF) Field 2 Frame (1080p/720p) Pass Black Freeze No Yes
Force Freeze (x 8)
Enables video freeze
Force Freeze Mode (x 8)
Specifies the type of freeze, field 1, field 2 or frame Selects the output video mode when the input video is disrupted Enable fast switching
Loss of Video Mode
Fast Switch (x 8) Version
Software Version Control FPGA version Processing FPGA version
Indicates software version Indicates firmware version Indicates firmware version
<string> <string> <string>
152

This diagram shows the video and audio data paths for a single channel through the module. This path is duplicated for each of the modules eight channels.
DDR2 memory Simple TSG Video frame * synchronizer Video ProcAmp Mux Test tone generator Non-PCM SDI Tx PT-FSDMXO-IBG (fiber optical back module ) Audio demultiplexer (de-embedder ) Audio synchronizer & delay Audio ProcAmp Audio multiplexer (embedder ) CRC insertion, LineNum insertion , scrambler , serializer Backplane driver Mux SDI out DDR2 memory
PT-FSDMX-IBG (electrical back module ) Cable EQ or SFP Rx
requires license key
SDI Rx Deserializer , descrambler , reframer , CRC/EDH monitoring , format detection Clock transfer FIFO
Sample rate conversion
TDM audio from other channels
Audio TDM transmitter
8 x 16 Ch TDM
TDM out (to audio crosspoint switch)
Figure 3-44 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Functional Block Diagram
LED Indicators
Figure 3-45 PT-FSDMX Card-Edge LED Indicators
153
The Power, ACT CTRL, ACT In, and signal presence LEDs are described in Input Module General Description on page 56. The LEDs described in Table 3-45 are specific to PT-FSDMX and PTFSDMX-O modules. Table 3-45 PT-FSDMX-IBG/PT-FSDMXO-IBG Specific LEDs LED
Channel Status
Function
Ch (1 - 8)
FPGA Temp
Red: Power on test failed
FPGA Temp (A - B)
Red: Above temperature limit
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 3-46 PT-FSDMX-IBG Specifications Item Number of inputs Connector Impedance SD SDI (270Mb/s) Format Return loss Equalization HD-SDI (1.5Gb/s) Format and image sample structure Return loss Equalization Specification 8 BNC (IEC169-8) 75 SMPTE 259M 525i59.94, 625i50 > 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable SMPTE 292M SMPTE274M (1080i, 1080sF, 1080p) SMPTE296M (720p) > 18 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft (180 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable SMPTE 424M SMPTE 425M Level A SMPTE 372M > 15 dB (typical) from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz > 10 dB (typical) from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz Adaptive cable equalization for up to 328 ft (100 m), typical, of Belden 1694A co-axial cable
HD-SDI (3Gb/s) Format and image sample structure Return loss
Equalization
154
Table 3-47 PT-FSDMXO-IBG Specifications Item Number of inputs Package Connector Wavelengths Receiver sensitivity Supported video rates Supported formats and sampling structures Specification 8 4x Dual Channel Receiver SFP Modules LC with PC/UPC polish 1260nm 1620nm -23dBm (PIN Receiver) 270Mb/s, 1.5Gb/s, 3Gb/s see Electrical Input specification
155
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Digital Multirate Matrix Expansion Input and Receiver Modules
Figure 3-46 Front Module
Operation
The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG (see PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module) and PT-HSR1D-IBG (see PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module) are 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI input expansion and receiver modules intended for use together in two separate Platinum frames, to expand the inputs of one frame to the second frame (see Input Expansion). The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module accepts digital video signals, equalizes and re-clocks data streams, detects standards and formats, and distributes the signals to the MI backplane to be switched by the crosspoint matrix and to a high density connector for distribution to a second frame. Signals up to 3 Gbps are supported. A DensiShield input port on the PT-HSR1D-IBG module accepts signals from compatible equipment, providing flexibility and feature support for other applications. This card allows all inputs from a primary frame to be easily wired to a second frame extending the routing system to more than 512 outputs.
PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module

The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG is an SD/HD/3G Input module that provides eight electrical inputs via HD-BNC connectors. These eight inputs can be routed to a second Platinum frame through the DensiShield Out connector. Looping the output of all inputs extends the routing system to more than 512 outputs. A single HD-BNC Out connector is also present but not currently used. Input 9 is also available but currently unused.
156
DensiShield
OUT 9
OUT 1-8
IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
IN 9
Unused
Unused
Figure 3-47 Inputs on the PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module
PT-HSR1D-IBG Input Module

The PT-HSR1D-IBG is a SD/HD/3G Input Module that is intended for use in conjunction with the PT-HSR8C1D-IBG module to extend its eight inputs. A DensiShield connector accepts up to eight electrical inputs. A BNC connector (Input 9) is also present but currently unused.
DensiShield
IN 9
IN 1-8
Unused
Figure 3-48 Inputs on the PT-HSR1D-IBG module
Input Expansion
The following graphic depicts how the expansion and receiver modules are setup in 2 separate Platinum frames, using a DensiShield cable to route the inputs.
Input Expansion Module
DensiShield Interconnect
Receiver Module
512 Video Inputs
DensiShield
DensiShield
OUT 1-8
OUT 9 (UNUSED)
INPUTS 1-8
IN 9 ( UNUSED) IN 9 ( UNUSED)
IN 1-8
Crosspoint Module
Crosspoint Module
512 Video Outputs
Output Module
Output Module
512 Video Outputs
Platinum Frame 1
Platinum Frame 2
Figure 3-49 Input Expansion

157

All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
HD-BNC Cable Insertion and Extraction Tool

The PT-HSR8C1D-IBG Input Module currently has 8 HD-BNC connectors. HD-BNC connectors are higher density connectors, much smaller than BNC connectors and can be hard to reach into. The HD-BNC Cable Insertion and Extraction Tool (Part Number: SELOPT-TOOL-CABLE) is a separate tool that aids in inserting or extracting cables into the HD-BNC connectors.
Configuration
158
The parameters can be controlled using CCS Navigator. Table 3-48 lists the user-controllable parameters.These parameters are accessible via CCS Navigator. In Navigator, when in Control mode, double-click the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. Table 3-48 Controllable Parameters Name Description Type Options
MODULE PARAMETERS Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference. RW 0 (Default) 1 2 3 -40 ~ +140 deg C 0 ~ 10000000
Temperature Parameter Hysteresis
Monitor 20x20 temperature Unit: deg C Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Unit: us (0.5 inc)
RO RW
VERSION PARAMETERS Software Version FPGA Version Displays the software version Displays the FPGA version RO RO
DETECTION PARAMETERS CRC/EDH Error Clear Clear CRC/EDH error counter RW RO RW RW Yes No (Default) 0 - 65535 Enable (Default) Disable Enable (Default) Disable
CRC/EDH Error Count Shows CRC/EDH errors CRC Error Detection SD EDH Detection Sets CRC detection mode for HD signal Sets EDH detection mode for SD signal
159
Table 3-48 Controllable Parameters Name Video Standard Description Detects video standard Type Options RO Unknown 525I/29.97 625I/25 1035I/30 1035I/29.97 1080I/30 1080I/29.97 1080I/25 1080PSF/24 1080PSF/23.98 1080P/30 1080P/29.97 1080P/25 1080P/24 1080P/23.98 720P/60 720P/59.94 1080P/60 1080P/59.94 1080P/50 1080I/25 295M 720P/50 720P/25 720P/24 720P/23.98 Dual-Link 1080i/ 25 Dual-Link 1080i/ 29.97 Dual-Link 1080i/ 30 Yes No N/A Yes No N/A Yes No N/A
EDH Presence
EDH package present in input SD signal EDH error present in input SD signal
RO
Input EDH Error
RO
Video Error
Detects video error in input signal
RO
IN PARAMETERS Signal Presence EQ Bypass EQ Power Save Mode Signal Launch Level Normal (800mVpp) Small (400mVpp)
Reports presence or absence of valid signal. Sets the EQ mode
RO RW
Yes No On Off (Default)
160
Table 3-48 Controllable Parameters Name EQ Mute Set Description The cable length beyond which the equalizer mutes Type Options RW 50 Meters 100 Meters 150 Meters 200 Meters 250 Meters 300 Meters Never Mute 0-400 meters
Cable Length
Indicates input cable length
RO
RECLOCK PARAMETERS Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to automatic or bypass or to one of three manual fixed rates RW Auto (Default) 3G HD SD Bypass Unknown SD HD 3G Yes No Yes No (Default)
Rate Detected
Detects data rate
RO
Locked Mute
Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage Mutes the output of the board
RO RW
161

DS BM
DensiShield 8 Channels IN 2 EQ SERDES IN 1 EQ SERDES Max 1400mVpp OUT 1A OUT 1B OUT 2A OUT 2B OUT 3A OUT 3B OUT 4A OUT 4B 40x40 IN 5 EQ SERDES OUT 5A OUT 5B OUT 6A OUT 6B OUT 7A OUT 7B OUT 8A OUT 8B
HD-BNC Loop BM
In 1 In 2 In 3 In 4 In 5 In 6 In 7 In 8 DensiShield 8 Channels
IN 3
EQ
SERDES
IN 4
EQ
SERDES
IN 6
EQ
SERDES
IN 7
EQ
SERDES
IN 8 IN 9 (UNUSED)
EQ
SERDES
CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD
Figure 3-50 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG and PT-HSR1D-IBG Functional Block Diagram
162
Specifications
Table 3-49 I/O Specifications Item Input connector Specification 75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169-8 75 Ohm HD-BNC LC optical DensiShield 75 Ohms (BNC, HD-BNC) 50 Ohms differential (DensiShield) SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3Mb/s to 3.0Gb/s 880mV (BNC, HD-BNC) 1600mVp-p differential (DensiShield) Optical depends on SFP used > 15dB, up to 1.485GHz > 10dB, 1.485GHz to 2.97GHz Automatic 400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate 200m Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s data rate 150m Belden 1694A for 2.97Gb/s data rate
Impedance Signal type
Maximum input level
Return loss (BNC, HD-BNC) Equalization (BNC, HD-BNC)
LED Indicators
Table 3-50 LEDs Each of the nine input channels provide signal presence reporting through card-edge mounted LEDs. Three system LEDs are also present. POWER - Power supply indicator +24V power rails are operational (Green) ACT CTRL - Active Control initializes red, turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card. Flashes green if there is an alarm condition on the card. ACT IN - Active Input warning. Yellow indicates if an input on the card being used by an output.
163
PT-MADI4C-IBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Input Module

MADI (Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) is an industry-standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio. MADI supports multi-channel audio transmission through copper (coaxial) cable. MADI is widely used in the audio industry, especially in the professional sector. Its advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a greater number of channels per line. Platinum now offers MADI support enabling seamless integration of Audio Consoles and other third party Audio equipment with MADI I/O into the Harris Audio/Video routing framework. MADI support is offered through the following standard full length Platinum boards:
A four channel MADI input board and electrical back module. See MADI Input Module (PT-MADI4C-IBG) on page 164. A four channel MADI output board and electrical back module See MADI Output Module (PT-MADI4C-OBG) on page 266.
MADI Input
AES Audio
Embedded Audio
Analog Audio
Upto 64 channels each
PT-MADI4C-IBG Input Module
PT-AECT Input
PT-FSDMX Input
PT-ADCT Input
Up to 128 mono channels mapped to TDM (unused channels muted)
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
PT-MADI4C-OBG Output Module
PT-AECT Output
PT-MUX Output
PT-DACT Output
MADI Output
AES Output
SDI Output
Analog Output
Platinum Frame
Figure 3-51 MADI Input and Output Modules (and other audio routing options) in a Platinum Frame
164
Note: This diagram represents Platinum MADI as well as other audio routing options in the Platinum frame. For details, refer to the relevant modules in the Input Modules and Output Modules chapters of this manual.
MADI Input Module (PT-MADI4C-IBG)

The PT-MADI4C-IBG input module is an AES10-2008 compliant audio input board that supports three MADI formats: 32 channel (96kHz sample rate) and 56 or 64 channels (48 kHz sample rate). The PT-MADI4C-IBG is user configurable between one and four inputs, each up to 64 Audio mono channels (32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio. The four MADI input streams can comprise up to 256 mono channels, but a maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream. All inputs are converted to a common 48kHz sample rate prior to merging 128 mono channels into a single TDM stream.
Figure 3-52 PT-MADI4C-IBG Input Module The electrical back module is an active back module attached to the front module (with two brackets) and with Cable Equalizers. The back module has four BNC connectors and stays attached to the front module when pulling the module from the frame. The back module is MADI compliant and based on National's LMH0394 Cable Equalizer.
Figure 3-53 PT-MADI4C-IBG electrical back module
165
Controlling the MADI Input Module through Navigator

You can access and control PT-MADI4C-IBG parameters through Navigator. Follow these steps to discover your module:
Discovery
1 2 3 Start Navigator. Ensure you are in Build Mode (File > Operational Mode > Build). Click Tools > Discovery and then click the Options button. Click the Add button and provide the IP address to the (Platinum) frame that contains your PT-MADI-IBG module. Ensure you place a check beside the appropriate checkbox in the Select Products for Discovery section. Click OK and then OK again. Click the Start button to start the Discovery. Once Discovery is complete, click the Save button.
4 5
Using Navigator Control Mode

1 Switch to Control Mode (File > Operational Mode > Control). Note: If you do not want to use Navigator Control mode (available in the 30 day trial version and the paid version of Navigator), you can also control your MADI module through the Build mode (see Using Navigator Build Mode). 2 3 In the Navigation pane, expand the contents of the Discovery Folder and drill down to your PT-MADI4C-IBG module under Input Cards in the Platinum frame. Double click the PT-MADI4C-IBG Module to open up the Parameters. For more details on the parameters, see PT-MADI4C-IBG Parameters on page 172.
Using Navigator Build Mode

Once you discover your PT-MADI module and save the results of your discovery (see Steps 1-5 in Controlling the MADI Input Module through Navigator), follow these steps: 1 in the Navigation pane, expand the Routing Group <Your Platinum Frame IP> icon, then expand the Routers folder, and double click the Platinum Frame icon.
2 3
This opens up the Edit Platinum Frame dialog. Go to the Detected Matrices tab. A list of Input and Output modules are displayed on the right of the dialog.Right click the MADI option under the Input column, and select the View Input Module option.
166
The Module Parameters dialog displays a list of all Input parameters.
Figure 3-54 Module Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG Read only parameters show their status in Gray, for example, the MADI Present parameters (Inputs 1-4). All other parameters can be set by double clicking and selecting options from the popup that is displayed. For example, if you double click the Sync Select parameter, a popup dialog enables you to select from Sync 1, 2, or 3.
167
Figure 3-55 Sync Select Parameter
MADI Presence
MADI Presence on each of the four input streams is automatically detected and reported in the MADI Present section of the MADI Input category (Navigator parameter interface). If MADI is present, the following information is reported:
The number of channels per input stream (32, 56, or 64) along with the sample rate for reach stream. Each MADI input is divided into chunks of 16 channels (1-16, 17-32, 33-48, and 49-64) and these are reported as active or not.
TDM Mapping
Through the PT-MADI4C-IBG parameter interface (Navigator), channels in MADI inputs can be manually mapped to the TDM stream and you can select if one or all of the MADI inputs contribute to the stream. A maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream.
168
The Mapping parameter category provides a MADI to TDM map section in which you can select the channels in each stream to map to the TDM. For each of the 4 inputs, you can choose whether or not its channels contribute to the TDM stream. Unused channels in the TDM stream are muted. Mapping from MADI inputs to the TDM stream has a granularity of 32 channels, aligned at 32-channel boundaries. 56 channel formats are treated as 64 channel formats, with the unused uppermost channels always muted. If the selected input is inactive, associated channels on the TDM bus are muted and marked as inactive.
Audio Input
Channel mapping options None 32 56 64
128 mono channels
TDM Crosspoint
Platinum Frame
Mapping Hierarchy
Mapping of MADI inputs to the TDM stream is done hierarchically (#1-#4), starting with the lowest input number to the first available channel boundary. For example, if you have 2 MADI inputs one 32 channel and the other 64 channel, Input #1 is mapped to the first 32 channels, followed by Input #2 to the next 64 channels.
Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios

The following are mapping use cases with different MADI configurations such 32 channel, 56 channel or 64 channel.

Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped
Four 32 channel MADI Inputs, all channels mapped

This example depicts 4 MADI inputs with 32 channel inputs each. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed, all four inputs can be mapped to the TDM.
169
Audio Input
MADI #1 (32 channels) MADI # 2 ( 32 channels) MADI # 3 ( 32 channels) MADI # 4 ( 32 channels)
Channel mapping 1 32 33
Channel mapping 64 65
Channel mapping 96 97
Channel mapping
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
Navigator CONTROL Mode
Navigator BUILD Mode
In the Navigation pane, go to Routing Group <IP> > Routers > Platinum frame > Input Cards and double click <Slot#>PT-MADI4C-IBG Go to the MADI to TDM map section under the Mapping Category Select Yes to map all four MADI to TDM maps
Double click the Platinum frame icon in the navigation pane (Routing Group <IP> > Routers) In the Edit Platinum frame dialog, go to the Detected Matrices tab. Right click MADI under Input and select View Input Module Double click each of the MADI to TDM mapping parameters and set all to YES
170
Four 64 channel MADI Inputs, #1 and #3 mapped

In this example, all MADI inputs are 64 channel. Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed, a maximum of two inputs can be mapped to the TDM. Inputs from MADI #1 and #3 have been selected for mapping.
Audio Input
Platinum Frame
MADI #1 (64 channels)
MADI # 3 ( 64 channels)
Channel mapping 128
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
In the Navigation pane, go to Routing Group <IP> > Routers > Platinum frame > Input Cards and double click <Slot#>PT-MADI4C-IBG Go to the MADI to TDM map section under the Mapping Category Select Yes against MADI to TDM map 1 and 3
Double click the Platinum frame icon in the navigation pane (Routing Group <IP> > Routers). In the Edit Platinum frame dialog, go to the Detected Matrices tab. Right click MADI under Input and select View Input Module Double click the first and third MADI to TDM mapping parameters and set to YES
171
Combination (32/56 channel) MADI Inputs, #3 and #4 mapped

This example depicts different channel configurations in the incoming MADI. MADI inputs #1-3 are 32 channel. MADI input #4 is 56 channel. MADI Inputs #3 and #4 have been mapped to the TDM. All other channels are muted. Other possible mapping scenarios in this situation include: (1) mapping channels #1-3 (96 channels) (2) mapping channel #4 (56 channels considered as 64 channels) plus two of three 32 channel inputs (64 channels).
Audio Input
Platinum Frame
MADI #3 (32 channels)
MADI # 4 ( 56 channels)
MUTED
UNUSED (MUTED)
Channel mapping 88 89 96 97 128
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
In the Navigation pane, go to Routing Group <IP> > Routers > Platinum frame > Input Cards and double click <Slot#>PT-MADI4C-IBG Go to the MADI to TDM map section under the Mapping Category Select Yes against MADI to TDM map 3 and 4
Double click the Platinum frame icon in the navigation pane (Routing Group <IP> > Routers) In the Edit Platinum frame dialog, go to the Detected Matrices tab. Right click MADI under Input and select View Input Module Double click each of the MADI to TDM mapping parameters and set all to YES
172
Specifications
Table 3-51 Electrical Input Specifications Item Number of Inputs Connector Impedance Input Level Link rate Return Loss Equalization Specification 4 BNC (IEC169-8) 75 150mV to 600mV 125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI) NA Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft (300m), typical, of Belden 8281 coaxial cable
Power Consumption
Around 15W (includes front module and back module).
PT-MADI4C-IBG Parameters
Note: You can access MADI parameters through Navigator. Start Navigator and ensure you are in Build mode. Enter the IP Address of the Platinum frame that contains your PT-MADI module. Start the Discovery and save the Discovery results. You can control the parameters either through Build Mode (Using Navigator Build Mode on page 165) or Control mode (See Using Navigator Control Mode on page 165). The following parameters apply to the PT-MADI4C-IBG: Table 3-52 Control Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG Functional Block General Parameter Name Serial Number Temperature Parameter Hysteresis Software Version Control FPGA Version Processing FPGA Version Input Type R/W R R R/W R R R R Description Displays the module's unique identifier FPGA (V6) temperature Parameter updated time Embedded software version Control FPGA design version Processing FPGA design version Input signal media type Options <String> <String> in degrees celsius <Integer> 2000000 us <String> <String> <String> BNC Optical
173
Table 3-52 Control Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG Functional Block TDM Locking Parameter Name Sync Select R/W R/W Description Sync Source Options Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 No Yes No Yes Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 No Yes 0 32 56 64
GenLock Present GenLock Locked GenLock Standard
R R R
Indicates the GenLock signal present Genlock is locked GenLock Standard
MADI Input
MADI Present (1-4)
Reports the presence of the reference signal Reports the number of channels in the MADI Input
Number of Channels (1-4) R
Sample Rate
Sample Rate in kHz
174
Table 3-52 Control Parameters for PT-MADI4C-IBG Functional Block MADI (1-4) Active Channel Parameter Name MADI1 01-16 MADI1 17-32 MADI1 33-48 MADI1 49-64 MADI2 01-16 MADI2 17-32 MADI2 33-48 MADI2 49-64 MADI3 01-16 MADI3 17-32 MADI3 33-48 MADI3 49-64 MADI4 01-16 MADI4 17-32 MADI4 33-48 MADI4 49-64 MADI to TDM map MADI to TDM map (1-4) R/W R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Description Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Bit map for each active channel Indicates how to map MADI signal to TDM Options <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> <String> No Yes
175
Output Modules
This chapter contains both a general description and additional detailed descriptions of the output modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum output module operates. Each output module is further described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block diagram, and specifications. Where appropriate, a modules corresponding output monitoring, submodules, and back panel I/O modules are identified. This chapter covers the following modules:

Output Module General Description on page 177 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules on page 220 PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules on page 220 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with TDM Capability on page 226 PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability on page 226 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules on page 239 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability on page 246 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules on page 233 PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules with Dual Output on page 233 PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter Module on page 254 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 181 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 186 PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module on page 192 PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving on page 192 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 200 PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules on page 200 PT-MUX: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability on page 259
176
Chapter 4 Output Modules
PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability on page 259 PT-MADI4C-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output Module on page 267 (NEW) PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 210 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 206 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules on page 215 PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules on page 215
177
Output Module General Description

Signal output connectors
Card-edge connector
Control
Power
Power
+3.3V +3.3V +5VL +24V GND +5V ?V ?V ?V ?V ?V
Test points
System
OUTPUT 1 ACT CTRL ACT OUT POWER
Signal Presence
OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8
Handle cutout
System Signal LEDs Presence LEDs
Figure 4-1 Typical Platinum Output Module An output module accepts 32 signals from the crosspoint matrix. A secondary switching circuit then selects 8 of these 32 signals to be driven out of the output module. Each output channel also contains an output monitoring path which feeds the output signal seen on any channel back to the crosspoint matrix for output monitoring. The output monitoring signal is then fed to an optional rear-mounted output monitoring card. The output monitoring matrix is controlled though the system controller. The TDM matrix allows an audio output module to drive 16 outputs. There are three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
The green LED labelled POWER is the power supply indicator. It shows that +24V is present on the module.
178
The yellow LED labelled ACT OUT is the active output warning. It shows that an active input signal is being switched to this output module. The LED labelled ACT CTRL is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a steady red when the module is being initialized, and then turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the module. It flashes green if there is an alarm condition on this module.
The green LEDs located on the front of the card, one for each output, indicate its associated output has a valid signal present. One small red LED located on top of the PCB is illuminated briefly during power up (or module insertion into a powered frame), and indicates that configuration of the control interface FPGA is in process. On PM-FO-OB and PT-HSR1310S-OB modules, channel status LEDs are bicolor (green and red). See Table 4-38 on page 255 for descriptions. Test points for power and GND are located near the front edge of the card. There are no user-settable switches or controls on this module. All settings for this module are set through the system controller.
Controllable Parameters Lists

The Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings. These parameters are enabled and/or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only. Output module parameters lists are provided on the following pages: Table 4-1 Output Module Parameters Lists Module Name PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with TDM Capability PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability Parameter List Location Page 222 Page 228 Page 228 Page 222 Page 241 Page 247
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules Page 235 PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules with Dual Output PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter Module Page 235 page 255
179
Table 4-1 Output Module Parameters Lists (Continued) Module Name PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules Parameter List Location page 183 Page 194 Page 194
Page 203 Page 203 Page 207 Page 211
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules Page 217 PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-DOB: SD with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability PT-MADI4C-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output Module Page 217 Page 262 Page 273
Submodules
A variety of submodules are available for Platinum output modules. See the pertinent output module section for a description of its associated submodules.
180
Signal Flow Diagram

SD/HD 8 PRTI (4) AutoManual 8 Bypass 8 FPGA AutoBypass 8 SS[2..0] 8 Lock Detect 8 Select 8 outputs XPT Card 1 8 outputs XPT Card 2 MI connector 8 outputs XPT Card 3 8 outputs XPT Card 4 OM select 8 outputs 8 outputs Cable drivers 8 ASI/177 Reclockers 8
1 output (OM)
8:1 mux
PIPE (2) ENET I/O micro
Figure 4-2 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Output Module (Showing Reclocking)
181
PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-3 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Module The PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking. These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock SMPTE as well as ASI (270 Mb/s) signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s, with reclocking for the most common SMPTE data rates in this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-2 on page 182. An 81 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal. The OBG+ modules provide power saving features not available in previous OB+ modules. Individual channels are automatically powered down when no signal is present, or when the output is not terminated. These features can save up to 2.7 Watts on each output module
182
Table 4-2 Reclocker Operating Modes Mode Name Automatic Description The reclocker attempts to reclock the received data at its data rate if the received data rate is 270 Mb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, or 2.970 Gb/s. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated and the reclocked rate is reported. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 270Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.4835 Gb/s or 1.485 Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 2.967 Gb/s or 2.970 Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. If reclocking is not successful, received data appears at the output of the reclocker without any reclock processing. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. The received data bypasses the reclock processing and appears at the output of the reclocker, regardless of whether the data is reclockable. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. No data appears at the output of the reclocker if the signal on the corresponding input is absent, or this output channel is not selected. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. (This mode can be disabled if necessary.) No data appears at the output of the reclocker regardless of the system switch setting, data status, or other setting of the reclocker. Note Default
270 Mb/s
Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Default
1.485 Gb/s
2.970 Gb/s
Automatic bypass Forced bypass
Automatic mute
Default
Forced mute
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+

The PT-HS-BP+ back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ modules.

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ modules.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ modules. See page 259 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PM-HSR-OBG+DX are PM-HSR-OBG+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-HSR-OBG+DX are PT-HSR-OBG+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules.
183
Installation Output Module Installation

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

Output Monitoring Module Installation

All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 328 for the procedure for field expansion of output monitoring modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
Table 4-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OBG+ and PT-HSR-OBG+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
184
Table 4-3 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Signal Type (1-8) [RO] Data Rate (1-8) [RO] (1-8) Description Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Displays detected slew rate of incoming signal Displays clocked data rate at the reclocking stage Options

Not locked Locked HD SD 270 Mb/s 1.48 Gb/s 2.97 Gb/s Unknown Mute on Mute off Auto 270 Mb/s 1.48 Gb/s 2.97 Gb/s Disabled Enabled Auto bypass Enforced bypass HD SD Auto (use detected data rate from Signal Type parameter) Main module Submodule
Mute (1-8) Reclocker Mode (1-8)
Mutes specified output channel Sets the reclocker mode to autodetect or to lock to a particular rate
Green Mode Bypass (1-8) Enforced Slew Rate (1-8)
Enables or disables power-saving feature Enforces reclocking bypass function Sets slew rate for output signal
Output Mode (1-8)
Determines if output signal comes from the main module or submodule (if installed) Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
Parameter Hysteresis Sync Select

Sync 1 Sync 2 Sync 3 Sync 4
185
Figure 4-4 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-4 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Specifications Item Number of outputs Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
186
Table 4-4 PM-HSR-OBG+/PT-HSR-OBG+ Specifications Reclocking
Automatic for 2.970 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, and 270 Mb/s Bypass for all other rates between 3 Mb/ s and 3.0 Gb/s
Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times
< 0.2 UI @ frequency tested 800 mVp-p 10% 0V 0.5V 400 ps 1500 ps, for SMPTE 259M data rates < 135 ps, for SMPTE 424M and 292M data rates < 10% of amplitude
Overshoot
PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-5 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Module
187
The PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking. These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 2.97 Gb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock SMPTE as well as ASI (270 Mb/s) signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 2.97 Gb/s, with reclocking for the most common SMPTE data rates in this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-2 on page 182. An 81 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal. Table 4-5 Reclocker Operating Modes Mode Name Automatic Description The reclocker attempts to reclock the received data at its data rate if the received data rate is 270 Mb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, or 2.970 Gb/s. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated and the reclocked rate is reported. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 270Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.4835 Gb/s or 1.485 Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 2.967 Gb/s or 2.970 Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. If reclocking is not successful, received data appears at the output of the reclocker without any reclock processing. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. The received data bypasses the reclock processing and appears at the output of the reclocker, regardless of whether the data is reclockable. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. No data appears at the output of the reclocker if the signal on the corresponding input is absent, or this output channel is not selected. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. (This mode can be disabled if necessary.) No data appears at the output of the reclocker regardless of the system switch setting, data status, or other setting of the reclocker. Note Default
270 Mb/s
Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Default
1.485 Gb/s
2.970 Gb/s
Automatic bypass Forced bypass
Automatic mute
Default
Forced mute
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules.
Output Monitoring Module

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules.
188
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules. See page 259 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PM-HSR-OB+DX are PM-HSR-OB+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-HSR-OB+DX are PT-HSR-OB+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules.



Configuration
Table 4-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OB+ and PT-HSR-OB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list.
189
See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 4-6 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Signal Type (1-8) Mute (1-8) Reclocker Mode (1-8) Auto Bypass (1-8) Bypass (1-8) Enforced Slew Rate (1-8) Description Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Displays detected slew rate of incoming signal Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Sets the reclock mode to manual or automatic Enables or disables the reclock automatic bypass function Sets reclocking bypass function Sets slew rate for output signal Options

Not locked Locked HD SD Muted Unmuted Manual Auto Off On Off On HD SD Auto (use detected data rate from Signal Type parameter) 12 dB 5 dB Main module Submodule 270 1483.5/1485 2967/2970
Input EQ (1-8) Output Mode (1-8)
Sets input EQ setting for onboard switchers Determines if output signal comes from the main module or submodule (if installed) Sets the reclock rate
Data Rate (1-8)
Board Level Hysteresis Sync Type
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference

Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 Sync4
Module ID
Displays unique module identifier of PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ module
String
190

Reclocker 4:1 mux with 1:2 fanout HD/SD input 1 A B C D Optional processing submodule Cable driver HD/SD output 1

HD/SD input 8 A B C D
Reclocker 4:1 mux with 1:2 fanout Cable driver
8:1 mux 2:1 mux (single to diff.) ROF
HD/SD output 8
Sync inputs
OB2OB TDM input Ethernet
+3.3 V
+1.2 V
+24 V fused
Output driver 1-8 slew rate/mute Mux control Reclocker 1-8 control Reclocker 1-8 reporting
PIPE PRTI
CPLD
Figure 4-6 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-7 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Specifications Item Number of outputs Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 3.0 Gb/s
191
Table 4-7 PM-HSR-OB+/PT-HSR-OB+ Specifications Reclocking
Automatic for 2.970 Gb/s, 2.967 Gb/s, 1.485 Gb/s, 1.4835 Gb/s, and 270 Mb/s Bypass for all other rates between 3 Mb/ s and 3.0 Gb/s
Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times
< 0.2 UI @ frequency tested 800 mVp-p 10% 0V 0.5V 400 ps 1500 ps, for SMPTE 259M data rates < 135 ps, for SMPTE 424M and 292M data rates < 10% of amplitude
Overshoot
192
PT-HSRO-OB+: Fiber Optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module
PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR8O-OBG+: Fiber Optical 3G/1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI Serial Video Transmitter Module With Power Saving
Note: The PT-HSRO-OBG+ and the PT-HSR8O-OBG+ are identical except for the SFP types that they are configured for. The PT-HSRO-OBG+ module is pre-configured for 1310 SFP support. See OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications on page 196. If you need to use a different (dual output CWDM) SFP flavor, the PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ module needs be to ordered. See OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications on page 197
Operation
Note: The PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules provide power saving features that are not available in previous PT-HSRO-OB+ modules. Individual channels are automatically powered down when no signal is present. These features can save up to 2.7 Watts on each output module.
Figure 4-7 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ Module (with PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Module) The PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ fiber optical 3G HD-SDI, 1.5G HD-SDI, and SD-SDI serial video transmitter module has 8 SFP-type fiber optical transmitters that transmit 3 Gb HD, 1.5 Gb HD, or SD serial digital video data out of a LC type fiber socket. Four SFP modules, each contains two channels, are mounted on the metal back panel of the back module. The SFP module can be replaced or changed from the back of the frame without removing the front module or disturbing traffic other than that on the SFP.
193
The front module receives 32 serial digital video signals from the crosspoint matrix, provides secondary switching, reclocks SMPTE as well as DVB-ASI (270 Mb/s) signals, and sends them to the SFP fiber optical transmitters. An 81 crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal. PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules have the capability to support a variety of optional submodules. The SFP modules provide laser status report and SFP wavelength identification. LEDs on the back panel indicate laser output on/off status.
Back Panel I/O Module

The PT-SFP2X4+BM back module corresponds to the PT-HSRO-OB+, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR8O-OBG+ modules.
Figure 4-8 PT-SFP2X4+BM Back Connector Module

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ module.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PT-HSRO-OB+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules. See page 259 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PT-HSRO-OB+MX and PT-HSRO-OBG+MX are PT-HSRO-OB+ and PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules, respectively.
194
Installation
Output Module Installation

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion of PT-HSRO-OB+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+ modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 397, for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department. Note: Module fuses are designed to operate throughout normal operations. In the unlikely event that a fuse fails, return the module to Harris Engineering for diagnostic testing. Please contact Customer Service to obtain a return authorization number, and then refer to page xix for information about returning a product

Configuration
Table 4-8 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HSRO-OB+/ PT-HSRO-OBG+/ PT-HSR4OCG-OBG modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 4-8 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Sync Select Description Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference Options

0 1 2 3
Main Module ID [RO] Parameter Hysteresis (us (0.5 inc)) Wavelength [RO]
Displays the Module Hardware ID. Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Reports wavelength of fiber optical output 0 to 10 seconds in 500 ns steps

1XXX nm N/A
195
Table 4-8 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter SFP(1-4) Type [RO] Description Reports type of SFP that plugged in back module Options
OP+SFP+TT+13+13 See OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications. OP+SFP+TT+27+29 OP+SFP+TT+31+33 OP+SFP+TT+35+37 OP+SFP+TT+43+45 OP+SFP+TT+47+49 OP+SFP+TT+51+53 OP+SFP+TT+55+57 OP+SFP+TT+59+61
See OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications.

Unknown Invalid SFP Normal Failed Disabled N/A On Off Yes No Yes No Auto 270 Mb/s 1.48 Gb/s 2.97 Gb/s Off On Off On
Laser Status [RO]
Reports laser status
Mute Laser Enable Lock Detect [RO] Reclocker Mode
Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Enables or disables fiber optical output Reports if data is locked by reclocking stage Sets reclock mode to automatic or to one of three manual fixed rates
Auto Bypass Enables or disables reclock (always enabled on PT-HSRO-OBG+, automatic bypass function parameter not displayed) Bypass Sets reclocking bypass function
196
Table 4-8 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+/PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Rate Detect [RO] Description Detects data rate Options

SD HD Unknown
HD is displayed for both 1.48 & 2.97 Gbps rates and SD is displayed for 270 Mbps. Input EQ (not available on PT-HSRO-OBG+) Output Mode Sets input EQ setting for onboard switchers Determines if output signal comes from main module or submodule (if installed)

12 dB 5 dB Main module Submodule
SFP Specifications
The following are specifications for the supported SFPs. Ensure that you upgrade to the latest firmware version (3.4 or later) before installing an SFP.

OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications
OP+SFP+TT+1310 Specifications
Note: These specs apply to the PT-HSRO-OBG+ module which is pre-configured for the 1310 SFP. Item Number of LC connector outputs Peak wavelength Spectrum width (RMS) Average output power Optical rise/fall time (3G HD-SDI) Extinction ratio Jitter 1280 nm -5 dBm 7 dB 1310 nm 1.5 nm -2 dBm 105/120 ps 45 ps 60 ps Minimum Typical Maximum 2x2 1340 nm 3 nm 0 dBm 165/180 ps 70 ps 100 ps 3 Gb/s Pathological 1.5 Gb/s Pathological Measured at 25C Notes
197
Item
Minimum -
Typical 110 ps
Maximum 180 ps
Notes 270 MHz Pathological
Laser safety level Standards
Class 1

3G: SMPTE 424M HD: SMPTE 292M SD: SMPTE 259M
OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy Dual Output CWDM Transmitter Specifications

Note: These specs apply to the PT-HSR4OCG-OBG+ module which can be pre-configured (on request) for the dual output CWDM SFPs. Table 4-9 OP+SFP+TT+xx+yy specs Item Number of LC input connectors Peak wavelength Minimum c -5.5nm Typical c Maximum 2 c +7.5nm ITU-T G.694.2 CWDM wavelength from 1470 nm to 1610 nm, each step 20 nm Notes
Spectrum width (RMS) Average output power Optical rise/fall time (3G HD-SDI) Laser safety level Standards
0 dBm Class 1

1 nm 4 dBm 135 ps 2.97 Gb/s*
3G: SMPTE 424M HD: SMPTE 292M SD: SMPTE 259M
198
Figure 4-9 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ Functional Block Diagram
199
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-10 PT-HSRO-OB+/PT-HSRO-OBG+ Specifications* Item Connector Number of outputs
*
Specification LC 8
For optical output performance specifications (Peak Wavelength, Output Power, Extinction Ratio, etc.) please refer to individual SFP module specification datasheets.
Note: Datasheets of customer-replaceable optical SFP parts are available by request. Please contact your Customer Service representative for more information.
200
PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB: HD-SDI/SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-10 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HS-OB Module
Figure 4-11 PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB Module
201
The HD-SDI/SD-SDI digital multirate output module comes in these variations:

The PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking. The PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HS-DOB are HD-SDI/SD-SDI output modules with reclocking and dual outputs. They are functionally identical to the PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB; however, the PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HS-DOB have two outputs for each channel and each PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB module occupies two slots.
The PT-HSR-OB/PT-HS-DOB digital multirate output module receives 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provides secondary switching, reclocks the SMPTE and ASI signals, and sends them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. It supports any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 1.5 Gb/s, with reclocking for standard SMPTE data rates in this range. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute. These modes are described in Table 4-11. An 81 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal. Table 4-11 Reclocker Operating Modes Mode Name Automatic Description The reclocker attempts to reclock the received data at its data rate if the received data rate is one of 143 Mb/s, 270 Mb/s, 360 Mb/s, 540 Mb/s and 1.485 Gb/s. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated and the reclocked rate is reported. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 143 Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 177 Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 270 Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 360 Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 540 Mb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. The reclocker is set to attempt to reclock the input data at 1.485 Gb/s only. If this reclocking is successful, the corresponding signal presence LED is illuminated. If reclocking is not successful, received data appears at the output of the reclocker without any reclock processing. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. Note Default
143 Mb/s
Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode Default
177 Mb/s
270 Mb/s
360 Mb/s
540 Mb/s
1.485 Gb/s
Automatic bypass
202
Table 4-11 Reclocker Operating Modes (Continued) Mode Name Forced bypass Description The received data bypasses the reclock processing and appears at the output of the reclocker, regardless of whether the data is reclockable. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. No data appears at the output of the reclocker if the signal on the corresponding input is absent, or this output channel is not selected. The corresponding signal presence LED is turned off. (This mode can be disabled if necessary.) No data appears at the output of the reclocker regardless of the system switch setting, data status, or other setting of the reclocker. Note
Automatic mute
Default
Forced mute
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB and PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-HSR-OB, PM-HSR-DOB, PT-HSR-OB, and PT-HS-DOB modules.

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the PM-HSR-OB, PM-HSR-DOB, PT-HSR-OB, and PT-HS-DOB modules.

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.


203
Configuration
Table 4-12 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-HSR-OB and PT-HSR-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 4-12 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Mute (1-8) Reclocker Mode (1-8) Autobypass (1-8) Bypass (1-8) Data Rate (1-8) Description Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Sets the reclock mode to manual or automatic Enables or disables the reclock automatic bypass function Sets bypass for reclocking function Sets the reclock rate Options

Not locked Locked Muted Unmuted Manual Auto Off On Off On 143 177 270 360 540 1483.5/1485
Board Level Hysteresis Signal Type (1-8) Sync Type
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Determines slew rate of incoming signal Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference

SD HD Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 Sync4
204

IN1A IN1B IN1C IN1D IN2A IN2B IN2C IN2D IN3A IN3B IN3C IN3D IN4A IN4B IN4C IN4D IN5A IN5B IN5C IN5D IN6A IN6B IN6C IN6D IN7A IN7B IN7C IN7D IN8A IN8B IN8C IN8D OUT1 Reclocker Driver
OUT2 Reclocker Driver
Monitoring Switch
M-OUT

Driver rate control System control
Reclocker control
Microprocessor & FPGA
+3.3V
Power supply Power supply
+24V
+3.3VL
+5VL
Figure 4-12 PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB Functional Block Diagram
205
Specification s
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-13 PM-HSR-OB/PM-HSR-DOB and PT-HSR-OB/PT-HS-DOB Specifications Item Number of outputs PM-HSR-OB/PT-HSR-OB PM-HSR-DOB/PT-HS-DOB Output connector Impedance Signal type 8 16 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s Reclockable for all data rates defined by SMPTE 292M/259M/344M, DVB-ASI except 177Mb/s > 18 dB, up to 540 MHz > 16 dB, 540 MHz to 1.5 GHz < 0.2UI @ frequency tested 800 mVp-p 10% 0V 0.5V 400 ps 1500 ps, for SMPTE 259M data rates < 270 ps, for SMPTE 292M data rates < 10% of amplitude Specification
Reclocking
Return loss Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times
Overshoot
206
PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules

Operation
Note: PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames
Figure 4-13 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Module The PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OBG+ are digital multi-rate output modules with reclocking. These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute.
Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at a 270 Mb/s data rate (this mode is the default mode) Manual mode: manually sets a 270 Mb/s rate for reclocking Bypass mode: data bypasses the PLL Mute mode: no output at the output pins of the reclocker
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75 output driver feeding the 75 BNC. An 81 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal. The OBG+ modules provide power saving features not available in previous OB+ modules. Individual channels are automatically powered down when no signal is present, or when the output is not terminated. These features can save up to 2.7 Watts on each output module
207
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OBG+ and PT-SR-OBG+ modules.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-SR-OBG+ and PT-SR-OBG+ modules. See page 259 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PM-SR-OBG+DX are PM-SR-OBG+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-SR-OBG+DX are PT-SR-OBG+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules.


Configuration
Table 4-14 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OBG+ and PT-SR-OBG+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
208
Table 4-14 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Signal Type (1-8) [RO] Data Rate (1-8) Mute (1-8) Reclocker Mode (1-8) Green Mode Bypass (1-8) Enforced Slew Rate (1-8) Output Mode (1-8) Description Reports if data is locked at reclocking stage Displays detected slew rate of incoming signal Displays locked data rate at the reclocking stage Mutes specified output channel Sets the reclock mode to lock at the specified rate Enables or disables power saving feature Enforces reclocking bypass function Sets slew rate for output signal Determines if output signal comes from the main module or submodule (if installed) Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference Options

Not locked Locked SD 270 Mb/s Unknown Mute on Mute off 270 Mb/s Disabled Enabled Auto bypass Enforced bypass SD Main module Submodule
Parameter Hysteresis Sync Select

209
Figure 4-14 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-15 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Specifications Item Number of outputs Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s
210
Table 4-15 PM-SR-OBG+/PT-SR-OBG+ Specifications Item Reclocking Specification

Automatic for 270 Mb/s Bypass for all other rates between 3 Mb/ s and 540 Mb/s
Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times Overshoot
< 0.2UI @ frequency tested 800 mVp-p 10% 0 V 0.5 V 400 ps 1500 ps < 10% of amplitude
PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-15 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Module The PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ are digital multi-rate output modules with reclocking. These modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute.
Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at a 270 Mb/s data rate (this mode is the default mode)
211
Manual mode: manually sets a 270 Mb/s rate for reclocking Bypass mode: data bypasses the PLL Mute mode: no output at the output pins of the reclocker
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75 output driver feeding the 75 BNC. An 81 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OB+ and PT-SR-OB+ modules.
Submodules
PT-MX-SB
The optional PT-MX-SB submodule corresponds to the PM-SR-OB+ and PT-SR-OB+ modules. See page 259 for more information. Note: Modules marked as PM-SR-OB+DX are PM-SR-OB+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules. Modules marked as PT-SR-OB+DX are PT-SR-OB+ modules equipped with PT-MX-SB submodules


Configuration
212
Table 4-16 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OB+ and PT-SR-OB+ modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 4-16 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Mute_ (1-8) Reclocker Mode (1-8) Auto Bypass (1-8) Bypass (1-8) Input EQ (1-8) Output Mode (1-8) Description Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Sets the reclock mode to manual or automatic Enables or disables the reclock automatic bypass function Sets bypass for ignoring reclocking function Sets input EQ setting for onboard switchers Determines if output signal comes from the main module or submodule (if installed) Sets the reclock rate Options

Not locked Locked Muted Unmuted Manual Auto Off On Off On 12 dB 5 dB Main module Submodule 270 Mb/s
Data Rate (1-8)

Module ID
Displays unique module identifier of PM-SR-OB+ or PT-SR-OB+ module
String
213

Reclocker 4:1 mux with 1:2 fanout SD input 1 A B C D Optional processing submodule Cable driver SD output 1

SD input 8 A B C D
Reclocker 4:1 mux with 1:2 fanout Cable driver
8:1 mux 2:1 mux (single to diff.) ROF
SD output 8
Sync inputs
OB2OB TDM input Ethernet
+3.3 V
+1.2 V
+24 V fused
Output driver 1-8 slew rate/mute Mux control Reclocker 1-8 control Reclocker 1-8 reporting
PIPE PRTI
CPLD
Figure 4-16 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-17 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Specifications Item Number of outputs Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s
214
Table 4-17 PM-SR-OB+/PT-SR-OB+ Specifications Item Reclocking Specification

Automatic for 270 Mb/s Bypass for all other rates between 3 Mb/ s and 540 Mb/s
Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times Overshoot
< 0.2UI @ frequency tested 800 mVp-p 10% 0 V 0.5 V 400 ps 1500 ps < 10% of amplitude
215
PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB: SD-SDI with Reclocking Output Modules
PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB: SD-SDI with Reclocking and Dual Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-17 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB Module
Figure 4-18 PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB Module The SD digital multi-rate output module comes in these variations:
216
The PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB are SD output modules with reclocking. The PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB are SD output modules with reclocking and dual outputs.
The PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB digital multi-rate output modules receive 32 digital differential signal pairs (3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s) from the crosspoint matrix, provide secondary switching, reclock the SMPTE and ASI signals, and send them to the drivers designed to drive 75 loads. They support any digital signal between 3 Mb/s and 540 Mb/s with no reclocking. The reclocker works in one of four modes: automatic, manual, bypass, and mute.
Automatic mode: automatically detects and reclocks at an input SMPTE data rate (this mode is the default mode) Manual mode: manually sets a SMPTE rate for reclocking Bypass mode: data bypasses the PLL Mute mode: no output at the output pins of the reclocker
Output data from the reclocker is fed to a 75 output driver feeding the 75 BNC. An 81 differential crosspoint selects the output monitoring signal.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB and PM-SR-DOB/ PT-SR-DOB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-SR-OB, PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB, and PT-SR-DOB modules.


Configuration
217
Table 4-18 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-SR-OB, PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB, and PT-SR-DOB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 4-18 PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB, PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Mute (1-8) Reclocker Mode (1-8) Autobypass (1-8) Bypass (1-8) Data Rate (1-8) Description Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Sets the reclock mode to manual or automatic Enables or disables the reclock automatic bypass function Sets bypass for ignoring reclocking function Sets the reclock rate Options

Not locked Locked Muted Unmuted Manual Auto Off On Off On 143 177 270 360 540

218

IN1A IN1B IN1C IN1D IN2A IN2B IN2C IN2D IN3A IN3B IN3C IN3D IN4A IN4B IN4C IN4D IN5A IN5B IN5C IN5D IN6A IN6B IN6C IN6D IN7A IN7B IN7C IN7D IN8A IN8B IN8C IN8D OUT1 Reclocker Driver
Monitoring Switch
M-OUT

Driver rate control System control
Reclocker control
Microprocessor & FPGA
+3.3V
Power supply Power supply
+24V +5VL
+3.3VL
Figure 4-19 PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-19 PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB Specifications Item Number of outputs PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB PM-SR-DOB/PT-SR-DOB Output connector Impedance Signal type 8 16 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other < 1Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 540 Mb/s Specification
219
Table 4-19 PM-SR-OB/PM-SR-DOB and PT-SR-OB/PT-SR-DOB Specifications Item Reclocking Return loss Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times Overshoot Specification Reclockable for all signals defined by SMPTE 259M/344M, DVB-ASI except 177 Mb/s > 16 dB, up to 540 MHz < 0.2UI @ frequency tested 800 mVp-p 10% 0 V 0.5 V 400 ps 1500 ps < 10% of amplitude
220
PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules
PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-20 PT-AEB-OB Module
Figure 4-21 PT-AEC-OB Module The AES output module allows for the connection of 8 or (optionally) 16 output channels of AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum platform, and is available as a 16-channel card supporting Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) AES routing.
221
The module receives 32 balanced low voltage differential signals (LVDS) from the crosspoint matrix, which are presented to 8 separate 41 multiplexers that determine the final routing of the signal to its destined output channel. Along with the octal 41 muxes, signal level conversion and presence detection are handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM version uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation at the outputs. The AES output module also provides output presence detection and true output monitoring on each of the 8 (or 16) channels.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB and PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB

The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEB-OB and the PT-AEB-OB output modules. The PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEC-OB output modules. DB-25 connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial cables.

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the PM-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB, PT-AEB-OB, and PT-AEC-OB modules.

222


Configuration
Table 4-20 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB, PT-AEB-OB, and PT-AEC-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 4-20 PM-AEB-OB/PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEB-OB/PT-AEC-OB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) [RO] Back Module Type Description Indicates the presence or absence of a valid signal Reports coax or balanced back module Options

Signal absent Signal present PT-AEBT-BMO PT-AECT-BMO PT-AEB-BMO PT-AEC-BMO Muted Unmuted
Mute (1-8) Board Level Hysteresis Sync Type
Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference

223

Input 1A Input 1B Input 1C Input 1D FPGAbased signal presence detect & output switching Input 5A Output 1+ Output 1Monitor 1 Input 5B Input 5C Input 5D FPGAbased signal presence detect & output switching
Output 5+ Output 5Monitor 5
Input 2A Input 2B Input 2C Input 2D
FPGAbased signal presence detect & output switching
Input 6A Output 2+ Output 2Monitor 2 Input 6B Input 6C Input 6D
Internal control busses Bidirectional frame control signals +24VA In from frame +24VB In from frame +5VL In from frame On Board Supply
+5V Back panel ID +3.3V +2.5V +1.5V Card health and signal presence LEDs -5V
Control Logic
PIPE PRTI
Figure 4-23 PM-AEB-OB/PM-AEC-OB and PT-AEB-OB/PT-AEC-OB Functional Block Diagram
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-21 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB Pinout Information
J2 (Outputs 1 8)
DB-25 Pin No.
Not Used
224
Table 4-21 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB Pinout Information 1+ 11 Gnd 2+ 22 Gnd 3+ 33 Gnd 4+ 44 Gnd 5+ 55 Gnd 6+ 66 Gnd 7+ 77 Gnd 8+ 88 Gnd Spare Gnd 13 12 25 24 23 11 10 9 22 21 20 8 7 6 19 18 17 5 4 3 16 15 14 2 1
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-22 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB AES Balanced Digital Audio Output Specifications Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Specification 8 Balanced, transformer coupled DB-25 110
225
Table 4-22 PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB AES Balanced Digital Audio Output Item Signal type Specification AES3 AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s < 5ns 5 Vp-p 1 V into 110 load 0 V 0.05 V 5 ns 30 ns < 170 ns
Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times Propagation delay
Table 4-23 PM-AEC-OB/PT-AEC-OB Coaxial Digital Audio Output Specifications Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 8 Unbalanced 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor) 75 AES3id, SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s > 35 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz > 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz < 5 ns 1.0 Vp-p 10% into 75 load 0 V 0.05 V 30 ns 44 ns < 170 ns
Return loss Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/Fall times Propagation delay
226
PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB: AES Balanced Output Modules with TDM Capability
PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB: AES Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability

Operation
Figure 4-24 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Module
Figure 4-25 PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Module
227
Note: PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames. The AES TDM output module allows for the connection of 16 output channels of AES digital audio, using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum platform, and supports Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) AES routing. Audio processing functions, as well as signal level conversion and presence detection, are handled within an FPGA-based circuit. The 16-channel TDM output module uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation at the outputs. The AES TDM output module also provides output presence detection and true output monitoring on each of the 16 channels.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB and PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB

The PT-AEB-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AEBT-OB and the PT-AEBT-OB output modules. The PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-AECT-OB and PT-AECT-OB output modules. DB-25 connectors are used on the PT-AEB-OBP and PT-AEC-OBP back panel I/O modules. To provide the required BNC interface, the PT-AEC-BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT-AEC-OBP for connection to coaxial cables.

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 for the procedure for field expansion of output modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
228

Configuration
Table 4-24 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-AEBT-OB, PM-AECT-OB, PT-AEBT-OB, and PT-AECT-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
Table 4-24 PM-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Back Module Type Description Reports coax or balanced back module Options

PT-AEBT-BMO PT-AECT-BMO PT-AEB-BMO PT-AEC-BMO Pass input Silence 500 Hz 1K TDM XPT Wideband Silence DC Normal polarity Invert polarity Not locked Locked No phase error Phase error
Tone (1-16)
Indicates type of tone to send out AES output
XPT Type Disconnect State
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement Select whether to transmit AES silence or a DC level when signal presence is lost Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase
Polarity Reversal (1-32) Lock Detect (1-16) [RO] Phase Alarm (1-16)
229
Table 4-24 PM-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PT-AECT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Swap/Copy (1-16) Description Swap/Copy left and right audio channels (NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing) Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2 (NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy) Selects AES reference input for source Options

No swap Swap left and right Copy left to right Copy right to left
1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments

Signal OK Signal clipping Muted Unmuted No summing Right to left Left to right Both Sync 4 Sync 3 Sync 2 Sync 1
Audio Mute (1-16) Summing (1-16)
Audio Reference
Board Level Hysteresis Transition (1-16)
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Determines type of transition on a given destination

Quiet switch V-fade Fade/cut Cut/fade Synchronous switch No duration Shortest Short Medium short Medium Medium long Long Longest Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 Sync4
Duration (1-16)
Determines transition length
Sync Type
Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
230

Input 1A Input 1B Input 1C Input 1D Input 2A Input 2B Input 2C Input 2D Input 3A Input 3B Input 3C Input 3D Input 4A Input 4B Input 4C Input 4D Input 5A Input 5B Input 5C Input 5D Input 6A Input 6B Input 6C Input 6D Input 7A Input 7B Input 7C Input 7D Input 8A Input 8B Input 8C Input 8D
AES output 1 Monitor 1 AES output 2 Monitor 2 AES output 3 Monitor 3
FPGA-based signal presence detection and internal distribution
AES output 16 Monitor 16
TDM input
Internal control bus
+24VA in from frame +24VB in from frame +5VL in from frame
On-board supply
+5V +3.3V +2.5V +1.2V
Card status and signal presence LEDs Back module ID signals Control logic
PIPE PRTI
Figure 4-27 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB/PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Functional Block Diagram
231
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-25 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB Pinout Information
J2 (Outputs 1 8) 1+ 11 Gnd 2+ 22 Gnd 3+ 33 Gnd 4+ 44 Gnd 5+ 55 Gnd 6+ 66 Gnd 7+ 77 Gnd 8+ 88 Gnd Spare Gnd
DB-25 Pin No. 13 12 25 24 23 11 10 9 22 21 20 8 7 6 19 18 17 5 4 3 16 15 14 2 1
J1 (Outputs 9 16) 9+ 99 Gnd 10+ 1010 Gnd 11+ 1111 Gnd 12+ 1212 Gnd 13+ 1313 Gnd 14+ 1414 Gnd 15+ 1515 Gnd 16+ 1616 Gnd Spare Gnd
DB-25 Pin No. 13 12 25 24 23 11 10 9 22 21 20 8 7 6 19 18 17 5 4 3 16 15 14 2 1
232
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-26 PM-AEBT-OB/PT-AEBT-OB AES Specifications Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 16 Balanced, transformer coupled DB-25 110 AES3 AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s < 5ns 5 Vp-p 1 V into 110 load 0 V 0.05 V 5 ns 30 ns < 170 ns
Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times Propagation delay
Table 4-27 PM-AECT-OB/PT-AECT-OB Specifications Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Specification 16 Unbalanced 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 (via adaptor) 75 AES3id, SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40% 60% duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb/s to 25 Mb/s > 35 dB, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz > 25 dB, 6 MHz to 12 MHz < 5 ns 1.0 Vp-p 10% into 75 load 0 V 0.05 V 30 ns 44 ns < 170 ns
Return loss Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/Fall times Propagation delay
233
PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules
PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB: SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules with Dual Output

Operation
Figure 4-28 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB Module
234
Figure 4-29 PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB Module The SD to analog video encoder module comes in these variations:

The PM-ENC-OB and PT-ENC-OB are SD-to-analog video encoder output modules. The PM-ENC-DOB and PT-ENC-DOB are SD-to-analog video encoder output modules with dual outputs.
The PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB SD-to-analog video encoder modules convert a block of eight serial SD digital signals to composite NTSC or PAL video signals. The PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB modules accept 32 serial digital (SD) video signals from the crosspoint module, which are presented to four FPGA-based deserializer chips. Within each of the deserializer chips are two 41 multiplexers that switch the signals to the receiver blocks. The two receiver blocks within each of the deserializer chips perform the functions of extracting and locking all conversion functions to the bit-serial clock. To do this they
Use the internal and external PLL circuitry to descramble the SMPTE non-return to zero (NRZI) SDI stream Find the x3FF start of active video/end of active video (EAV / SAV) frame boundaries Load the decoded data stream into a serial in/parallel out (SIPO) shift register for exporting the data in 10-bit parallel form
The 10-bit parallel data is loaded into the encoder chip on the rising edge of a 27 MHz pipeline clock, where it is processed for digital noise reduction (DNR) to reduce low-amplitude, high-frequency noise. Gamma correction, sub-alias filtering (SAF), and user-based color adjustments are performed in the parallel CCIR-601 domain. The signal is then separated into its chrominance and luminance components, sent through the low-pass filters (LPF) to reduce aliasing effects incurred as a process of encoding the signal, and resampled at 2X to further reduce aliasing. The oversampled parallel signal is finally converted to analog composite video within the 10-bit DAC stage, sent through a 4-pole low pass filter, and buffered for presentation to the output BNC connector. Through the control system, you can control the low-pass and notch filter selection, NTSC or PAL video standard, video pedestal, internal test signal generator, chrominance level and hue (NTSC only), brightness, sharpness, and digital noise reduction. You must be careful when implementing the notch and low pass filters, as a tradeoff between frequency response and out of band noise often takes place. Each of the eight channels provide standard reporting of signal presence via card-edge mounted LEDs (Output 1 Output 8) and via the control system. Additional system LEDs indicate the following:

The power supply indicator (POWER) shows that +24V is present on the module. The control system acknowledgment indicator (ACT CTRL) shows that the control system is communicating with the module. The Output Active warning indicator (ACT OUT) indicates that a valid input signal has been switched to an output on this module.
235
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB and PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB

The PT-V-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules.

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring for the PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules.



Configuration
Table 4-28 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-ENC-OB, PM-ENC-DOB, PT-ENC-OB, and PT-ENC-DOB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
236
Table 4-28 PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB User-Controllable Parameters List Parameter Chrominance Filter Type (1-8) Description Sets chrominance filter type Options

1.3 MHz 0.65 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz Reserved CIF QCIF 3 MHz NTSC low pass PAL low pass NTSC notch PAL notch Extended CIF QCIF Reserved NTSC PAL-B/D/G/H/I PAL-N Enable Disable Enable Disable
Luminance Filter Type (1-8)
Enables or disables luminance filter type
Video Standard (1-8)
Sets video standard
Pedestal Enable (1-8) DNR (1-8) Brightness (1-8) Contrast (1-8) Chrominance Saturation (1-8) Chrominance Hue (Tint) (1-8) Lock Detect (1-8) Board Level Hysteresis Sync Type
Enables 7.5 IRE video setup level Enables or disables digital noise reduction Sets brightness level Sets contrast level Sets chrominance saturation level Sets chrominance hue level Reports presence or absence of valid signal Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference
7 to 22 0-192 0-1255 22 to 22


237
Figure 4-30 PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB Functional Block Diagram
238
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-29 PM-ENC-OB/PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-DOB Specifications Item Number of outputs PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB PM-ENC-DOB/PT-ENC-DOB Output connector Impedance Signal type Output amplitude Return loss Filtering Resolution Frequency response Differential gain Differential phase Bulk delay Signal to noise ratio (RMS) DC offset 8 16 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 NTSC, PAL 1.0Vp-p 10% > 40 dB, DC to 5.75 MHz CCIR-601 compliant 10 bits 0.05 dB to 5.2 MHz < 0.8% < 0.6 < 80 s > 65 dB unified - weighting 0 V 0.025 V Specification
239
PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules

Operation
Figure 4-31 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Module The PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB audio D/A output module provides the platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. This option provides 8 channels of conversion with basic Platinum I/O module features. The PT-DACT-OB option provides greater conversion capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). This option provides 16 channels of conversion using the same front and back module combinations. See page 246 for more information.
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DAC-OB and the PT-DAC-OB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
240

The optional PT-HSR-OM and PT-HSRAEC-OM modules provides output monitoring of AES signals for the PM-DAC-OB and PT-DAC-OB modules.



241
Configuration
Table 4-28 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DAC-OB and PT-DAC-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 4-30 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock Detect (1-8) Mute (1-8) Vol A (1-8) Board Level Hysteresis Sync Type Description Reports presence or absence of valid input signal Mutes audio Attenuate the audio signal in 1 dB increments Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference Options

Signal absent Signal present Mute on Mute off 127 dB - 0 dB

242
Serial clock
OM A
Receiver DAC
OM B I2C Bus [1 of 4] Control I2C Bus [1 of 8] Serial data
Left right clk
Output 1 Module control

Pipe I2C I2C OM cntrl
/4 /8
Output driver Output 2

A B
AES input 3A-3D Output cell 6 Output cell 7 FPGA Output cell 8
Output 6 Output 7 Output 8

A
Frame power
AES input 4A-4D
OM 1
OM 8
Output cell 3 Output cell 4 Output cell 5 Output 5 Output 4
Output 3
Frame control
AES input 1A-1D Output cell 2
PWR monitoring +17VA +24VA -17VA +5V +24VB +3.3V +2.5V +1.5V
AES input 2A-2D
Output monitoring
B
ROF+ ROF-

A B
AES input 5A-5D
OM cntrl
Figure 4-33 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Functional Block Diagram
AES input 6A-6D
AES input 7A-7D
AES input 8A-8D
243
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-31 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Pinout Diagram
Outputs 14
DB-44 Pin No.
Outputs 58
DB-44 Pin No.
Not Used
15 30 44 43 28 42 14 13 29 41 26 40 12 11 27 24 39 25 10 9 23 38 37
8 7 22 36 21 35 6 5 34 19 20 4 3 32 17 33 1 2 18 31 16
244
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-32 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output Standard Version Unless otherwise noted, all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz AES frame rate. Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Maximum output amplitude Full scale adjustment range DC offset Conversion type Resolution AES frame rates Gain stability Frequency response Linearity deviation THD+N Idle channel noise Dynamic range Crosstalk Specification 8 Balanced DB-44 66 Stereo analog audio +28 dBu 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB 0 V 0.05 V 128x over sampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma 24 bits 32 kHz 192 kHz 0.01 dB 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, 1 dBFS = +23 dBu < -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS > 100 dB CCIR-RMS > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
245
Table 4-33 PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output 600 Version Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Maximum output amplitude Full scale adjustment range DC offset Conversion type Resolution AES frame rates Gain stability Frequency response Linearity deviation THD+N Idle channel noise Dynamic range Crosstalk Specification 8 Balanced DB-44 600 Stereo analog audio +22 dBm 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB 0 V 0.05 V 128x oversampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma 24 bits 32 kHz 192 kHz 0.01 dB 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, 1 dBFS = +17 dBm < 100 dBFS CCIR-RMS > 100 dB CCIR-RMS > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
246
PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB: AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability
Operation
Figure 4-34 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Module The PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB audio D/A output module provides the platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system. The TDM option provides 16 channels of conversion with enhanced Platinum I/O module features. The PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB provides greater conversion capacity, made available via Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
Back Panel I/O Module for PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB

The PT-A2-BP back panel I/O module corresponds to the PM-DACT-OB and the PT-DACT-OB modules. DB-44 connectors are used on the PT-A2-BP. The optional PT-A2-DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame.
247
Installation
Output Module Installation


Configuration
Table 4-34 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-DACT-OB and PT-DACT-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
248
Table 4-34 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Tone (1-16) Description Indicates type of tone to send out AES output Options

Pass input Silence 500Hz 1K TDM XPT Wideband Normal polarity Invert polarity Not locked Locked No phase error Phase error No swap Swap left and right Copy left to right Copy right to left
XPT Type Polarity Reversal (1-32) Lock Detect (1-16) [RO] Phase Alarm (1-16) Swap/Copy (1-16)
Determines crosspoint matrix requirement Reverses + and - to correct audio polarity in the analog domain Reports if data is re-locked by reclocking stage Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase Swap/Copy left and right audio channels (NOTE: This parameter is always applied after summing) Sets 0 dBFS level for digital to analog conversion Indicates gain/attenuation applied to mono channel Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage Add left and right audio samples, divide by 2 (NOTE: This parameter is always applied before swap/copy) Selects AES reference input for source
0dBFS Setting Audio Level Adjustment (1-32) Clipping Detect (1-16) [RO]
13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments 1 0dB to -30 dB in 0.5 dB increments

Signal OK Signal clipping Muted Unmuted No summing Right to left Left to right Both Sync 4 Sync 3 Sync 2 Sync 1 Sync 4 Sync 3 Sync 2 Sync 1
Audio Mute (1-16) Summing (1-16)
Audio Reference
Sync Select
Selects one of the four sync inputs as the external reference
249
Table 4-34 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Board Level Hysteresis Transition (1-16) Description Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Determines type of transition on a given destination Options 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps

Quiet switch V-fade Fade/cut Cut/fade Synchronous switch No duration Shortest Short Medium short Medium Medium long Long Longest
Duration (1-16)
Determines transition length
250
Serial clock
OM A
AES input 1A-1D Receiver DAC

A OM B B I2C Bus [1 of 4] Control I2C Bus [1 of 8] Serial data Left right clk
Output 1 Module control

Pipe I2C I2C OM cntrl
/4 /8
AES input 2A-2D Output cell 2

B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A A
Output driver Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 OM 16 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12
B A
AES input 4A-4D Output cell 6 Output cell 7 FPGA Output cell 8 Output cell 9 Output cell 10 Output cell 11 Output cell 12 Output cell 13 Output cell 14 Output cell 15 Output cell 16
Frame power
OM 1
Output cell 3 Output cell 4 Output cell 5
Frame control
AES input 3A-3D
PWR monitoring +17VA +24VA -17VA +5V +24VB +3.3V +2.5V +1.5V
AES input 5A-5D
Output monitoring
B
ROF+ ROF-
AES input 6A-6D

A B
AES input 7A-7D
OM cntrl
Figure 4-36 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Functional Block Diagram

Output 13
A B A B A B
AES input 8A-8D
Output 14 Output 15 Output 16
TDM input
251
Pinout Diagram
Table 4-35 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Pinout Information
Outputs 14
DB-44 Pin No.
Outputs 58
DB-44 Pin No.
Outputs 9 12
DB-44 Pin No.
Outputs 13 16
DB-44 Pin No.
15 30 44 43 28 42 14 13 29 41 26 40 12 11 27 24 39 25 10 9 23 38 37
8 7 22 36 21 35 6 5 34 19 20 4 3 32 17 33 1 2 18 31 16
9A+ 9A9A Gnd 9B+ 9B9B Gnd 10A+ 10A-
15 30 44 43 28 42 14 13
13A+ 13A-
8 7
13A, 22 14A Gnd 13B+ 13B13B Gnd 14A+ 14A14B+ 14B36 21 35 6 5 34 19
10A Gnd 29 10B+ 10B10B Gnd 11A+ 11A41 26 40 12 11
14B, 15A 20 Gnd 15A+ 15A15B+ 15B15B Gnd 16A+ 16A4 3 32 17 33 1 2
11A Gnd 27 11B+ 11B24 39
11B, 12A 25 Gnd 12A+ 12A12B+ 12B12B Gnd 10 9 23 38 37
16A, 16B 18 Gnd 16B+ 16B31 16
252
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-36 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output Standard Version Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Maximum output amplitude Full scale adjustment range DC offset Conversion type Resolution AES frame rates Gain stability Frequency response Linearity deviation THD+N Idle channel noise Dynamic range Crosstalk Specification 16 Balanced DB-44 66 Stereo analog audio +28 dBu 0 dBFS = +13 dBu to +28 dBu in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB 0V 0.05V 128x oversampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma 24 bits 32 kHz 192 kHz 0.01 dB 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, -1 dBFS = +23 dBu < -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS > 100 dB CCIR-RMS > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +23 dBu)
253
Table 4-37 PM-DACT-OB/PT-DACT-OB Digital to Analog Audio Output 600 Version Item Number of outputs Output type Output connector Impedance Signal type Maximum output amplitude Full scale adjustment range DC offset Conversion type Resolution AES frame rates Gain stability Frequency response Linearity deviation THD+N Idle channel noise Dynamic range Crosstalk Specification 16 Balanced DB-44 600 Stereo analog audio +22 dBm 0 dBFS = +7 dBm to +22 dBm in 1 dB steps, 0.5 dB 0 V 0.05 V 128x oversampling, fifth-order, delta-sigma 24 bits 32 kHz 192 kHz 0.01 dB 0.25 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz < 0.5 dB < 0.01% @ 997 Hz, -1 dBFS = +17 dBm < -100 dBFS CCIR-RMS > 100 dB CCIR-RMS > 90 dB isolation, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, all hostile, typical (hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS = +17 dBm)
254
PT-HSR1310S-OB: Fiber Optical HD/SD Serial Video Transmitter Module

Operation
Figure 4-37 PT-HSR1310S-OB Module (PT-FO-BMO Back Panel I/O Module Attached) The PT-HSR1310S-OB is a fiber optical HD/SD serial video transmitter module. Each module has eight fiber optical transmitter receptacles mounted on the metal back panel of the back module. A switched video data stream by the crosspoint module enters the front module. A 41 mux in the reclocker integrated circuit serves as a secondary switcher for the entire switching matrix. The selected data is processed by the reclocker. The reclocker provides three processing modes: Reclocking (automatic, manual); Bypass (automatic, enforced); and Mute. The processed data stream then enters a 12 buffer. One of the outputs is fed to the back module for E/O conversion. The second output is used for system monitoring. An E-O converter is installed in each channel on the back module. It converts electrical data processed by the reclocker to optical data. This conversion stage also provides alarm and auto-protection functions. The control circuit consists of an FPGA and serial-to-parallel shift registers. In addition to common functions (PIPE port, PRTI port, slot ID, and power start trigger), this FPGA and associated circuits also control video monitoring and data loss of the reclockers, laser failure, and back module identification.
255
On PT-HSR1310S-OB modules, the channel status LEDs are bicolor, as follows: Table 4-38 PT-HSR1310S-OB Channel Status LEDs Channel Status LED Color Off (no color) Meaning Data is not reclocked, laser diode is still functional (no data is output or the output data bypasses the re-clocking circuit) Data is detected and reclocked, laser diode is functional Laser diode is deactivated, regardless of whether or not data is reclockable
Green Red
Back Panel I/O Module for PT-HSR1310S-OB

The PT-FO-BMO back module corresponds to PT-HSR1310S-OB modules.

All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 323 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of PT-HSR1310S-OB modules. (Also, see Appendix B, Laser Safety Guidelines on page 397, for more information about lasers.) If you need to order additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.

Configuration
Table 4-39 on page 256 lists the user-controllable parameters for PT-HSR1310S-OB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters.
256
Table 4-39 PT-HSR1310S-OB User-Controllable Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Lock detect Laser failure [RO] Mute Reclocker mode Description Indicates a signal is present on the output Indicates an output laser driver has failed Indicates that an output is muted or unmuted When active, the standard is automatically detected from the input data rate Automatically bypasses the reclocker stage when the PLL is not locked For signals routed to wideband crosspoint only - tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence Enables the output laser Forces the slew rate on the output signal Disables 177 Mbps data rate in the AUTO data rate detection circuit (prevents a false lock to 177 Mbps when using DVB/ASI) Sets input EQ setting for onboard switchers Sets the data reclock rate Options

No Yes No Yes Mute Unmute Manual Auto Off On Off On
Autobypass
Bypass
Laser enable Enforced slew rate ASI/177 select
On Off HD SD 177 ASI
Input EQ Data rate
12 dB 5 dB 143 177 270 360 540 1483.5/1485
Board level hysteresis Sync select
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Determines which reference signal the board uses to switch

257
Figure 4-38 PT-HSR1310S-OB Functional Block Diagram
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-40 PT-HSR1310S-OB Specifications Item Connector Return loss Mode Laser Wavelength Specification ST 20 dB Single-mode (9 m) FP 1310 nm 40 nm or 1550 nm 40 nm 10 nm < -7.5 dBm > -9.5 dBm
Maximum spectral line width Maximum output power Minimum output power
258
Table 4-40 PT-HSR1310S-OB Specifications (Continued) Item Rise time and fall time Extinction ratio Jitter Specification <1.5 nS for SD <270 pS for HD > 6.6 (8.2 dB) < 0.2 UI
259
PT-MUX-3G: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 3 Gb/s Capability
PT-MUX: SDI Audio Embedder Submodule with 1.5 HD-SDI and SD-SDI Capability
Operation
Figure 4-39 PT-MX-SB Submodule
Figure 4-40 PT-MX-SB Submodule Installed on a Platinum Output Module

260
When installed on PM-HSR-OBG+, PT-HSR-OBG+, PM-HSR-OB+, PT-HSR-OB+, PT-HSRO-OB+, PT-HSRO-OBG+, PM-SR-OBG+, PT-SR-OBG+, PM-SR-OB+ or PT-SR-OB+, the PT-MX-SB submodule operates as an audio embedder1. It muxes up to 4 groups (16 channels) of audio into each SDI path, and receives up to 128 channels from the Platinum audio TDM crosspoint2.
Each SDI channel supports the following video processing standards:
SD-SDI

525i 59.94 625i 50
1.5 HD-SDI

720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
3.0 HD-SDI3

1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60
Each SDI channel supports the following audio functionality:

Embedded 4 groups (16 mono channels) Embedded audio at 48 kHz sample rate Audio Proc (gain, invert, mute) Audio Swap with quiet switching Audio Sum Option available to remove/clean embedded audio
Each submodule operates in either 3 Gb/s, HD, or SD mode, although not more than 1 format simultaneously on the same module
1 All 2
audio to be embedded must be locked to the reference that is applied to the Mux. All 128 channels of audio from the audio TDM crosspoint already must be locked to this reference. 3 3G HD-SDI is available as a licensed option.
261
All SDI inputs are genlocked to the same video reference Provides a simple test pattern generator (full field color bars)
Operation Notes
A Genlock reference must be applied to the PT-MX-SB. All SDI channels applied to the PT-MX-SB must be locked to the applied Genlock Reference. All SDI channels applied to the PT-MX-SB must be of the same data rate (SD, 1.5G HD, or 3G HD) and must have the same frame rate. The module will determine its data rate by the Input Rate parameter. The user can specify it to be SD, 1.5HD or 3G HD. If set to Auto, the data rate is determined by the first detected SDI signal. (For example, if signals are applied to SDI 1-8, the data rate is determined by SDI1. If SDI1 is removed, then SDI2 determines the data rate.) The PT-MX-SB will automatically bypass a specific SDI channel under the following conditions:

No signal is detected and LOV mode is set to Pass Input The signal is not locked to the reference and Unlocked SDI Bypass is enabled The signal data rate does not match the modules data rate

1 2 3 4 5 Insert Tone (if enabled) Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust Sum Swap/Copy Mute (if enabled) Note: All video channels need to be either SD, 1.5 G HD-SDI, or 3.0 G HD-SDI. All video channels must operate at the same frame rate (for example, 29.97Hz or 25Hz, and so forth), and must be genlocked.
Installation
This option is not user-upgradeable. For further assistance regarding PT-MX-SB hardware/ firmware requirements installation, please contact our Customer Service Department.
Configuration
262
Table 4-41 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-MX-SB modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Note: Because the PT-MX-SB parameter list has multiple levels, Table 4-41 includes a Tree View Location column. This column indicates the parameters location on the Navigator parameter tree list. Table 4-41 PT-MX-SB User-Controllable Parameters List RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection
Parameter Name
GenLock Video Present GenLock Video Locked GenLock Standard
Tree View Location

Genlock Genlock Genlock
No. of Instance Instances Type

1 1 1
Description
Indicates if a GenLock reference signal is detected Indicates if the module is locked to the GenLock reference Indicates the video standard of the GenLock reference
Options
Yes No Yes No Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
Audio Format (1-8) Audio Presence (1-8) Input Rate
Input > Audio > Audio Format Input > Audio > Audio Presence Input > Video
16 16 1
Audio Channels 1-16 Audio Channels 1-16
Indicates if the audio channel is PCM or non-PCM audio Indicates if audio is being received from the audio TDM crosspoint Specifies at which data rate the module should operate: if set to Auto, the data rate is determined by the first detected input For proper operation, all SDI channels must operate at the same data rate (SD, 1.5G HD, or 3G HD) and must be locked to the applied Genlock reference
PCM Non-PCM Yes No Auto SD 1.5 HD 3.0 HD
263
Table 4-41 PT-MX-SB User-Controllable Parameters List (Continued) RO] = Read-only parameter; Bold = Default selection
Parameter Name
SDI Video Std. Feedback (1-8)
Tree View Location

Input > Video > SDI Video Std. Feedback

1
Description
Indicates the detected video standard
Options
Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24
SDI Video Present (1-8) EDH Present (1-8) Y CRC Error Counter (1-8) C CRC Error Counter (1-8) EDH Error Counter (1-8) CRC/EDH Error Clear (1-8) Loss of Video (1-8)
Input > Video > SDI Video Present Input > Video > EDH Present Input > Video > Y CRC Error Counter Input > Video > C CRC Error Counter Input > Video > EDH Error Counter Input > Video > CRC/ EDH Error Clear Processing > Video -Loss of Video Processing > Video > TSG
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Indicates if the SDI signal is present Indicates if EDH is present (applies to 525i 59.94 and 625i only) Displays the number of luminance (Y) CRC errors that have been detected Displays the number of chrominance (C) CRC errors that have been detected Displays the number of EDH errors that have been detected Clears the Y and C CRC Error and EDH Error counters Specifies whether to continue to pass the input or switch to black on the loss of video Enables and disables TSG Override mode This mode of operation is used when the PT-MUX is meant to operate as a standalone TSG; that is, no SDI signals are applied When enabled, the data rate and frame rate is determined by the TSG Standard 1 For example, if TSG Standard 1 is 720p60, the data rate is 1.5G HD and the frame rate is 60Hz This data rate and frame rate apply for all 8 SDI channels; however, for 1.5G data rates it is possible to mix 1080i and 720p standards (for example, some can be 720p60 and others 1080i60) You cannot mix SD, 1.5G HD and 3.0G HD data rates You cannot mix 50Hz, 59.94Hz and 60Hz modes; all standards need to be either 1/1 or 1/1.001 This mode should be used with caution; it is intended for use when the system is being tested or commissioned
Yes No Yes No
0-255 0-255 0-32767
Yes No Pass Black Yes No
TSG Override
264
Parameter Name
TSG Enable (1-8) TSG Standard (1-8)
Tree View Location

Processing > Video > TSG Enable Processing > Video > TSG Standard

1 1
Description
Enables and disables the TSG Selects the video standard for the TSG (default is to follow the detected standard)
Options
Yes No Follow RX 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59.94 1080p 60 1035i 59.94 1035i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24 Bar 75 Bar 100 Eq. Test PLL Test
TSG Pattern (1-8)
Processing > Video > TSG Pattern
Selects the test pattern for the TSG
ADS Clean (1-8)
Processing > Embedding > ADS Clean Processing > Embedding > Group Append Error
Enables and disables the cleaning of the Ancillary Data Space before embedding audio Audio Groups 1- 4 Indicates if there is an error with appending the embedded audio An error will occur if the audio embedder cannot insert the specified audio group in the SDI stream Indicates if there is an error with overwriting the embedded audio An error will occur the audio embedder is not able to overwrite the specified audio group in the SDI stream Specifies the audio embedding mode for each audio group If set to auto, it will overwrite if the audio group is already present, or append if the audio group is not present Adjusts the audio level (gain) for each audio channel Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair Able to swap left and right channels, copy left channel to the right channel, and copy the right channel to the left Specifies the audio word length for all audio channels within the SDI stream
Yes No Yes No
Group Append Error (1-8)
Group OverWrite Error (1-8)
Processing > Embedding > Group OverWrite Error
Audio Groups 1- 4
Yes No
Group Embedding Mode (1-8)
Processing > Embedding > Group Embedding Mode
Audio Groups 1- 4
Off Auto Append Overwrite
Audio Level Adjust (1-8) Swap/Copy (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Level Adjust Processing > Audio > Swap_Copy
16 8
Audio Channels 1-16 Audio Pairs 1-8
-18 dB to +18 dB in 0.1 dB steps (0 dB)
No Swap Swap Left to Right Right to Left
Word Length (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Word Length
16 bits 20 bits 24 bits Yes No
Polarity Reversal (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Polarity Reversal
16
Audio Channels 1-16
Specifies whether the audio channel should be inverted
265
Parameter Name
Audio Mute (1-8) Fade Rate (1-8) Summing (1-8)
Tree View Location

Processing > Audio > Mute Processing > Audio > Fade Rate Processing > Audio > Summing

16 1 8 Audio Pairs 1-8 Audio Channels 1-16
Description
Specifies whether the audio channel should be muted Specifies the fade rate Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair Left to Right - the summed audio is placed in the right channel Right to Left - the summed audio is placed in the left channel Both - the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels Enables tones for the audio channels There are two tone frequencies to choose from Note that the tones are at 0 dBFS by default When enabled, if a video input is not locked to the applied Genlock reference, this video path will be automatically bypassed Status indication of the bypass state for each SDI channel
Options
On Off
0 - 10 s, in 1 s steps (1 s)
None Left To Right Right To Left Both
Tones (1-8)
Processing > Audio > Tones
16
Audio Channels 1-16
Pass Input 500 Hz 1 kHz Yes No Yes, No Input Yes, Not Locked Yes, Rate Mismatch No
Slow Medium Fast String String String String String
Unlocked SDI Bypass
Output
Sub Module Bypass (1-8)
Output > Sub Module Bypass
Parameter Update Rate Module ID License Key Licensed Options Temperature H/W Version
General
Defines the rate at which parameters are updated Indicates the module serial number Enter license key to enabled licensed options Indicates which licensed options are available Indicates the temperature of the FPGA Indicates the hardware version
General General General General General
1 1 1 1 1
Video Mux
SDI IN From Crosspoint
De-serializer
Embedder
Serializer
SDI OUT
TSG
Audio TDM Crosspoint
Audio Invert & Scale
Audio Sum
Audio Swap/ Copy
Figure 4-41 PT-MX-SB Functional Block Diagram
266
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 4-42 PT-MX-SB Specifications Item Number of outputs Quantization Standard 3.0 HD-SDI 1.5 HD-SDI SMPTE 424M, 1080p 50, 1080p 59.94, 1080p 60 SMPTE 292M, 720p 25, 720p 29.97, 720p 30, 720p 50, 720p 59.94, 720p 60, 1080p 23.98, 1080p 24, 1080p 29.97, 1080p 30, 1080p 25, 1080i 50, 1080i 59.94, 1080i 60, 1035i 59.94, 1035i 60, 1080sF 23.98, 1080sF 24 SMPTE 259M-C, 525i 59.94, 625i 50 Specification 8 10 bits
SD-SDI Timing jitter 3.0 HD-SDI 1.5 HD-SDI SD-SDI Alignment jitter 3.0 HD-SDI 1.5 HD-SDI SD-SDI Power consumption Max. operating temperature 30 W 104F (40C) < 0.2 UI p-p, from 1 kHz and up < 0.2 UI p-p, from 100 kHz and up < 0.2 UI p-p, from 100 kHz and up < 2 UI p-p, from 10 Hz and up < 1 UI p-p, from 10 Hz and up < 0.2 UI p-p, from 10 Hz and up
267
PT-MADI4C-OBG - Platinum Multichannel Audio Digital Interface (MADI) Output Module

MADI (Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface) is an industry-standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio. MADI supports multi-channel audio transmission through copper (coaxial) cable. MADI is widely used in the audio industry, especially in the professional sector. Its advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a greater number of channels per line. Platinum now offers MADI support enabling seamless integration of Audio Consoles and other third party Audio equipment with MADI I/O into the Harris Audio/Video routing framework. MADI support is offered through the following standard full length Platinum boards:
A four channel MADI input board and electrical back module. See MADI Input Module (PT-MADI4C-IBG) on page 164. A four channel MADI output board and electrical back module See MADI Output Module (PT-MADI4C-OBG) on page 268.
MADI Input
AES Audio
Embedded Audio
Analog Audio
PT-AECT Input
PT-FSDMX Input
PT-ADCT Input
Up to 128 mono channels mapped to TDM (unused channels muted)
TDM Crosspoint
128 mono channels
PT-MADI4C-OBG Output Module
PT-AECT Output
PT-MUX Output
PT-DACT Output
MADI Output
AES Output
SDI Output
Analog Output
Platinum Frame
Figure 4-42 MADI Input and Output Modules (and other audio routing options) in a Platinum Frame
268
MADI Output Module (PT-MADI4C-OBG)

The PT-MADI4C-OBG output module is an AES10-2008 (MADI) compliant audio output board that supports two MADI formats: 56 and 64 channels. Audio data is encapsulated into the MADI transport stream at a sample rate of 48kHz and typically locked to the same Reference as the TDM Receiver. The PT-MADI4C-OBG output module features four outputs, each capable of conveying up to 64 mono audio channels (or 32 AES stereo pairs) of PCM Audio or non-PCM data, such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D. The PT-MADI4C-OBG output module has a built-in electrical back module that provides 4 BNC connectors (there are a total of 8 connectors but the last 4 are unused and covered).
Figure 4-43 PT-MADI4C-OBG Output Module
Controlling the MADI Output Module through Navigator

You can access and control PT-MADI4C-OBG parameters through Navigator. Follow these steps to discover your module:
Discovery
1 2 3 Start Navigator. Ensure you are in Build Mode (File > Operational Mode > Build). Click Tools > Discovery and then click the Options button. Click the Add button and provide the IP address to the (Platinum) frame that contains your PT-MADI4C-OBG module. Ensure you place a check beside the appropriate checkbox in the Select Products for Discovery section. Click OK and then OK again. Click the Start button to start the Discovery.
269
Once Discovery is complete, click the Save button.
Using Navigator Control Mode

1 Switch to Control Mode (File > Operational Mode > Control). Note: If you do not want to use Navigator Control mode (available in the 30 day trial version and the paid version of Navigator), you can also control your MADI module through the Build mode (see Using Navigator Build Mode). 2 3 In the Navigation pane, expand the contents of the Discovery Folder and drill down to your PT-MADI4C-OBG module under Output Cards in the Platinum frame. Double click the PT-MADI4C-OBG Module to open up the Parameters. For more details on the parameters, see PT-MADI4C-OBG Parameters on page 273.
Using Navigator Build Mode

Once you discover your PT-MADI4C-OBG module and save the results of your discovery (see Steps 1-5 in Controlling the MADI Output Module through Navigator), follow these steps: 1 in the Navigation pane expand the Routing Group<Your Platinum Frame IP> icon, then expand the Routers folder below that, and double click the Platinum Frame icon.
2 3
This opens up the Edit Platinum Frame dialog. Go to the Detected Matrices tab. A list of Input and Output modules are displayed on the right of the dialog.Right click the MADI option under the Output column and select the View Output Module option.
The Module Parameters dialog displays a list of all output parameters.
270
Figure 4-44 Module Parameters for PT-MADI4C-OBG Read only parameters show their status in Gray, for example, the TDM Reference Present parameter. All other parameters can be set by double clicking and selecting options from the popup that is displayed. For example, if you double click the MADI Reference Source parameter, a popup dialog enables you to select Same as TDM Ref, Sync1, Sync2, or Sync3.
Figure 4-45 MADI Reference Source Parameter
Reference Locking
Reference locking is controlled by the following parameters:
271
TDM Reference Source in the TDM Locking category (options are Sync1, Sync2, or Sync3) MADI Reference source in the MADI Locking category (options are Sync1, Sync2, Sync3, or Same as TDM Ref.)
By default, audio encapsulated into the MADI transport stream is locked to the same reference as the TDM receiver. Using the TDM reference for MADI (default option) If you select the same reference for MADI as for TDM (Same as TDM Ref option), non-PCM data such as Dolby-E or Dolby-D can also be encapsulated into the MADI transport stream. Using a separate (non-TDM) reference for MADI If the reference signal for MADI is different than the one used for TDM locking, channels conveying non-PCM data (such as Dolby-E/D) are destroyed. Non-PCM data becomes unusable because of a sample-rate conversion process that transfers received TDM data into a new clock domain (MADI). As a workaround - for example, when you need to lock the TDM data to a video reference - lock the MADI audio data to an unrelated 48kHz DARS reference.
TDM Input
The TDM Input section reports on audio presence and format for each of the 128 mono audio channels that can be received by the TDM receiver. Possible Audio formats are PCM, non-PCM, Dolby-E, and Dolby-D.
TDM Output Mapping

You can map portions of the TDM stream to one or more of the four MADI outputs. The MADI Output Format section provides mapping options for each of the 4 MADI Outputs. You can map predefined channel ranges in chunks of 56 or 64 channels. The following options are available:

TDM 1-56 (56 channels) TDM 33-88 (56 channels) TDM 65-120 (56 channels) TDM 1-64 (64 channels) TDM 33-96 (64 channels) TDM 65-128 (64 channels)
272
Table 4-43 Supported TDM Reference/MADI Reference combinations TDM Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates Any of the supported Video Ref. Standards Any of the supported Video Ref. Standards MADI Same as TDM Ref. (= DARS Ref.) Any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates (can be unrelated and asynchronous to TDM DARS Ref.) Any of the supported Video Ref. Standards Same as TDM Ref. (= Video Ref.) any of the supported DARS Ref. Rates
Note: The use of two different Video Ref. Standards (for example, TDM:525 and MADI:625) is not supported. Supported DARS Ref. Rates are 192kHz, 96kHz, 48kHz, 32kHz. Supported Video Ref. Standards are 525, 625, HD tri-level sync (various formats).
Specifications
Table 4-44 Electrical Input Specifications Item Number of Outputs Connector Impedance Output Level Link rate Return Loss Specification 4 BNC (IEC169-8) 75 Ohm 600mV 125Mbit/s (4B5B encoded, NRZI) NA
Power Consumption
Around 22W (includes front module and back module).
273
PT-MADI4C-OBG Parameters
You can access MADI parameters through Navigator. Start Navigator and ensure you are in Build mode. Enter the IP Address of the Platinum frame that contains your PT-MADI module. Start the Discovery and save the Discovery results. You can control the parameters either through Build Mode (Using Navigator Build Mode on page 269) or Control mode (See Using Navigator Control Mode on page 269). Table 4-45 PT-MADI4C-OBG Output parameters Path General Serial Number (RO) Submodule Temperature (RO) TDM Error Enable TDM Error Count (RO) Displays the module's unique identifier. Indicates the temperature of the FPGA For in-field diagnostics only For in-field diagnostics only <String> <String> in Degrees Celsius No Yes TDM Error count <String> <String> Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 No Yes No Yes Parameter Name Description Options
Submodule Firmware Version (RO) Indicates MC software version Submodule FPGA Version (RO) TDM Locking TDM Reference Source Indicates FPGA firmware version Selects which physical sync port the module uses for the TDM reference Reports the presence of the reference signal Reports the locked status of the reference signal
TDM Reference Present (RO) TDM Reference Locked (RO)
274
Table 4-45 PT-MADI4C-OBG Output parameters Path Parameter Name TDM Reference Standard (RO) Description Indicates the reference standard detected on the genlock input. Reference standards marked with an asterisk can be detected, but they cannot be used in connection with the PT-MADIxx-OBG, since the output sample rate is always 48kHz. Options Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24 DARS 192kHz DARS 96kHz DARS 88.2kHz* DARS 48kHz DARS 44.1kHz* DARS 32kHz* Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 Same as TDM Ref. No Yes No Yes
MADI Locking
MADI Reference Source
Selects which physical sync port the module uses for the TDM reference
MADI Reference Present (RO) MADI Reference Locked (RO)
Reports the presence of the reference signal Reports the locked status of the reference signal
275
Table 4-45 PT-MADI4C-OBG Output parameters Path Parameter Name MADI Reference Standard (RO) Description Indicates the reference standard detected on the genlock input. Reference standards marked with an asterisk can be detected, but they cannot be used in connection with the PT-MADIxx-OBG, since the output sample rate is always 48kHz. Options Unknown 525i 59.94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29.97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59.94 720p 60 1080p 23.98 1080p 24 1080p 29.97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59.94 1080i 60 1080sF 23.98 1080sF 24 DARS 192kHz DARS 96kHz DARS 88.2kHz* DARS 48kHz DARS 44.1kHz* DARS 32kHz* PCM Non-PCM Dolby-E Dolby-D No Yes
TDM Input
TDM Audio Format (x128) (RO)
Indicates the format of each of the 128 Audio mono channels received by the TDM Receiver Indicates the presence of each of the 128 Audio mono channels received by the TDM Receiver Selects which portion of the TDM stream gets encapsulated into the MADI transport stream.
TDM Audio Present (x128) (RO)
MADI Output
MADI Output Format (x4)
TDM 1 - 56 (56 Channels) TDM 33- 88 (56 Channels) TDM 65- 120 (56 Channels) TDM 1 - 64 (64 Channels) TDM 33- 96 (64 Channels) TDM 65 - 128 (64 Channels)
276
277
Crosspoint Modules
This chapter contains both a general description and additional detailed descriptions of the crosspoint modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum crosspoint module operates. Each crosspoint module is further described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation, configuration, and functional block diagram. This chapter covers the following modules:

Crosspoint Module General Description on page 278 PM-4032-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules on page 282 PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules on page 284 PM-7264-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules on page 286 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128256-3G28: 128x256 Crosspoint Module on page 290 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules on page 292
278
Chapter 5 Crosspoint Modules
Crosspoint Module General Description

The crosspoint module plugs into the module interconnect backplane via a high-density, high-speed connector. Switching is performed in a three-stage make before break process that eliminates unnecessary signals on the MI, while continually providing the output module reclocker IC a valid source so that the reclocker remains locked: 1 2 3 The crosspoint module is switched so that the previous and next sources are both active on the output module reclocker input. The output module reclocker is switched to the next source. The crosspoint module switches off the previous source. All settings for the crosspoint circuitry are reset on module insertion within one frame (per sync present) of when the resource module detects card presence. There are three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module:
The green LED labelled POWER is the power supply indicator. It shows that +24V is present on the module. The LED labelled ACT CTRL is the control system acknowledgment. The LED shows a steady red when the module is being initialized, and then turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the module. It flashes green if there is an alarm condition on this module. The LED labelled ACT XPT is the active crosspoint indicator. It indicates which crosspoint card is active in redundant configurations.
Along with these LEDs, there are power and ground test points accessible on the front portion of the board for troubleshooting and verification. Temperature sensing circuits are present on the crosspoint module, so that the internal frame temperature can be monitored.
279
Controllable Parameters Lists

The Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings. These parameters are enabled and/or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only. Crosspoint module parameters lists are provided on the following pages: Table 5-1 Crosspoint Modules User-Controllable Parameters Lists Module Name PM-4032-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules PM-7264-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules PM-7264-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/ PT-128256-3G28: 128x256 Crosspoint Module PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules Parameter List Location page 283 Page 285 page 287 Page 289 Page 291 Page 295
280
Signal Flow Diagram
Destination outputs
Crosspoint
Source inputs Auxiliary outputs CPB
Aux inputs
Destination outputs
Crosspoint
Auxiliary outputs Crosspoint parallel bus
MI connector
MI connector ENET XPT Micro PIPE
XPT FPGA
PRTIX
Figure 5-1 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Crosspoint Module
281
64TDM signals
TDM buffers
64TDM signals
64TDM signals
64TDM signals
TDM buffers TDM XPT module connector
TDM inputs
FPGA/ microprocessor(s) TDM XPT
TDM outputs
Sync 4
Sync
Sync(3) Sync separator
Note: The TDM inputs and TDM outputs may be bidirectional. The terms inputs and outputs refer to the general case.
TDM XPT module connector
ENET
CIS(2)
PRTI Select
Sync 3
4:1 mux
Sync 2
Sync 1
Figure 5-2 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum TDM Crosspoint Module
282
PM-4032-3G5: 40x32 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules

Operation
PM-4032-3G5 modules operate in 5RU frames only.
Figure 5-3 PM-4032-3G5 Module The PM-4032-3G5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PM-4032-3G5 crosspoint matrix contains a 4032 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. Figure 5-1 on page 280 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint module.
Installation
All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Crosspoint Modules on page 321 for the procedure for field expansion of these crosspoint modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
283
Table 5-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-4032-3G5 modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 5-2 PM-4032-3G5 User-Controllable Parameters List (* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value) Parameter Temperature Reading [RO] Description Monitors internal frame temperature Options -55C 125C in 0.5C increments

See Figure 5-1 on page 280.
Specifications
There are no separate specifications associated with this module.
284
PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9: 64x64 Crosspoint Modules

Operation
PM-64x64-X9 and PM-6464-3G9 modules operate in 9RU frames only.
Figure 5-4 PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9 Module The PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9 crosspoint matrix contains a 6464 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. Figure 5-1 on page 280 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint module.
Installation
All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 and Installing Crosspoint Modules on page 321 for the procedure for field expansion of crosspoint modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
285
Configuration
Table 5-3 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-64x64-X9 and PM-6464-3G9 modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 5-3 PM-64x64-X9/PM-6464-3G9 User-Controllable Parameters List (* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value) Parameter Temperature Reading [RO] Description Monitors internal frame temperature Options -55C 125C in 0.5C increments

Specifications
286
PM-7264-3G5: 72x64 3G HD-SDI Crosspoint Modules

Operation
PM-7264-3G5 modules operate in 5RU frames only.
Figure 5-5 PM-7264-3G5 Module The PM-7264-3G5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PM-7264-3G5 crosspoint matrix contains a 7264 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. Figure 5-1 on page 280 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint module.
Installation
Configuration
287
Table 5-4 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-7264-3G5 modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 5-4 PM-7264-3G5 User-Controllable Parameters List (* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value) Parameter Temperature Reading [RO] Description Monitors internal frame temperature Options -55C 125C in 0.5C increments

Specifications
288
PM-128x128-X9/PM-128128-3G9: 128x128 Crosspoint Module

Operation
PM-128x128-X9 and PM-128128-3G9 modules operate in 9RU frames only.
Figure 5-6 PM-128x128-X9/PM-128128-3G9 Module The PM-128x128-X9/PM-128128-3G9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PM-128x128-X9/PM-128128-3G9 crosspoint matrix contains a 128128 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. Figure 5-1 on page 280 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint module.
Installation
289
Configuration
Table 5-5 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PM-128x128-X9 and PM-128128-3G9 modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 5-5 PM-128x128-X9/PM-128128-3G9 User-Controllable Parameters List (* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value) Parameter Temperature Reading [RO] Description Monitors internal frame temperature Options -55C 125C in 0.5C increments

Specifications
290
PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/ PT-128256-3G28: 128x256 Crosspoint Module

Operation
PT- series crosspoint modules operate in 5RU, 9RU, 15RU, and 28RU frames.
Figure 5-7 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128256-3G28 Module The PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128256-3G28 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. This crosspoint module can be used in 9RU, 15RU, or 28RU frames. The PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128256-3G28 crosspoint matrix contains a 128256 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. Figure 5-1 on page 280 shows the basic signal flow of the Platinum crosspoint module.
291
Installation
Configuration
Table 5-6 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-128x256-X15, PT-128256-3G15, PT-128x256-X28, and PT-128256-3G28 modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 5-6 PT-128x256-X15/PT-128256-3G15/PT-128x256-X28/PT-128256-3G28 User-Controllable Parameters List (* denotes default value; [RO] denotes read-only value) Parameter Temperature Reading [RO] Description Monitors internal frame temperature Options -55C 125C in 0.5C increments

Specifications
292
PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28: Advanced TDM Crosspoint Modules

Operation
Figure 5-8 PM-ATDM9-X5 Module
Figure 5-9 PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/ PT-ATDM64-X28 Module
293
The advanced TDM crosspoint module switches audio signals from input modules and distributes them to output modules, via a proprietary time-division multiplexed transport scheme. It offers advanced parametric transition type functions such as quiet switching, V-fade, fade-cut, cut-fade, and synchronous switching. (The cut associated with the fade-cut and cut-fade settings are minimum duration fades to eliminate audible switching artifacts.) It also allows for certain audio effects for a given destination. With the exception of PM-ATDM9-X5, all TDM crosspoints require the PT-SYNC module to function correctly. Platinum routers support all types of audio including Dolby E and AC3. Since processing functionality such as quiet switching and gain controls can cause data corruption with non-PCM audio, Platinum routers support a pass-through mode for these non-PCM sources. When incoming audio is embedded within a video source, that audio is passed through the wideband crosspoint without any processing. The embedded audio, and all ancillary data, is presented at the output exactly as it entered the router. When using the Mux/Demux technology within the router, the audio package is analyzed as it is demultiplexed. When the system identifies a non-PCM audio source, all processing functionality is disabled. This allows the non-PCM audio data to pass through the router without being corrupted. The quiet switch capability of the TDM Crosspoint within Platinum routers is active as a default. Since the quiet switch capability can cause corruption for non-PCM audio at the switchpoint, the capability can be turned off for each output of the router. This setting is accomplished through the database editor within Navigator. See page 49 for a description of the sync module operation. The advanced TDM crosspoint module is available in the following sizes:
PM-ATDM9-X5 The PM-ATDM9-X5 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PM-ATDM9-X5crosspoint matrix contains a 98 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in 5RU frames only. On 5RU Platinum frames with TDM, the sync capability is built into the crosspoint module, so a separate sync module is not required. Sync module operation is the same as that of the PT-SYNC module used with other Platinum frames.
PM-ATDM16-X9 The PM-ATDM16-X9 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PM-ATDM16-X9 crosspoint matrix contains a 1616 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in 9RU frames only.
294
PT-ATDM16-X15 The PT-ATDM16-X15 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PT-ATDM16-X15 crosspoint matrix contains a 1616 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability This crosspoint module can be used in 15RU or 9RU frames.
PT-ATDM32-X15 The PT-ATDM32-X15 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PT-ATDM32-X15 crosspoint matrix contains a 3232 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in 15RU or 9RU frames.
PT-ATDM32-X28 The PT-ATDM32-X28 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PT-ATDM32-X28 crosspoint matrix contains a 3232 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in 28RU, 15RU, or 9RU frames.
PT-ATDM64-X28 The PT-ATDM64-X28 crosspoint module switches signals accepted from input modules and distributes these signals to output modules. It also switches auxiliary signals. The PT-ATDM64-X28 crosspoint matrix contains a 6464 I/O signal switch fabric as well as additional auxiliary crosspoint switch capability. This crosspoint module can be used in 28RU, 15RU, or 9RU frames.
Table 5-7 on page 294 shows specific features for advanced TDM crosspoint modules. Table 5-7 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Special Features Feature Audio processing Description Processes on 16-bit, 20-bit or 24-bit audio samples; the number of bits per sample can be detected automatically by the module Allows switching of mono inputs, stereo pairs, and breakaway of stereo inputs
Mono/stereo switching
295
Table 5-7 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Special Features (Continued) Feature Synchronous switching Description Performs switching of AES streams synchronously with a reference signal such that switching occurs at an AES frame boundary Supports audio transitions with variable duration when switching between two audio signals; transitions supported include V Fade Fade Cut Cut Fade Cut (fast transition) Transition type and duration are assigned on a per-output basis Supports quiet switching between two audio signals as a predefined transition type (quiet switching is implemented as a V-fade of two signals with minimum duration)
Transitions
Quiet switching
The Platinum frame includes two slots for TDM crosspoint modules. One slot holds the primary, or active, crosspoint module. The second slot holds an optional secondary, or shadow module, which shadows all operations of the active module so as to allow it to become active in case the active module is removed or halted due to error. The shadow module sets its outputs to a high-impedance state until it becomes active, but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module. The TDM crosspoint modules, in conjunction with the Platinum resource module, determine which slot contains the active module. The modules report their current status (primary or secondary) to the control system. Appropriate watchdog circuitry on the module and/or status monitoring on the resource module will monitor the status of the primary module. It is not necessary to remove the primary module to cause the secondary module to become active.
Installation
All crosspoint modules are installed at our manufacturing facility. See Installing Crosspoint Modules on page 321 for the procedure for field expansion of crosspoint modules. If you need to purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department.
Configuration
This module has no controllable parameters.
296
64TDM signals
TDM buffers
64TDM signals
64TDM signals
64TDM signals
TDM buffers TDM XPT module connector
TDM inputs
FPGA/ microprocessor(s) TDM XPT
TDM outputs
Sync 4
Sync
Sync(3) Sync separator
Note: The TDM inputs and TDM outputs may be bidirectional. The terms inputs and outputs refer to the general case.
Specifications
TDM XPT module connector
ENET
CIS(2)
PRTI Select
Sync 3
4:1 mux
Sync 2
Sync 1
Figure 5-10 PM-ATDM9-X5/PM-ATDM16-X9/PT-ATDM16-X15/PT-ATDM32-X15/ PT-ATDM32-X28/PT-ATDM64-X28 Functional Block Diagram
297
This chapter contains both a general description and additional detailed descriptions of the output monitoring modules available for the Platinum router. A General Description section provides a generic view of how a Platinum output monitoring module operates. Each output monitoring module is further described in terms of its individual operation, controllable parameters, installation, configuration, functional block diagram, and specifications. This chapter covers the following modules:

Output Monitoring Module General Description on page 298 PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module on page 303 PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video Output Monitoring Module on page 307
298
Chapter 6 Output Monitoring Modules
Output Monitoring Module General Description

The output monitoring module allows output monitoring of any output in the Platinum frame. The signal can be either a copy of the signal that is currently being sent to a particular output (virtual output monitoring), or a signal taken directly from the output itself (real output monitoring). The monitoring output signal is distributed to the output BNCs on the module, eliminating the need for external distribution. The output monitoring module automatically passes all data types, and no format selection or configuration is required. An additional input connector is provided on the output monitoring module for remote monitoring capabilities. Figure 6-1 on page 298 through Figure 6-4 on page 301 are block diagrams of the overall output monitoring architecture for the different frame sizes.
Real output feedback OM signal
OM Distribution
Xpt module (1) Inputs 1-72 Xpt module (2) 8 ROF
Baseband signal Remote OM input
X
2 OM Output module Driver Outputs 1-64 2 OM 41 rclk
HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21
1 OM
41 rclk 41 rclk
1 OM
1 OM 1 OM
Figure 6-1 Platinum 5RU Frame Output Monitoring Architecture
299
OM Distribution
Inputs 1-128 Xpt module (1) 16 ROF
X
Xpt module (2) 16 ROF 4 OM Output module Driver Outputs 1-128 4 OM 41 rclk
HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21
1 OM
41 rclk 41 rclk 41 rclk 41 rclk
1 OM
1 OM 1 OM
1 OM 1 OM
1 OM 1 OM
300
OM Distribution
Inputs 1-128 Xpt module (1) 16 ROF
X
Xpt module (2) 4 OM Output module Driver Outputs 1-128 4 OM Inputs 129-256 Xpt module (3) 16 ROF 41 rclk
X
Xpt module (4) 4 OM
X
4 OM Output module Driver HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21 HS OM module
1 OM
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
Outputs 129-256 41 rclk
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
1 OM
21
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
301
OM Distribution
Xpt module (1) Inputs 1-128 Xpt module (2) Inputs 257-384 16 ROF
X
4 OM Output module Driver Outputs 1-128 41 rclk Xpt module (3) 16 ROF
4 spare outputs
Inputs 129-256 Xpt module (4) Inputs 385-512
X
4 OM
4 spare outputs Output module Driver
HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21 HS OM module 21
1 OM
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
Outputs 129-256 41 rclk
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
1 OM 1 OM 1 OM 1 OM
Output module Driver Outputs 257-384 41 rclk
Xpt module (5) Inputs 1-128 Xpt module (6) Inputs 257-384 16 ROF 4 spare outputs
4 OM Xpt module (7) Output module
Inputs 129-256 Xpt module (8) Inputs 385-512 16 ROF
4 spare outputs
Driver Outputs 385-512 41 rclk
4 OM
302
Controllable Parameters List

The Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings. These parameters are enabled and/or changed via RouterMappers Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list box1, or through CCS Navigator. Follow the appropriate steps, as described in the applicable reference manual, to change the parameter instance to the desired setting. Parameters marked with the [RO] designator are read-only. Output monitoring module parameters lists are provided on the following pages:
Table 6-1. Output Monitoring Module Parameters Lists

Module Name PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video Output Monitoring Module Parameter List Location Page 304 Page 309
Signal Flow Diagram
Figure 6-5 Basic Signal Flow for the Platinum Output Monitoring Module
303
PT-HSR-OM: HD/SD Output Monitoring Module

Operation
Figure 6-6 PT-HSR-OM Module The PT-HSR-OM HD/SD output monitoring module is designed to provide HD and SD serial video outputs for monitoring purposes, as well as other types of signals handled by Platinum (such as AES audio). This rear-loading module fits into any one of four output monitoring module slots (two slots in 5RU frames). Output monitoring is classified into two categories: real output monitoring and virtual output monitoring.
Real Output Monitoring

Real output monitoring provides the output signal from the final stage of the output. For example, the secondary output from each output amplifier in a PT-HSR-OB module is used for monitoring. The eight monitoring output signals in a PT-HSR-OB module are applied to an 81 switch. The selected monitoring output is then fed to a crosspoint module. Each crosspoint module receives up to 16 output monitoring signals from PT-HSR-OB modules, and switches the selected signal to be monitored to the output monitoring module(s). If you are monitoring an output of a power-saving output module and there is no termination on that output, the output will not be displayed on the output of the PT-HSR-OM. You must either terminate the output on the output module or turn off its Green Mode parameter.
304
Virtual Output Monitoring

The output monitoring signal can also be a copy of the input signal being sent to a particular output. Since this type of monitoring signal comes directly from the crosspoint rather than from the output module itself, it is referred to as a virtual output monitoring signal.
Corresponding Output Module

The PT-HSR-OM monitors the output from the PM-HSR-OB/PT-HS-OB, PM-SR-OB/PT-SR-OB, PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB/ PT-AEC-OB, PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB, or PM-ENC-OB/ PT-ENC-OB output modules. The PT-HSR-OM does not monitor output from TDM modules.
Installation
Configuration
Table 6-2 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-HSR-OM modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 6-2 PT-HSR-OM Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Internal/External Signal Select External Input Signal Presence [RO] EQ_Bypass Reclocker_Bypass Autobypass Description Signal source Reports presence or absence of valid signal Bypasses the EQ stage Bypasses the reclocker stage Reclock automatic bypass; automatically bypasses the reclocker stage when the PLL is not locked Options

External Internal Signal absent Signal present EQ bypass Equalized Off On Reclocker bypass Reclocked
305
Table 6-2 PT-HSR-OM Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameter Reclocker_Mode Data Rate Description Reclock mode Reclock data rate (active only when RCLK_Mode is set to Manual) Options

Manual Auto 143 177 270 360 540 1483.5/1485 Off On Off On Not locked Locked SD HD 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps
Mute ASI/177 Lock Detect [RO] Signal Type Board Level Hysteresis
Mutes the Reclocker outputs Disables 177Mbps data rate in the AUTO data rate detection circuit Lock detect (high when the PLL is locked) Output slew rate control Sets hysteresis for all parameters that require it

Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 6-3 PT-HSR-OM Specifications Item Number of external inputs Number of outputs Connector Impedance Signal type Specification 1 3 (duplicated and polarity correct signals) 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI Most other <1 Vpp digital signals, 3 Mb/s to 1.5 Gb/s 800 mVp-p 10%
Nominal internal input amplitude
306
Table 6-3 PT-HSR-OM Specifications (Continued) Item External input equalization Specification Automatic 984 ft (300 m) Belden 1694A for 270Mb/s data rate 492 ft (150 m) Belden 1694A for 1.485Gb/s data rate Automatic for SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI except 177 Mb/s Bypass for all nonstandard rates > 18 dB, up to 1.5 GHz < 0.2UI @ frequency tested 800mVp-p 10% 0V 0.5V 400 ps 1500 ps for SMPTE 259M data rates < 270 ps for SMPTE 292M data rates < 10% of amplitude
Reclocking
Return loss Jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times
Overshoot
307
PT-HSRAEC-OM: 3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI Serial Video Output Monitoring Module

Operation
Side View
Front View
Figure 6-7 PT-HSRAEC-OM Module The PT-HSRAEC-OM HD/SD output monitoring module is designed to provide 3 Gb/s, HD-SDI, and SD-SDI serial video outputs to monitor an output video stream or preview an input video stream as selected by the control system, as well as other types of signals handled by Platinum (such as AES audio). This rear-loading module fits into any one of four output monitoring module slots (two slots in 5RU frames). The PT-HSRAEC-OM provides one SMPTE-SDI video input for cascade monitoring. (Its main use is to monitor channels from another router, but it is equipped with cable EQ so it can accept SMPTE-SDI compliant inputs from other devices as well for fan-out or monitoring.) The PT-HSRAEC-OM has BNC ports for external interconnect, video in, and video out. Using the VIDEO IN BNC connector, the PT-HSRAEC-OM selects between the internal and external video sources. Internal video sources include the following:

Video selected from input 1-128, or output 1-128 Video selected from input 129-256, or output 129-256
308
Video selected from input 257-384, or output 257-384 Video selected from input 385-512, or output 385-512
The four video streams connect to this module through a board edge connector at the MI module. External video sources include video from another frame. The external input is coupled to this module through a rear BNC connector. It allows for monitoring of other SDI signals. Using the VIDEO OUT BNC connector, the selected signal is sent to the re-clocking section. The reclocking circuit retimes the data stream and removes jitter from the stream. Some signal stream parameters (such as data bit rate, re-lockability, 3G/HD/SD, bypassing, etc) are checked and reported. The signal from the reclocking stage is coupled to the output driver. The output is in-polarity with the input data. Various LEDs report status on the PT-HSRAEC-OM as follows Table 6-4 PT-HSRAEC-OM LEDs and Descriptions LED CTRL EXT IN LOCK PWR Color Green/Red Green Green Green Meaning Control system acknowledgment External video input presence Reclocked Power supply input
The PT-HSRAEC-OM uses these two classification categories: real output monitoring and virtual output monitoring.
Real Output Monitoring

With real output monitoring, the output is routed after the final active stage of the video channel. This type of monitoring provides the highest level of confidence possible that the signal seen at the monitoring point is the same signal that will be seen on-air. If you are monitoring an output of a power-saving output module and there is no termination on that output, the output will not be displayed on the output of the PT-HSRAEC-OM. You must either terminate the output on the output module or turn off its Green Mode parameter.
Virtual Output Monitoring

Not all types of output modules are able to provide a digital output signal for monitoring use at its final stage. For example, some types of output modules have analog outputs which can not be handled directly by the main crosspoint. In this situation, the Platinum control system checks which input signal has been switched to the output destination needed for monitoring. Then, this input is sent to the PT-HSRAEC-OM module for monitoring purposes. Physically, this input signal is routed out two paths of the main crosspoint.
309
Corresponding Output Module

The PT-HSRAEC-OM monitors the output from the PM-HSR-OB/PT-HS-OB, PM-SR-OB/ PT-SR-OB, PM-AEB-OB/PT-AEB-OB, PM-AEC-OB/ PT-AEC-OB, PM-DAC-OB/PT-DAC-OB, or PM-ENC-OB/PT-ENC-OB output modules. The PT-HSRAEC-OM does not monitor output from TDM modules.
Installation
Configuration
Table 6-2 lists the user-controllable parameters for the PT-HSRAEC-OM modules. These parameters are accessible via either RouterMapper or CCS Navigator. In RouterMapper, parameters are found in the Configure Module Parameters and/or Module Parameters list boxes. In Navigator, when in control mode, double-click on the device name to open a window that displays that devices parameter list. See the appropriate reference manual for information on how to set these parameters. Table 6-5 PT-HSRAEC-OM Parameters List [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameters Sync Select Description Selects which physical sync port the module uses as a reference Options

Sync 1 Sync 2 Sync 3 Sync 4 Off On Auto
Index Light Mode
BNC light source (LED) control In Auto mode, the LED of the Video Input BNC turns on if no cable is applied, so that you can find the BNC easily; it turns off to save power if signal applied In Auto mode, the LED of the Video Output BNC turns on if output is enabled; it turns off if output is muted
Board Level Hysteresis Mute
Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it Mutes specified output channel

Mute on Mute off
310
Table 6-5 PT-HSRAEC-OM Parameters List (Continued) [RO] = Read-only parameter Parameters Video Output Rate Description Video cable driver slew rate select When Reclocker Bypass is set to No and input is locked, the video output rate is automatically determined by software based on input rate. When input is not locked, or Reclocker Bypass is set to Yes, this parameter can be used to set the preferred output slew rate Enables or disables power-saving feature Reports presence or absence of valid signal Enables or disables bypass cable equalization Reports if data is relocked by reclocking stage Sets the reclock mode to automatic or to one of three manual fixed rates Detects data rate Options

SD (700ps) HD (100ps)
Green Mode External Video Presence [RO] EQ Bypass Lock Detect [RO] Reclocker Mode
Disabled Enabled Signal absent Signal present Disabled Enabled Not locked Locked 1.48 Gb/s 2.97 Gb/s 270 Mb/s Auto 1.48 Gb/s 2.97 Gb/s 270 Mb/s Auto Auto bypass Enforced bypass
Locked Data Rate [RO]
Reclocker Bypass
Enforces reclocking bypass function
311

Ext. video monitoring Cable EQ Video input 2:1 reclocker Cable driver Video output
Int. video monitoring Mon In1
Mon In2 System MI Mon In3 4:1 EQ
Mon In4 Controls and statuses FPGA +3.3V +2.5V +1.2V
+24VA +24VB +5VL
Power conversion and voltage monitoring SLID
Power good DA core
PIPE PRTI
Figure 6-8 PT-HSRAEC-OM Functional Block Diagram
312
Specifications
Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. Table 6-6 PT-HSRAEC-OM Specifications Item Number of external inputs Number of outputs Coaxial connector Impedance Signal type Specification 1 1 75 BNC per IEC 169-8 75 SMPTE 424M, SMPTE 292M, SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, DVB-ASI 3Mb/s to 3Gb/s 800 m Vp-p 10% 800 mV 10%
*

Nominal internal input amplitude External input amplitude Max. external input cable length (1694A)
Up to 984 ft (300 m) for SD-SDI (270Mb/ s) Up to 492 ft (150 m) for HD-SDI Up to 230 ft (70 m) for 3 Gb/s
Reclocking
Automatic for data rates defined by SMPTE 424/259/292/344, DVB-ASI Bypass for all nonstandard rates

Return loss Output jitter Output amplitude DC offset Rise/fall times
15 dB, up to 1.5 GHz 10 dB from 1.5 GHz to 3 GHz <0.2UI 270 Mbps and 1.5 Gbps <0.3UI 3 Gbps
800 mVp-p 10% 0V 0.5 V

400 ps 1500 ps for SD-SDI < 270 ps for HD-SDI <135 ps for 3 Gb/s
Overshoot
*
< 10% of amplitude
Measured with Belden 1694A or equivalent
313
Installation
WARNING: Potentially lethal voltages are present within the Platinum frame during normal operation. Disconnect all power cords from the frame before you remove the top panel. Do not apply power to the frame while the top is open unless the unit is being serviced by properly trained personnel. This chapter provides information specific to the installation of the Platinum router. All modules and power supplies ordered will be installed in the Platinum frame before it is shipped. For field expansion and/or replacement installation information, see the following topics covered in this chapter:

Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components on page 342 Installing Alarm Modules on page 329 Installing a Platinum Frame on page 340 Installing Back Panel Modules on page 330 Replacing Fans on page 337 Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 Installing Resource Modules on page 331 Replacing Resource Module Firmware on page 331 Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 328 Installing Power Supplies on page 335 Installing Sync Modules on page 328 Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 323
CAUTION: We recommend that you test your system before its final installation. Make sure you verify its configuration, cabling, and proper system operation. Observe proper anti-static and grounding procedures while handling loose boards and servicing the equipment.
314
Chapter 7 Installation
Before You Begin

Review these general rules of thumb before you begin performing any installations or field upgrades of your Platinum routing system:

A Platinum router is heavy. Do not attempt to lift a populated frame yourself. The Platinum module and connector layout was designed to make sense from the BACK numbering is from left to right, etc. Use a static strap or heel strap when handling modules. See Preventing Electrostatic Discharge on page 389 for instructions. Do not stack modules directly on top of one another; solder joints and components on the edges of modules can be damaged this way. Use a slotted card carrier to stack a quantity of modules. Modules need to be properly and completely seated for correct operations. Edge connectors on the modules have tight tolerances. Avoid bending or forcing modules when installing them. Take care not to let upper modules drop onto lower modules when inserting or removing them from the frame. Use the module guides to prevent this. The Output Monitoring module slots face alternate directions (up/down/up/down) Verify termination on all video, sync, or X-Y lines. Verify that the frame is well grounded. KEEP THE FRAME GROUND IN PLACE when servicing the frame. Platinums power supply architecture is configurable, allowing from one to four power supplies per zone on the router. Depending on configuration and module population of each zone, two power supplies may be required for normal operation of the zone. Platinums internal power supply may be reconfigured or reallocated to other zones.
315
Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware
If your 3 Gb modules were installed at the manufacturing facility you do not need to perform this step. Before you install your Platinum 3 Gb input, output, and/or crosspoint modules, you must make sure that you have upgraded the firmware. This section provides the information you need to successfully perform the upgrade. The following modules are affected:
Input modules

PM-HS-IB+ PM-S-IB+ PT-HS-IB+ PT-S-IB+ PT-HSO-IB+
Output modules

PM-HSR-OB+ PM-SR-OB+ PT-HSR-OB+ PT-SR-OB+ PT-HSRO-OB+ PT-HSRO-OBG+
Crosspoint modules

PM-4032-3G5 PM-7264-3G5 PM-6464-3G9 PM-128128-3G9 PT-128256-3G15 PT-128256-3G28
This discussion presupposes that you have a working knowledge of Navigator or RouterMapper and have used its other capabilities. If not, please refer to the pertinent software application user manual e to familiarize yourself with its functions before you continue the upgrade procedure. To perform this upgrade, you must use either Navigator version 4.5 or RouterMapper v.6.04.11 or higher. Your software applications Platinum Firmware tab allows you to quickly upgrade to the most current Platinum firmware versions for detected, selected modules; or for all detected, installed modules.
316
To upgrade the firmware for a Platinum module, follow these steps: 1 Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the upgrade procedure will be performed. You can check for the most current firmware upgrades at the Harris Broadcast Communications Division Premier Customer Support website. We recommend that you download the upgrade to <drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\ bin32\Firmware (or if you have NAV installed, to C:\Program Files\ Harris\ RtrWrks\ bin32\ Firmware), as this is the location where RouterMapper first looks for firmware upgrade files. 2 3 4 Perform a Poll on the selected Platinum frame to obtain the latest detected modules and firmware versions. At the main window, double-click the name of the frame that contains the modules you want to upgrade, and then select the Firmware tab. From the selected matrix list, click on the modules you want to upgrade. Multiple modules may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple modules). A quick way to determine the installed firmware version is to hover the mouse over the module icon to the right of the module name.
Figure 7-1 Selected Matrix List 5 Right-click the mouse to bring up the pop-up menu, and then click Assign. The selected module names will appear in the firmware upgrade list. Notice that in the firmware upgrade list, the slot location and name of the module appear, as well as the installed firmware version of that module and the version number for any known upgrades. 6 Highlight the board you want to upgrade (if you have banks of the same boards you may highlight all of them at the same time), right-click, and then select the menu option Change Firmware.
317
Figure 7-2 Change Firmware Menu Option 7 A browser window will open. Default locations are as follows:

(NAV not installed) C:\Program Files\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware (NAV installed) C:\Program Files\Harris\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware
Figure 7-3 Browser Window 8 In the firmware list, click on the module you want to upgrade, and then click Upgrade. Alternatively, click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once. If you do not want to upgrade certain modules, click on the module you do not want to upgrade, and then select either Delete or Delete All.
318
The Firmware Upgrade message window will appear. The steps in the upgrade process will be listed as they occur. If you need to stop the upgrade procedure at any time, click Cancel. The window will display a message that says Aborting firmware upgrade...Please wait. The upgrade will continue until the firmware upgrade process is in a safe place to stop.
10
When all of your boards successfully upgrade (the upgrade process tries to perform the upgrade up to three times each before declaring an upgrade a total failure) you will see a Firmware Upgrade Successful message in the upgrade dialog box.
Figure 7-4 Successful Firmware Upgrade Message 11 12 When the process is complete, click OK or click the Close (X) box in the upper right corner of the Firmware Upgrade message window. Click OK to return to the main window.
319
Installing Input and Output Modules

For installation procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB and PT-HSR1310S-OB fiber optical modules, see page 323. To install or replace input and output modules, follow these steps. 1 2 3 Remove the blank cover of the appropriate slot on the rear of the frame (a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver is required). Replace the blank cover with the back panel connector assembly, and tighten screws, then loosen them slightly (about turn). Open the I/O Guide door. Input modules are inserted into the slots on the right side of the frame only. Output modules are inserted into the slots on the left side of the frame only. 4 From the front of the frame, insert the module into the appropriate slot; be very careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame (Figure 7-5) and on the guide door (Figure 7-6 on page 320). Slide the module into the frame until it is flush with the module guide edge and the extractor handle closes. Make sure that the module is fully seated, and the modules inserter/extractor lever is fully seated. 6 7 Tighten the two screws on the rear of the back panel; then, recheck by pressing firmly on the inserter/extractor to insure that the module is still fully seated in the frame. Close and lock the I/O Guide door.
Figure 7-5 Aligning Module with Frame Guide Notches
320
Figure 7-6 Aligning Module with Guide Door Guide Notches
321
Installing Crosspoint Modules

Module Placement
On 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames with one crosspoint module (no redundant module) the crosspoint module can be inserted into either slot 1 or slot 2. See Figure 1-2 on page 4 for the location of slots 1 and 2 for 9RU frames. See Figure 1-3 on page 5 for the location of slots 1 and 2 for 15RU frames. On 5RU, 9RU, and 15RU frames with one crosspoint module and one redundant module, the primary module should be inserted into slot 1 and the redundant module should be inserted into slot 2. On 15RU frames with two crosspoint modules and two redundant modules, the first primary module should be inserted into slot 1, the first redundant module should be inserted into slot 2, the second primary module should be inserted into slot 3, and the second redundant module should be inserted into slot 4. See Table 7-1 for information on which inputs and outspeaks are controlled by which crosspoint module location/slot. See Figure 1-3 on page 5 for an illustration of the location of slots 1 through 4 for 15RU frames. Table 7-1 Crosspoint Input/Output Control for 15RU Frames Crosspoint/ Slot Inputs Outputs 1 - 256 1 - 256 1 - 256 1 - 256
Crosspoint slot 1 1 - 128 Crosspoint slot 2 1 - 128 Crosspoint slot 3 129 - 256 Crosspoint slot 4 129 - 256
On 28RU frames, crosspoint module placement is determined by which inputs and outputs will be controlled. See Table 7-2 for information on which inputs and outspeaks are controlled by which crosspoint module location/slot. See Figure 1-4 on page 6 for the location of slots 1 through 8 for 28RU frames. Table 7-2 Crosspoint Input/Output Control for 28RU Frames Crosspoint/ Slot Inputs Outputs 1 - 256 1 - 256 1 - 256 1 - 256 Crosspoint/ Slot Inputs Outputs 257 - 512 257 - 512 257 - 512 257 - 512
322
Installing Modules
Installation procedures are the same for all Platinum crosspoint modules. To install a Platinum module, follow these steps: 1 2 Make sure that the I/O Guide doors are fastened shut. From the front of the frame, insert the module into the desired vertical slot; be very careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame.
If you insert a crosspoint module into the right vertical slot (that is, slots 1, 3, 5, and 7), make sure the top of the module faces toward the frames input modules (see Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-7 Crosspoint Module Orientation for Right Vertical Slot
If you insert a crosspoint module into the left vertical slot (that is, slots 2, 4, 6, and 8), make sure the top of the module faces toward the frames output modules
Slide the module into the frame until it is flush with the module guide edge and the extractor lever closes. You may have some resistance from the modules inserter/extractor lever bumping up against the frame. If so, fully extend the extractor lever and guide the module into place.
323
Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules
Installing Modules
PT-HS1310S-IB modules are inserted into the slots on the right side of the frame only. PT-HSRO-OBG+ and PT-HSR1310S-OB modules are inserted into the slots on the left side of the frame only. PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB fiber optical modules have plastic caps that protect the fragile laser connections from damage. You must remove these protective covers before you install the back and front modules (see Figure 7-8 on page 323). Figure 7-8 on page 323 shows a typical fiber optical module. Your modules appearance may differ slightly from the one shown; however, the protective covers are positioned identically and must be removed according to the instructions provided. The installation instructions that follow will prompt you as to when you should remove the protective covers. In addition, all fiber optic connections must be inspected and cleaned before they are assembled. Carefully follow the inspection and cleaning steps described in the next pages. Additional safety information begins on Laser Safety Guidelines on page 397.
CAUTION: Ensure that you remove the fiber optic protective covers from the front
and back modules before installation. Take care to avoid touching the fiber optic connections. Thoroughly clean the connections before installation. Remove power from the frame before installing or removing back modules.
Remove these protective covers
Remove these protective covers
Figure 7-8 Protective Covers for Laser Connectors
324
Back Module Installation 1 2 Remove a blank back plate from the frame. Do not discard the blank back plates. They may be needed for future configurations. On the side of the back module that inserts into the front module, remove the inner protective cap from the fiber connection (see Figure 7-8 on page 323).
CAUTION: Microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair or disable a fiber optic network. Observe strict cleaning procedures. Do not touch the end of the fiber.
3 4 5 6 Follow the inspection and cleaning procedure that begins on page 325. If it is already installed, remove the front module from the slot. Install the new back module by inserting the bottom lip into the required frame slot, and then screwing it into place. Apply the adhesive label to the back module if it is supplied separately. Front Module Installation 1 2 3 Remove the blank cover of the appropriate slot on the rear of the frame (a #1 Phillips-head screwdriver is required). Replace the blank cover with the back panel connector assembly, and tighten screws, then loosen them slightly (about turn). On the side of the back connector that inserts into the module, remove the inner protective cap from the laser insertion slot. See Figure 7-8 on page 323 for its location.
CAUTION: Microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair or disable a fiber optic network. Observe strict cleaning procedures. Do not touch the end of the fiber.
4 5 Install the new back module by inserting the bottom lip into the required frame slot, and then screwing it into place. Gently remove the outer and inner protective caps from the laser. See Figure 7-8 on page 323 for their locations. CAUTION: Do not touch the end, edge, or tip of the laser. This sensitive piece of equipment is susceptible to damage or misalignment if touched. 6 7 8 9 Follow the fiber cleaning instructions that begin on page 325. Ensure that your front module matches with a corresponding back module of the same name, and then slide the module into the guides on the frame floor. When the module edge is flush with the guide, close the extractor handle. The module is properly seated when its edge is flush with the guide edge and the extractor handle closes. Close the front panel to ensure proper frame ventilation. To prevent overheating, keep the front panel closed and all back module plate slots covered during operation.
Removing Modules
Front Module Removal 1 Open the I/O Guide door.
325
2 3
Grasp the extractor handle on the installed module, and then pull the module out of its slot; use the handle as a lever. Close the I/O Guide door to ensure proper frame ventilation. Back Module Removal
1 2 3 4 5
Remove the front module, as described above. Unscrew the top of the corresponding back module, and then tip it towards you. Pull the bottom lip of the back module from its slot. Reinstall a new or blank back plate in the empty slot to ensure proper frame ventilation. Reinstall the front module, and then repower the frame.
Inspecting and Cleaning Fiber Optic Connections

Small amounts of microscopic dust or other contaminants can seriously impair or disable a fiber optic network. To ensure that your network operates reliably, you must carefully inspect and clean each connection when installing fiber optical products. Table 7-3 lists some typical contaminants of a fiber optic connection. The inspection and cleaning procedure begins on page 326. Table 7-3 Typical Contaminants Contaminant Dust particle, 1 micron Dust particle, 9 microns Human hair Oil Film residues Powdery coatings Comments Can block up to 1% of the light transmission, creating a loss of 0.05 dB Although microscopic, the particle can completely block the fiber core Typically 50 to 75 microns in diameter Frequently caused by touching Can accumulate from vapors or smoke Can be left behind after water or other solvents evaporate
Important Points

Before you begin cleaning, always inspect the fiber connections. Inspect and clean both fiber ends every time you make a connection. Keep a protective cap on unplugged fiber connectors. Do not touch the end of a fiber. Store unused protective caps in a clean resealable container, located nearby for easy access. Do not reuse cleaning tissues or swabs. Do not allow alcohol or another wet cleaning agent to dry on a fiber end. Never touch the dispenser tip of an alcohol bottle or any clean portion of a tissue or swab. Use care when handling the fiber; do not twist or pull.
326
Keep your cleaning fluids away from open flame or spark.
Figure 7-9 describes the acceptable limits of defects in a fiber connection.

Zone 1 (0 to 20 micron diameter) No scratches or digs are allowed Zone 2 (20 to 50 micron diameter) Maximum of 3 scratches <1.0 micron width is acceptable; Maximum 1.0 micron light dig is acceptable
Scratches and dust
Zone 3 (50 to 126 micron diameter) Maximum 25 micron dig is acceptable; Maximum scratch size of 1.0 micron is acceptable
Maximum 25 micron diameter dig is acceptable
Figure 7-9 Fiber Optic Cross-Section Inspecting and Cleaning Fibers 1 Ensure the fiber is not live. WARNING: Eye damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to stare at an energized fiber end. 2 3 Inspect the fiber endface with a fiberscope. If the fiber endface is clean, return to the installation instructions on page 324 for back modules or page 324 for front modules. If the connector is dirty, proceed to the dry cleaning instructions below.
Dry Cleaning
If you are using cartridge or pocket-style dry cleaning tools, follow the manufacturers directions. If you are using lint-free wipes, follow these steps: 1 2 Fold the lint-free wipe four to eight times into a square, taking care to avoid touching the cleaning surface of the wipe. Lightly wipe the fiber tip in the central portion of the lint-free wipe. CAUTION: Do not scrub the fiber. Excessive rubbing will leave scratches.
327
3 4 5
Repeat the wiping action on another clean section of the wipe or a new wipe. Inspect the connector again with the fiberscope. If the connection is clean, return to the installation steps on page 324 for back modules, or page 324 for front modules. If the connector is still dirty, proceed to the wet cleaning instructions.
Wet Cleaning
Using 99% isopropyl alcohol and lint-free wipes, follow these steps to wet clean the fiber: 1 2 3 4 5 Fold the wipe into a square, about 4 to 8 layers thick. Moisten one section of the lint-free wipe with one drop of 99% alcohol, ensuring that a portion of the wipe remains dry. Lightly wipe the fiber end in the alcohol-moistened portion of the lint-free wipe. Immediately repeat the wiping action on the dry section of the wipe, removing any residual alcohol. Inspect the fiber endface again, and if necessary, repeat the wet cleaning with another clean section of the lint-free wipe. CAUTION: Do not scrub the fiber. Excessive rubbing will leave scratches. 6 7 Dry clean any remaining residue, and then inspect the connector again. If the contamination persists, repeat the dry and wet cleaning procedure until the endface is clean. If the fiber end still remains dirty after repeated cleaning attempts, call Customer Service for further instructions. If the fiber end is clean, return to the installation instructions on page 324 for back modules, or page 324 for front modules.
328
Installing Output Monitoring Modules

To install or replace the optional output monitoring module, follow these steps. 1 On the rear of the Platinum frame, remove the two screws holding the option slot cover plate. (A standard Phillips-head screwdriver is required.) Do not discard these screws, as you will need them again. Align the rear of the output monitoring module in the guide notches on either side of the frame opening. Noting the alignment of the modules mating connector inside the frame, slide the module into the frame. Re-install the two cover plate screws at either end of the output monitoring module rear panel. Configure the starting control level, destination, and source as described in your Navigator or RouterMapper user manual.
2 3 4 5
Installing Sync Modules

To install or replace sync modules, follow these steps. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Open the I/O Guide door. Locate the appropriate slot for the sync module, above the resource module (see Figure 1-7 on page 9). Align the sync module in the guide notches on either side of the frame opening. From the front of the frame, slide the module into the slot; then, make sure it is fully seated into the SYNC-MI module. Ensure that the modules inserter/extractor lever is fully seated. Close and lock the I/O Guide door.
329
Installing Alarm Modules
3 2 1
Figure 7-10 Installing PT-ALARM Module Make sure that the electrical connections are seated correctly on insertion (see Figure 7-10):
A 28RU frame uses the connections labeled 1, 2, and 3:

Connection 1 interconnects with the top fan module. Connection 2 interconnects with the bottom fan module. Connection 3 interconnects with the MI module. Connection 1 interconnects with the top fan module. Connection 3 interconnects with the MI module. Connection 2 interconnects with the fan module. Connection 3 interconnects with the MI module.
A 9RU or a 15RU frame uses the connections labeled 1 and 3:

A 5RU frame uses the connections labeled 2 and 3.

330
Installing Back Panel Modules

CAUTION: Properly match the back panel I/O modules with the proper input and output modules. One or more back panel I/O modules correspond to each input and output module installed in an Platinum frame. Back panel I/O modules are easily attached with two screws to the rear of the frames. Back panel I/O modules and their corresponding input and output modules are listed in Table 7-4. Table 7-4 Back Panel I/O Modules with Corresponding Input and Output Modules Input Module PM-HS-IB PM-HS-IB+ PT-HS-IB PT-HS-IB+ Back Panel I/O Module PT-V-BP Output Module PM-HSR-OB PM-HSR-DOB* PM-HSR-OB+ PT-HSR-OB PT-HSR-DOB* PT-HSR-OB+ PM-SR-OB PM-SR-DOB* PM-SR-OB+ PT-SR-OB PT-SR-DOB* PT-SR-OB+ PM-AEB-OB PM-AEBT-OB PT-AEB-OB PT-AEBT-OB PM-AEC-OB PM-AECT-OB PT-AEC-OB PT-AECT-OB PM-DAC-OB PM-DACT-OB PT-DAC-OB PT-DACT-OB PM-ENC-OB PM-ENC-DOB* PT-ENC-OB PT-ENC-DOB* PT-HSR1310S-OB PT-HSRO-OB+ PT-HSRO-OBG+ Back Panel I/O Module PT-V-BP
PM-S-IB PM-S-IB+ PT-S-IB PT-S-IB+
PT-V-BP
PT-V-BP
PM-AEB-IB PM-AEBT-IB PT-AEB-IB PT-AEBT-IB PM-AEC-IB PM-AECT-IB PT-AEC-IB PT-AECT-IB PM-ADC-IB PM-ADCT-IB PT-ADC-IB PT-ADCT-IB PM-DEC-IB PT-DEC-IB
PT-AEB-IBP
PT-AEB-OBP
PT-AEC-IBP
PT-AEC-OBP
PT-A2-BP
PT-A2-BP
PT-V-BP
PT-V-BP
PT-HS1310S-IB PT-HSO-IB+
PT-FO-BMI PT-SFP2X4+BM
PT-FO-BMO PT-SFP2X4+BM
* Requires two PT-V-BP modules
331
Installing Resource Modules

One resource module comes standard with every Platinum frame. You may add an additional resource module to the frame as a redundant option. To install or replace resource modules, follow these steps. 1 2 Open the I/O Guide door. Insert the resource module into the appropriate slot from the front of the frame. Be very careful to align the module in the guide notches on the frame (Figure 7-5) and on the guide door (Figure 7-6). Make sure that the module is fully seated, and the inserter/extractor lever is fully seated. Close and lock the I/O Guide door.
3 4
Replacing Resource Module Firmware

Periodically you may need to replace or update the resource module firmware versions available for PT-RES modules. You will need RouterMapper, RouterWorks, and a terminal emulation package such as HyperTerminal to successfully perform these tasks.
Use Cases
The following use cases describe different scenarios that require different procedures for completion of firmware and module replacements. Review the scenarios that appear at the beginning of each procedure to see what steps you need to take to perform module replacement properly and completely. The following sections presuppose that you have a working knowledge of Navigator or RouterMapper, and RouterWorks, and have used their other capabilities. If not, please refer to the appropriate software application user manual to familiarize yourself with their functions before you continue the firmware replacement process. Scenario 1: Platinum router contains one resource module; two modules (one PFM64 flash module and one MRAM module) received. 1 2 Back up the Navigator or RouterMapper database, and then back up current crosspoints to a RouterWorks salvo. Using the Platinum Firmware tab in Navigator or RouterMapper, upgrade the existing resource module to the same resource module version1 as the new flash and MRAM modules. After the upgrade is complete, execute the salvo via a serial cable (or open Navigator or RouterWorks, and then verify that the salvo is active). Remove the existing resource module from the Platinum frame. Insert the PFM64 flash module (with its module identifier facing down) into the SU2 slot on the resource module.
3 4
Module version information appears on labels affixed to the resource and flash modules.
332
The PFM64 module identifier is shown in Figure 7-11.
PFM64 flash module
Figure 7-11 PFM64 Flash Module Identifier Location 5 Insert the MRAM module (with its module identifier facing up) into SU3 slot on the resource module. The MRAM module identifier is shown in Figure 7-12.
MRAM flash module
Figure 7-12 MRAM Module Identifier Location 6 7 8 9 10 11 Reinstall the resource module back into the Platinum frame. Using Hyperterminal, execute the Information command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can talk to the resource module over Ethernet, and then download the appropriate database to the resource module. After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is active. Scenario 2: Platinum router contains two resource modules; four modules (including two PFM64 flash and two MRAM modules) received. 1 2 Back up the Navigator or RouterMapper database, and then back up current crosspoints to a RouterWorks salvo. Using the Platinum Firmware tab in Navigator or RouterMapper, upgrade the existing resource modules to the same resource module version1 as the new flash and MRAM modules. After the upgrade is complete, execute the salvo via a serial cable (or open Navigator or RouterWorks, and then verify that the salvo is active). Remove the existing passive resource module from the Platinum frame. Insert the PFM64 flash module (with its module identifier facing down) into the SU2 slot on the extracted resource module. The PFM64 module identifier is shown in Figure 7-11. Insert the MRAM module (with its module identifier facing up) into SU3 slot on the extracted resource module. The MRAM module identifier is shown in Figure 7-12.
3 4 5
333
Reinstall the extracted resource module back into the Platinum frame. The existing module remains the active resource module and the new resource module becomes the passive resource module. Verify that files copy properly from the active to the passive resource module. Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can talk to the resource modules over Ethernet, and then download the appropriate database to the active resource module. After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is active. Remove the active card, and then wait for the passive card to become active. Insert the PFM64 flash module (with its module identifier facing down) into the SU2 slot on the extracted resource module. The PFM64 module identifier is shown in Figure 7-11. Insert the MRAM module (with its module identifier facing up) into SU3 slot on the extracted resource module. The MRAM module identifier is shown in Figure 7-12. Reinstall the extracted resource module, and then verify that files copy properly from the active to the passive resource module. Scenario 3: Platinum router contains two resource modules; two new resource modules with the new MRAM flashes and code received.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 2
Back up the Navigator or RouterMapper database, and then back up current crosspoints to a salvo. Using the Platinum Firmware tab in Navigator or RouterMapper, upgrade the existing resource modules to the same resource module version1 as the new flash and MRAM modules. After the upgrade is complete, execute the salvo via a serial cable (or open Navigator or RouterWorks, and then verify that the salvo is active). Remove the old passive resource module, and then install the first new resource module. This module becomes the passive resource module. Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can talk to the resource module over Ethernet, and then download the appropriate database to the resource module. After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity. Remove the old active resource module and insert the second new resource module. This module becomes the passive resource module. Verify that files copy properly from the active to the passive resource module. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can talk to the resource module over Ethernet, and then download the appropriate database to the resource module. After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is active. Alternative - backup to USB by performing the following command: ~#UpgradeTestSysConfigMessage("BACKUPUSBALL","vflash:", "DirectoryName",1) )
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
334
Scenario 4: One resource module in field; new resource module with MRAM flash (to make a redundant resource module system) received. 1 2 Back up the Navigator or RouterMapper database, and then back up current crosspoints to a salvo. Using the Platinum Firmware tab in Navigator or RouterMapper, upgrade the existing resource modules to the same resource module version1 as the new flash and MRAM modules. After the upgrade is complete, execute the salvo via a serial cable (or open Navigator or RouterWorks, and then verify that the salvo is active). Insert the new resource module, and then allow the modules to sync up. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can talk to the resource module over Ethernet, and then download the appropriate database to the resource module. After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is active. Perform failover to new MRAM resource module (verify no signal loss, and so on) Reinsert the existing resource module, and then verify that the files sync up properly. Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is active. Scenario 5: From RouterMapper, upgrade to the latest resource module code with old resource module, flash, and MRAM modules. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Back up the Navigator or RouterMapper database, and then back up current crosspoints to a salvo. Using the Platinum Firmware tab in Navigator or RouterMapper, upgrade the existing resource modules to the new code made available. After the upgrade is complete, execute the salvo via a serial cable (or open Navigator or RouterWorks, and then verify that the salvo is active). Verify that Navigator or RouterMapper can talk to the resource module over Ethernet, and then download the appropriate database to the resource module. After downloading the database, perform a poll to verify data integrity. Using Hyperterminal, execute the ~#i command to verify that no tasks are suspended. Using Navigator or RouterWorks, verify that the salvo is active. Scenario 6: Two new modules installed; everything works for a week or two; suddenly, system crashes; so new flashes are replaced with old flash modules from old resource modules. The system should work properly utilizing the old SRAM, as long as both boards are programmed with the older BSP and application code that are compatible with the older flashes.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
335
Installing Power Supplies

One power supply module is included as standard equipment in the PM-FR-5 and PM-FR-9 Platinum frames; two power supply modules are included as standard equipment in the PT-FR-15 Platinum frames; four power supply modules are included as standard equipment in the PT-FR-28 Platinum frames. Adding more power supply modules provides redundancy. No configuration settings are needed for the power supply module(s). See Installing a Platinum Frame on page 340 for information concerning the appropriate power cords to use for AC and DC power supplies. To install a power supply, follow these steps: 1 Slide the power supply into the appropriate opening in the frame. (You may feel some resistance as the module engages the mating connector; this is normal.) Ensure that the module is fully seated in the slot. Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. The power supply voltage and fan display lights will illuminate. If you want to lock the power supply in place, push the lock screw to the left, then tighten the lock screw. Power distribution information is shown in Table 7-5. Table 7-5 Platinum Power Distribution Information Frame PM-FR-5 PM-FR-9 PT-FR-15 PT-FR-28 No. of Zones 1 1 2 4
2 3
Table 7-6 Platinum Power Distribution by Zones Zone 1 Resource module 1 Sync module OM module 1 OM module 2 Alarm module Fan module (top) TDM crosspoint module 1 PM-5-X1 PM-5-X2 PM-9-X1 PM-9-X2 PT-15-X1 PT-15-X3
Zone 2 Resource module 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
OM module 3 OM module 4
Fan module (bottom) TDM crosspoint module 2
336
Table 7-6 Platinum Power Distribution by Zones (Continued) Zone 1 PT-15-X2 PT-28-X1 PT-28-X2 IB: 1-128 OB: 1-128 Zone 2 PT-15-X4 PT-28-X3 PT-28-X4 IB: 129-256 OB: 129-256 PT-28-X5 PT-28-X6 IB: 257-384 OB: 257-384 PT-28-X7 PT-28-X8 IB: 385-512 OB: 385-512 Zone 3 Zone 4
337
Replacing Fans
A fan module is supplied with every Platinum frame (two fan modules are supplied with the 28RU frame). In case of a fan failure, only individual fans will need replacement; the entire fan module will not need to be replaced. However, the locking 3-pin connectors must be disconnected from the fans when removing a fan, and must be reconnected when installing a fan. To replace a fan, follow these steps: 1 2 Remove the fan cover panel to allow clear access to the fan unit requiring replacement. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the four fan mounting screws of fan requiring replacement. Put the mounting screws aside, as you will need them to properly install the replacement fan.
Figure 7-13 Removing Fan Mounting Screws 3 4 Move the fan unit away so as to allow access to the fan cable connector. Using side snips, cut off the fan cable lock of the fan requiring replacement.
338
Figure 7-14 Cutting Off Fan Cable Lock 5 Unplug the fan cable connector from the circuit board.
Figure 7-15 Unplugging Connector 6 Plug the replacement fans cable connector from the circuit board. make sure the lock mechanism is engaged.
339
Figure 7-16 Plugging In Connector 7 8 Put the replacement fan in place on the fan module. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, reattach the fan with the four fan mounting screws from the old fan.
Figure 7-17 Reattaching Fan Mounting Screws 9 10 Replace the fan cover panel. If desired, adjust the fan noise settings. On PM-FAN-5 modules, fan noise settings are adjusted via the PM-ALARM-5 module. (See Controlling Fan Speed on page 29 for more information.) On PM-FAN-8, PT-FAN-14, or PT-FAN-16 modules, fan noise may be reduced by adjusting the potentiometer at each fan location. This will reduce air flow through the frame. (This is not recommended in some applications. Please contact Customer Service for more detailed information.)
340
Configuration
See page 29 for fan speed and alarm configuration settings needed for PM-FAN-5 modules. There are no configuration settings needed for PM-FAN-8, PT-FAN-14, or PT-FAN-16 modules.
Installing a Platinum Frame

Each Platinum frame is shipped fully populated (based on customers configuration) and pre-configured from our manufacturing facility. The Platinum system can be installed anywhere within a routing system and can be controlled in a variety of ways. Because the flexibility of the Platinum setup allows for many possible configurations, the installation procedures will depend on the desired configuration and system design. General installation procedures are outlined below. 1 2 3 4 Install the Platinum frame in a restricted access area, so that only qualified personnel have access to it. An optional Platinum support tray may be purchased to make installation easier. Lift the Platinum frame into place and install rack screws. Use power cords of adequate wire gauge when connecting the Platinum frame to the facilitys electrical power source.
Platinum frames labeled to operate on 100 to 240 VAC should be connected using AC power cords that are no smaller than 14 gauge. Platinum frames labeled to operate from -40 to -60 VDC should be connected using cables no smaller than 12 gauge with ring terminals attached to the terminal blocks.
DC Platinum frames should be grounded using eight-gauge stranded copper wire crimped to the dual lug compression terminal provided on the frame.
Common Issues and Things to Check

Verify serial port settings from card edge control (defaults are 38400, n, 8,1) Verify IP address settings (double-check subnet mask) Verify that all modules are properly seated Reseat modules when in doubt! Confirm that the card-edge LED for ACT-CTL eventually turns green Verify that a valid X-Y signal is attached to X-Y ports on the router (not Sync), and that a valid Sync is connected to the Sync connectors Verify correct termination (75) on Sync and X-Y lines Verify state of Safe Hub mode on X-Y bus (this may be disabling second port) Confirm that all power supplies are cabled, turned on, and functional Confirm version of Platinum firmware on the resource module
341
Commonly Performed Procedures
Firmware Upgrade Procedure

Via FTP or via flash card replacement May be done with router powered up No switching possible while PT-RES is removed, unless you have a redundant PT-RES installed Attach anti-static strap Remove PT-RES module Remove flash module from PT-RES and replace with new flash Reinstall PT-RES
Flash Module Upgrade Procedure

Firmware Upgrade Procedure, crosspoint module Replace onboard EEPROM Module firmware upgrade procedure Replace onboard EEPROM
342
Field Upgrading and/or Replacing Platinum Components

See the following sections for the procedures for field expansion and/or replacement of Platinum components. (If a component is not listed, then it is not field-upgradeable. If you need to upgrade or replace such a module, please contact your Customer Service representative.) To purchase additional components, please contact your dealer or our Sales Department. Table 7-7 Field-Upgradeable Modules and Components Module/Component Alarm module Back panel module Crosspoint module Installation Explanation Section (Page)

Installing Alarm Modules on page 329 Installing Back Panel Modules on page 330 Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315* Replacing Fans on page 337 Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 Specialized Installation and Removal Procedures for PT-HS1310S-IB, PT-HSRO-OBG+, and PT-HSR1310S-OB Fiber Optical Modules on page 323 Laser Safety Guidelines on page 397 Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 Installing Input and Output Modules on page 319 Special Pre-Installation Information for Upgrading 3 Gb Input, Output, and Crosspoint Module Firmware on page 315 Installing Output Monitoring Modules on page 328 Installing Power Supplies on page 335 Installing Resource Modules on page 331 Installing Sync Modules on page 328
Fan Fiber optical module
Input module
Output module
Output monitoring module Power supply Resource module Sync module

* PM-4032-3G5,
PM-7264-3G5, PM-6464-3G9, PM-128128-3G9, PT-128256-3G15, PT-128256-3G28 only PM-HS-IB+, PM-S-IB+, PT-HS-IB+, PT-S-IB+ only PM-HSR-OB+, PM-SR-OB+, PT-HSR-OB+, PT-SR-OB+ only
343
Configuration
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages are present within the Platinum frame during normal operation. Disconnect all power cords from the frame before you remove the top panel. Do not apply power to the frame while the top is open unless the unit is being serviced by properly trained personnel. You can configure Platinum modules via several different methods: card-edge controls, local and remote panels, and certain GUI-based software applications. This chapter describes the configuration tools and procedures for configuring a Platinum router via card-edge controls and Navigator or RouterMapper configuration utility software. The following topics are covered in this chapter:

Card-Edge Controls on page 344 Frame Controllable Parameters on page 346 Configuring via Navigator or RouterMapper on page 350 Configuring Sync Reference Switch Points on page 356 Configuring TDM Audio Matrices on page 363
CAUTION We recommend that you test your system before its final installation. Make sure you verify its configuration, cabling, and proper system operation. Observe proper anti-static and grounding procedures while handling loose boards and servicing the equipment.
344
Chapter 8 Configuration
Card-Edge Controls
Using the Card-Edge Controls
Figure 8-1 Card-Edge Control Display The card-edge controls for Platinum modules are located just behind the front panel of the frame. The controls consist of these items, from left to right:

Display screen Escape button Nav+ (up)/Nav- (down) toggle switch
Enter button
Whether you use the card edge, a software control application, or a control panel, the options and variable values on Platinum modules are known as parameters.
Read-Only and Adjustable Parameters

The Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) screens on Platinum modules show two types of controllable parameters:

Read-only parameters provide status information, but cannot be changed. Adjustable parameters can be modified using card-edge controls.
Read-Only Parameters
Since you cannot change read-only parameters using card-edge controls, a lock icon appears beside them on the display screen.
Adjustable Parameters
You can change two types of adjustable parameters using the card-edge controls: numeric parameters and selectable parameters Numeric parameter changes are always immediate. You can make selectable parameters either Delayed or Immediate. When set to Delayed, the parameter changes will not take effect until you press the Enter button. Because of the small size of the card-edge display screen, only two lines of information appear at any time. When an up or down arrow appears in the display screen, it indicates that there are more items in the list. When both an up and down arrow appear, there are list items both above and below the displayed items.
345
Once you scroll to the end of a list, the items will wrap to the top or bottom and begin the list over again. Wrapping is only available from the card edge. Parameters that normally wrap when adjusted via the card edge will clip when adjusted using a control software application.
Operation Notes
When using a Platinum module, observe the following operation notes:
Although the effect of a parameter change may appear to be immediate, the module requires 20 seconds to save the latest change. If another change is made during these 20 seconds, the first parameter change and the second parameter change will not be saved until 20 seconds after the second parameter change. There is no limit to the number of changes that can be made within 20 seconds of each other. However, none of these changes will be saved until 20 seconds after the last parameter change. Each module automatically sets its parameters to the ones saved last.
CAUTION Failure to observe these Operation Notes will result in accidental changes to the modules parameter settings.
Card-Edge Screen Saver

After 20 minutes of inactivity, the VFD on a Platinum module automatically shuts off. To reactivate the VFD, press any button or toggle switch on the module. The screen saver mode is a step; therefore, no parameter changes will take effect when you awaken the VFD using one of the card-edge controls. However, the parameter changes will take effect if you press the Enter button twice while the display is being awakened.
Controllable Parameters List Appearance

The Controllable Parameters list is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters, arranged into groupings. Parameters with the abbreviation [RO] are read-only.

Platinum frame default settings are listed on page 346. Platinum application parameters are listed on page 347. Platinum fail-safe parameters are listed on page 347. Parameters lists for each individual module are listed with the modules detailed description.
Navigating the Parameters List

Note: If you do not want to make changes to your settings, return to the previously selected item in the list, and then press Escape to move up a level. To navigate, and then view or change a parameter, follow these steps: 1 2 Open the front panel of the frame. Press any card-edge control button or the toggle switch to turn on the VFD display. The module name will appear as the banner on the card-edge display screen.
346
3 4 5 6 7 8
Press Select. The first two items in the Level One list appear. Click Nav- (down) on the Nav-/Nav+ switch to view more items in the list. Choose the desired item in the list, then press Select. The Level Two list will appear. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to view more items in Levels Two, Three, and Four. If the parameter is numeric, slide the bar to the desired parameter using the Nav+/Navswitch; or, choose the desired item in the Level Four list, and then press Select. Once you have set or viewed the parameter, you can leave it in its current state or return to the card-edge display banner. To return to the card-edge display banner, repeatedly press Escape. Close the front panel of the frame to ensure the cooling system continues to operate properly.
Frame Controllable Parameters

The card-edge controllable parameters listed below are specific to a Platinum frame. Frame controllable parameters available through Navigator or RouterMapper are shown in Table 8-4 on page 352. Controllable parameters specific to a particular module are listed with the modules detailed description.
Default Settings
Table 8-1 Platinum Default Settings Item IP address Gateway Subnet mask Serial baud rate Serial mode Telnet FTP VXY Server Default Setting 192.168.100.250 192.168.100.1 255.255.255.0 38400 baud RS-232 On On On # of users= 4
347
Application Parameters
Table 8-2 Card-Edge Application Parameters Menu Item 1 COMMS Menu Item 2 Menu Item 3 Description Allows viewing and control of settings affecting serial ports 1 and 2 Displays a summary of the selected serial ports settings (mode, baud) Chooses either RS-232 or RS-422 mode for the selected serial port Chooses baud rate for the selected serial port; available settings are 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Allows viewing and control of settings affecting Ethernet ports 1 and 2 Displays a summary of the selected Ethernet ports Address, gateway and Netmask settings Allows setting the Ethernet ports IP address Allows setting the Ethernet ports Default Gateway address Allows setting the Ethernet ports network mask Indicates if there is an active fan alarm in the system Indicates if there is an active Power supply unit alarm in the system Causes an updated copy of the system snapshot file to be written to the flash file system Allows assignment of the frames system ID NORMAL FAILSAFE Restarts the Platinum system normally Restarts the system in Failsafe mode (normally used only during installation and/or by service personnel for low-level diagnostics, system settings or upgrading resource card components) Restores resource card communications and operation settings to factory default state
SERIAL (Serial 1 and Serial 2) SUMMARY MODE BAUD
ENET (Enet 1 and Enet 2) SUMMARY
ADDRESS GATEWAY NETMASK STATUS FAN PSU OPERATIONS SERVICE SNAPSHOT
SYSTEM
FRAME ID REBOOT
DEFAULTS
Fail-Safe Parameters
Fail-safe parameters are normally used only during installation and/or by service personnel for low-level diagnostics, system settings, or upgrading resource card components.
348
Table 8-3 Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters Menu Item 1 Communications Menu Item 2 Network1 Menu Item 3 Network 1 Up/Down IP Address (displayed on second line: current status) Gateway (displayed on second line: current status) XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX (Default IP address: 192.168.100.250) XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX (Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1) Options / Results
Subnet Mask (displayed XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX on second line: current (Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0) status) Enable Disable Network 2 Network 2 Up/Down IP Address (Displayed on second line: current status) Gateway (Displayed on second line: current status) Subnet Mask (Displayed on second line: current status) Enable Disable Serial 1 Status Baud Rate (Scroll on second line: Parity = None Number of Stop Bits = 1 Number of Bits=8 Mode Enable Disable Display Serial Info

XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX Default IP address: 192.168.100.250 XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1 XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 RS232 RS422
349
Table 8-3 Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters (Continued) Menu Item 1 Menu Item 2 Serial 2 (displayed on second line: current status enabled or disabled Menu Item 3 Enable/Disable Options / Results
Baud Rate (Scroll on second line: Parity = None Number of Stop Bits = 1 Number of Bits=8 Mode
9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 RS232 RS422
USB 1 USB 2 Protocols
Enable/Disable Host/Filesystem Ftp Telnet1 FTP Enable/Disable Selection # of connections (displayed on second line: current status Port number (displayed on second line: current status) Telnet -Enable/Disable Selection # of connections Port number Directory tree Format Files system Mount File system Delete File System Delete Files Ping XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX Perform hardware test Perform memory test Perform flash test Define items affected to default: Comm Setting IP gateway subnet ftp = on telnet = on Any Files- like sysconfig.xml?
Telnet2
File System
List Format Fs Detect Fs Erase Fs Delete
Diagnostics
Ping Option HW Test Memory Test Flash Test
Restore Defaults
Reset Frame to Factory Defaults Y/N?
350
Table 8-3 Card-Edge Fail-Safe Interface Parameters (Continued) Menu Item 1 Boot From Menu Item 2 Network1 Menu Item 3 Options / Results Find matching files from IP address XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX Find matching files from IP address XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX
Network 2
Flash Card 1 Card 2 Time/Clock Time server to connect to Displays current time/date scroll on bottom
Set Time Set Mode Set Time Server Set Timezone Server Connection Timeout (ms) About Product name Software Versions HW Version Copyright Leitch Inc Serial Number International Services Update Update Rom Update App Create Im Reboot Reboot System Safe Mode Y/N?
Enter Time Synchronize with NTP IP Address of Server XXX.XXXX.XXX.XXX GMT etc.
Configuring via Navigator or RouterMapper

Note: This section presupposes that you have a working knowledge of Navigator or RouterMapper configuration utility and have used the softwares other capabilities. If not, please refer to the pertinent software application user manual to familiarize yourself with its functions before you continue the Add process
351
The information below provides you the different methods by which you can add the Platinum router to a configuration utility database. It does not go into detail about any of these methods or about other aspects of editing a router. For more information on editing routers, please refer to the pertinent configuration utility software application user manual. You can download a copy of the most current edition from our website. To add a Platinum router, you must use Navigator version 4.5 or higher, or RouterMapper v.6.01 or higher (v.6.03 or higher to add Platinum with CENTRIO).
Adding Platinum Frames by Polling

The Poll option is used to query the control system for any programmable devices that may be present in the system. Polling will obtain information about the current configuration of each physical device, and will compare it to the information found in the database to determine if the database information matches the actual configuration.
Adding Platinum Frames by Discovering

The Discovery option is a quick way to allow the configuration utility software to search the control system for any programmable devices that may be present in the system. Unlike the Polling option, the Discovery option will not obtain information about current configurations; however, it will allow you to select discovered devices to add to the device list.
Adding Platinum Frames using the Create or Add Command

An alternative to polling the system for, or discovering, devices is to create the device definitions via Navigators Create or RouterMappers Add function. Adding a Platinum frame to the RouterMapper database is a multi-step process that requires you to select a frame size, set up a matrix, select monitoring (if you have optional monitoring modules as part of your system), and set up controls.
Frame Application Parameters Available Through Navigator or RouterMapper

Whenever a system poll is initiated, Navigator or RouterMapper will query all devices attached to the system to determine the configuration of each. The properties of the detected frame will be displayed on the Detected Matrices tab. This information is read-only (it cannot be edited). However, certain application parameters can be edited via the Module Parameters list box for frames. To access this list box, at the Detected Matrices tab, position the screen cursor above the resource module entry in the Control Components section, right-click the mouse button, and then select View Frame Settings. The Module Parameters list box will appear.
352
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable. Selections that are greyed out are read-only and cannot be changed. Table 8-4 lists frame parameters, descriptions, and options. Table 8-4 Application Parameters Available Through Configuration Utility Software (* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter) Parameter Frame Type [RO] Description Programmed frame size Options

PM-FR-5 PM-FR-9 PT-FR-15 PT-FR-28 PM-FR-5 PM-FR-9 PT-FR-15 PT-FR-28
Detected Frame Type [RO]
Actual, physical frame size
Frame Id
Number assigned to frame from application software to allow it to participate in the control system Alphanumeric string used in application software to allow user-friendly naming of the Platinum frame; it shows in the hardware list PT-RES serial number; allows licensing for options such as SNMP Specifies sync settings for sync ports (see the software application manual for descriptions of these settings)
0 - 127
Frame Name
23 characters
CPU Id [RO] Sync Mode1 Sync Mode4
12 characters

Auto Standard Advanced
353
Table 8-4 Application Parameters Available Through Configuration Utility Software (Continued) (* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter) Parameter Sync Reference1 Sync Reference4 Description Only used if sync mode is Standard (see the software application manual for a description of this setting) Options

None* 1280720/50P Line 7 1280720/60P Line 7 1280720/60P/1.001 Line 7 19201080/24P Line 7 19201080/24P/1.001 Line 7 19201080/24PsF Line 7 19201080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7 19201080/25P Line 7 19201080/30P Line 7 19201080/30P/1.001 Line 7 19201080/50I Line 7 19201080/60I Line 7 19201080/60I/1.001 Line 7 Analog 525/60 Line 10 Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10 Analog 625/50 Line 6 None* 1280720/50P Line 7 1280720/60P Line 7 1280720/60P/1.001 Line 7 19201080/24P Line 7 19201080/24P/1.001 Line 7 19201080/24PsF Line 7 19201080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7 19201080/25P Line 7 19201080/30P Line 7 19201080/30P/1.001 Line 7 19201080/50I Line 7 19201080/60I Line 7 19201080/60I/1.001 Line 7 Analog 525/60 Line 10 Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10 Analog 625/50 Line 6
Detected Reference1 [RO] Detected Reference4 [RO]
Sync reference that is automatically detected by PT-RES (this is the sync reference used when Sync Mode parameter is set to Auto) Four concurrent available sync references are allowed If an external sync reference is removed from the frame, the Sync Presence parameter will indicate that it is not present; however, the Detected Reference parameter will continue to show the previous detected reference to prevent interruption in switching operations
354
Table 8-4 Application Parameters Available Through Configuration Utility Software (Continued) (* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter) Parameter Redundancy Mode Description Instructs PT-RES to automatically switch crosspoints from a crosspoint module to its redundant crosspoint module when the active one is removed. This feature is not available for frames that do not have redundant crosspoint modules; when set to Manual, you must switch each crosspoint to the redundant card by setting it to Active by using the crosspoint active parameter Redundant Switch Mode Instructs PT-RES to switch all currently active crosspoints to the redundant crosspoint module when the active one is removed. Specifies external operating temperature in degrees Celsius Alarm relay on PT-RES Switch All Options

Manual Auto
External Temperature [RO] General Alarm1 [RO] General Alarm3 [RO] Alarm Enable1 Alarm Enable3 Active Crosspoint1 Active Crosspoint8
128 to 120C

No Alarm Alarm
Enables/disables General Alarm parameter
Enable Disable
For frames that support redundant crosspoints, this parameter allows you to set the currently active crosspoint module If Redundant Switch Mode is set to Switch All all active crosspoints will switch through the set crosspoint module and the corresponding, previous active crosspoint module will become inactive For all frames the value of this parameter indicates whether the crosspoint module installed is active (present and allowing switched) Allows you to select which sync references can trigger crosspoint switches
On Off
Sync Enable1 Sync Enable4
On Off
355
Table 8-4 Application Parameters Available Through Configuration Utility Software (Continued) (* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter) Parameter Sync Presence1 Sync Presence4 Description Indicates which sync reference is presently detected by PT-RES If an external sync reference is removed from the frame, the Sync Presence parameter will indicate that it is not present; however, the Detected Reference parameter will continue to show the previous detected reference to prevent interruption in switching operations Allows you to set the currently active TDM module Allows you to set the currently active sync module Options

On Off
Active TDM Crosspoint1 Active TDM Crosspoint2 Active Sync Module1 Active Sync Module2 Internal Network1 Internal Network4
On Off On Off
Used with CENTRIO, sets the network address for internal Ethernet for each bank of CENTRIO modules This feature is not available for frames that do not have CENTRIO modules installed Used when a CENTRIO double density submodule is installed on a Platinum IB+ module This feature is not available for frames that do not have CENTRIO modules installed Indicates the temperature threshold for all the temperature sensors in/on a Platinum frame When a change in any external or internal temperature sensor readings rises to the same value or greater than the temperature threshold value, the frame generates an alarm on the PT-Alarm module When a change in any external or internal temperature sensor value results in all temperature values drop to less than the temperature threshold, the alarm indicator will be cleared
192.168.101.000*
Double Density Mode
7+1 8+1 None*
Temperature Threshold
60C* (-127 to +127C)
356
Configuring Sync Reference Switch Points

Platinum frame switch point configuration is one of the easiest and most flexible found in the industry. It can be plug-and-play or provide granular adjustments to meet the most complex requirements. In most configurations, the default settings do not require any additional setup. For more complex systems, there are two main steps to configure the correct switch point for the signals being routed: 1 Configure the switch timing for the sync inputs connected to the frame. Platinum supports up to four sync inputs. By default, the inputs are configured for Auto mode and base switch timing on the reference inputs per SMPTE RP-168. See page 356 for more information on switch modes. 2 Assign output modules to one of the four switch configurations (Platinum automatically defaults all outputs to use Sync Input 1). The explanation below is for informational purposes. It does not provide details of the steps involved in setting up sync references. You can configure the Platinum sync via Navigator or RouterMapper.
Sync Reference Switch Modes

Three modes are available for configuring each sync reference switch point (up to four supported in Platinum: Auto Mode (default), Standard Mode, and Advanced Mode.
Auto Mode
Auto Mode is the default setting for all switch point configurations within Platinum (up to four, associated with the four reference inputs). When in Auto Mode, the outputs assigned to that Sync will switch relative to what reference is detected on the Sync Input. For example, if NTSC House Black is detected on Sync Input 1, the switch point will be line 10 relative to the reference (per SMPTE RP-168). Auto Mode is the desired mode for all configurations where the signals being routed are based on the same timing as the reference signal and the user wants to switch per SMPTE RP-168 (this is the majority of use cases).
Standard Mode
Standard Mode allows you to use a different sync reference than the signals being routed and still switch in the correct place relative to the routed signals (as long as the reference and signals are based on the same timing). This selection requires you to configure the switch point for one of the sync reference inputs by choosing an I/O type from the drop-down list box (see Figure 8-2). The system then calculates the proper timing for the switch point by using a look-up between the detected reference signal on the selected sync reference input and the signal type selected from the drop-down list box.
357
Figure 8-2 Standard Mode Signal Type Selection Standard Mode is mostly used when using a single reference for switching different signals within the frame. A common example is when switching both standard SD and HD formats based on the same sync input. This feature allows Platinum not to require a Tri-Level HD reference to switch at the correct place within the signal even when using a standard House Black reference. Example Configuration House Black NTSC Reference when switching both SD (NTSC) and HD (1080i 59.9) signals. 1 2 Attach House Black sync reference to both sync 1 and sync 2 inputs on the back of the frame. In Navigator or RouterMapper, navigate to the Platinum Control Settings tab, and then click the Change Sync Settings Sync... button. The Configure I/O Sync dialog box opens. 3 Set Sync 1 switch configuration to Auto (should be configured already by default).
358
Figure 8-3 Step 3: Sync 1 Switch Configuration to Auto Mode 4 Set Sync 2 switch configuration to Standard, and then select 1920x1080/59.94I from the I/O Type drop-down list box.
Figure 8-4 Step 4: Sync 2 Switch Configuration to Standard Mode 5 Switch to the Platinum Configured Matrices tab, and then configure each HD output module to use Sync 2 for proper switch point timing.
Figure 8-5 Step 5: Configure HD Output Module

359
Advanced Mode
Advanced Mode allows you to configure a Platinum router to switch at any point relative to the detected reference signals sync pulse in microsecond delay increments. Use this configuration primarily with a non-standard reference, or when you choose not to follow SMPTE RP-168 switching guidelines. On Platinum systems with resource module version 3.9 or lower, the use of Advanced mode is required to meet the SMPTE RP-168 specifications for switch points in which the sync reference is not the same standard as the signal type. Some formats (for example, 1080i/50) do not switch at the correct line using Auto Mode. Using the Advanced Mode setup can address these issues as well. Resolution Note: Navigator version 4.5 or RouterMapper version 6.12 is required for proper Advanced Mode operation. Advanced Mode allows you to configure the Platinum to switch at the right line within the video signal. For delay values for standard video timing, refer to the values provided in Table 8-5, Table 8-6, and Table 8-7. The bright green blocks indicate the reference type connected to the sync input and the light green blocks indicate the signal type. Gray blocks are not supported.
Table 8-5 Standard Video Time Delay Values: Analog 525/60, Analog 525/60/1.001, Analog 625/50, 19201080i/60, 19201080p/60, 19201080i/60/1.001, 19201080p/60/1.001
Reference Types 19201080p/60/1.001
384 163 67
Analog 525/60/1.001
Signal Type
Switch Point
Analog 525/60 Analog 525/60/1.001 Analog 625/50 19201080/60I 19201080/60P 19201080/60I/1.001 19201080/60P/1.001 19201080/50I 19201080/50P 19201080/30P 19201080/30P/1.001 19201080/25P 19201080/24P 19201080/24PsF 19201080/24P
Line 10 Line 10 Line 6 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7
384 384 326 164 67 164 68 205 89
383
383 384
163 67
163 67 163 67
19201080i/60/1.001
19201080p/60
Analog 525/60
Analog 625/50
19201080i/60
360
Table 8-5 Standard Video Time Delay Values: Analog 525/60, Analog 525/60/1.001, Analog 625/50, 19201080i/60, 19201080p/60, 19201080i/60/1.001, 19201080p/60/1.001 (Continued)
19201080/24PsF/1.001 1280720/60P 1280720/60P/1.001 1280720/50P Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 115 116 147 115 115 115 115
Table 8-6 Standard Video Time Delay Values: 19201080i/50, 19201080p/50, 19201080p/30, 19201080p/30/1.001, 19201080p/25, 19201080p/24, 19201080p/24 sF
Reference Types 19201080p/30/1.001
Signal Type
Switch Point
Analog 525/60 Analog 525/60/1.001 Analog 625/50 19201080/60I 19201080/60P 19201080/60I/1.001 19201080/60P/1.001 19201080/50I 19201080/50P 19201080/30P 19201080/30P/1.001 19201080/25P 19201080/24P 19201080/24PsF 19201080/24P 19201080/24PsF/1.001 1280720/60P 1280720/60P/1.001 1280720/50P
Line 10 Line 10 Line 6 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 138 138 196 80 196 80 163 163 196 204 204 317 317
19201080p/24 sF
19201080p/50
19201080p/30
19201080p/25
19201080p/24
19201080i/50
361
Table 8-7 Standard Video Time Delay Values: 19201080p/24/1.001, 19201080/24 PsF/1.001, 1280720/60P, 1280720/60P/1.001, 1280720/50P
Reference Types 19201080/24 PsF/1.001 19201080p/24/1.001
1280720/60P
Analog 525/60 Analog 525/60/1.001 Analog 625/50 19201080/60I 19201080/60P 19201080/60I/1.001 19201080/60P/1.001 19201080/50I 19201080/50P 19201080/30P 19201080/30P/1.001 19201080/25P 19201080/24P 19201080/24PsF 19201080/24P 19201080/24PsF/1.001 1280720/60P 1280720/60P/1.001 1280720/50P
Line 10 Line 10 Line 6 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 Line 7 204 204
391 392 326 171 75 171 75 205 89
123 123 146
Example Configuration House Black NTSC Reference when switching both SD (NTSC) and HD (1080i 59.9) signals. 1 2 Attach House Black sync reference to both sync 1 and sync 2 inputs on the back of the frame. In Navigator or RouterMapper, navigate to the Platinum Control Settings tab, and then click the Change Sync Settings Sync... button. The Configure I/O Sync dialog box opens. 3 Set Sync 1 switch configuration to Auto (should be configured already by default).
1280720/50P
Signal Type
Switch Point
1280720/60P/1.001
362
Figure 8-6 Step 3: Sync 1 Switch Configuration to Auto Mode 4 Configure Sync 2 switch configuration to Advanced, and then enter the sync pulse delay, as shown in Figure 8-7. Note: See Table 8-5, Table 8-6, and Table 8-7 for standard video timing delay values. The example presumes selection of an Analog 525 reference with 19201080i/60 signals, which has a video time delay value of 164.
Figure 8-7 Step 4: Sync 2 Switch Configuration to Advanced Mode 5 Switch to the Platinum Configured Matrices tab, and then configure each HD output module to use Sync 2 for proper switch point timing.
363
Figure 8-8 Step 5: Configure HD Output Module
Configuring TDM Audio Matrices

Adding a TDM matrix to a Platinum or Platinum MX router provides you with an incredibly powerful way to switch audio. Because there are several different implementations of audio routing within facilities, configuring an audio matrix will depend on several factors. Therefore, this section highlights the different use cases that a customer may have and gives step by step instruction on how to configure a TDM matrix for a Platinum or Platinum MX routing system.
Routing Configuration (Analog Stereo/AES/Multiplex)

Adding a TDM Matrix to the Database Configuring Outputs for Audio Partitions Editing the Logical Database
Adding a TDM Matrix to the Database

1 To determine the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) inputs required in your router, add up the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) outputs on all devices and equipment you will have feeding signals into the router. Note: If you have devices or equipment with other types of audio signals, please add them to your system separately. 2 To determine the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) outputs required in your router add up the total number of (Stereo/AES/Multiplex) inputs on all devices and equipment the router will be feeding signals to. In the Add WB Matrix dialog box (Figure 8-10), choose TDM (time division multiplex) from the Matrix Type drop-down list box. The Add TDM Matrix dialog box opens.
364
Figure 8-9 Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box 4 5 In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular TDM matrix. Choose the appropriate (AES/Analog Audio/Multiplex Audio) matrix format from the Format drop-down list.
6 7 8 9
In the Level box, select a number that corresponds to the same level number the corresponding video matrix will occupy in the routing system. Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs drop-down list box.1 (You cannot type information into this field.) Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs drop-down list box.2 (You cannot type information into this field.) If you have configured another matrix in the frame already (such as video), decide whether you would like to leave built-in expansion slots for that matrix before starting the audio matrix in the next available slot (default selection; see step 10 for an explanation for Auto). If you would like to leave room for expansion, edit the starting slot number for your audio matrix to leave the appropriate room for expansion (see step 10 for an explanation for Manual).
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make will be reflected in the # of Physical INs selection. If you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, do not change the # IN Slots selection. 2 If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make will be reflected in the # of Physical OUTs selection. If you do not want to change the number of physical outputs, do not change the # OUT Slots selection.
365
Figure 8-10 Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box 10 The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your I/O modules.
Click the Auto radio button if you want to automatically assign slots for the I/O modules. If you select this option, you will not be able to change the Input Card Type, Starting IN Slot, or # In Slots list box. (This is the default setting.) Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for the I/O modules yourself. If you select slot assignments that are incompatible with other settings, appropriate error messages are displayed. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type list box. Make sure you select modules that begin with PT if you are using a 15RU or 28RU frame, PM if you are using a 5RU or a 9RU frame. Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot drop-down list box. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots drop-down list box1. The software application automatically calculates the number of physical inputs you will have for the number of modules you selected. Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type drop-down list box. Make sure you select modules that begin with PT if you are using a 15RU or 28RU frame, PM if you are using a 5RU or a 9RU frame. Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT Slot drop-down list box. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT Slots drop-down list box.2 The software application automatically calculates the number of physical outputs you will have for the number of modules you selected. Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required; if you do not want to change the number of physical outputs, do not change this entry.
b c
e f
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry. 2 Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required. If you do not want to change the number of physical outputs, do not change this entry.
366
11
The Options box allows you to set up audio types for audio format selections. Since you selected TDM as your matrix type, the Audio Type drop-down list box will be enabled. Select Stereo to always route a stereo pair (two channels) of audio together. Select Mono to to route independent mono audio channels.
12
Decide whether you will need the capability to switch the audio signals independently from video signals (that is, breakaway routing of audio; only applicable in systems with both video and audio signals). Note: Not applicable in case of MADI (Multiplex Audio). a If you do not want the capability to switch audio independent of the video, uncheck the Breakaway audio from video check box, and then click OK.
Figure 8-11 Breakaway Audio from Video with Check Box Deselected b If you do want the capability to switch audio independent of the video, leave the Breakaway audio from video check box checked.
367
Figure 8-12 Breakaway Audio from Video with Check Box Selected c If you have more than one stereo pair and would like the ability to breakaway the individual stereo pairs from each other, check the Breakaway individual stereo pairs box.
Figure 8-13 Breakaway Individual Stereo Pairs d If you require the capability to breakaway the individual left and/or right channels of a stereo pair, check the Breakaway individual audio channels box, and then click OK.
368
Figure 8-14 Breakaway Individual Audio Channels
Configuring Outputs for Audio Partitions

Once you click OK at the Add TDM Matrix window, if your system has devices that have more than one stereo pair, you will need to configure the size of the outputs for each of the audio partitions. To do this, follow these steps. 1 Determine the number of audio inputs for each device that is being fed with a router output, and then group the devices based on number of audio inputs. (Example: You have 30 devices with (2) stereo pairs of audio, 80 devices with 1 stereo pair, and 18 devices with a single mono input. Highlight the desired matrix, then click the Advanced button on the Configured Matrix window.
369
Figure 8-15 Configured Matrix Window 3 Select the Physical Output View tab. You will see that the system by default has divided your outputs into four equal partitions. Each colored circle represents a single mono channel of audio. In this example, the maximum number of AES streams / stereo audio channels in any device being fed from the router was two).
Figure 8-16 Physical Output View Tab

370
4 5
If all devices have the same number of audio inputs, you are finished. Click OK. To modify the partition assignment of a single output or group of outputs, click on the desired circle (you can use the <Ctrl> key + left mouse button or the <Shift> key + left mouse button to select groups). Once the desired output(s) are selected, right-click, and then select Unassign from [matrix].
Figure 8-17 Unassigning Selections from a Matrix 7 The selected outputs are no longer assigned to any matrix.
371
Figure 8-18 Unassigned Selection Results 8 9 Select the partition you want to assign those outputs to, click on the output or group of outputs you desire, right-click, and then select Assign to [Partition]. Notice the result has increased the output size of the second partition and has reduced the size of the third partition.
The following illustrations provide examples of a partitioned system: In each illustration, observe how the system has changed the partition sizes to reflect the desired configuration.

30 devices with 2 stereo pairs (Figure 8-19) 60 devices w/1 stereo pair (Figure 8-20) 16 devices w/1 mono input (Figure 8-21) 30 devices with 2 AES streams (Figure 8-22)
372
16 devices with 1 AES mono channel (Figure 8-23)
Figure 8-19 Partitioned System: 30 Devices with 2 Stereo Pairs
Figure 8-20 Partitioned System: 60 Devices with 1 Stereo Pair of Audio
373
Figure 8-21 Partitioned System: 16 Devices with 1 Mono Channel of Audio
Figure 8-22 Partitioned System: 30 devices with 2 AES streams
374
Figure 8-23 Partitioned System: 16 Devices with 1 AES Mono Channel 10 If the configuration is correct, click OK. You are now ready to configure the logical database.
Editing the Logical Database

After the hardware has been configured, complete the following steps to create the logical database. 1 Click on the Sources button on the main window to get access to the database editor (see Figure 8-24).
375
Figure 8-24 Sources Button 2 3 Click on the first name in the source list, type the name of the first source in the database for example VTR 1. If you configured the system to not breakaway audio, notice that under the first level the first physical video and audio sources are assigned the same logical input. As you add sources and destinations the database will use the next available video and audio sources.
Figure 8-25 First Physical Video and Audio Source Assignments 4 5 6 Once you are done with the sources, click on the Logical Destinations tab, and then repeat the same steps for destinations. Once finished with the destinations, click OK to accept the changes and return to the main window. To download the configured matrix to the Platinum hardware, select the desired frame, right-click on it, and then select Download. At the About to Download window, choose Selected Devices.
376
Figure 8-26 Downloading Selected Devices
Breakaway Individual Stereo Pairs

1 If you have chosen to breakaway individual mono channels within AES streams or stereo pair(s), enter the name of the desired logical source; for example VTR 1.
Figure 8-27 Entering Logical Source Names 2 Create a source name for each stereo pair of audio that source has. In this example, this source has two stereo outputs, so a total of two names will need to be created (see Figure 8-28).
377
Figure 8-28 Creating Source Names for Stereo Pairs 3 Assign the physical source input you want associated with that input name for each level by clicking on the top number and selecting the appropriate input number.
Figure 8-29 Assigning Physical Source Inputs 4 Select the physical source name for each of the different audio levels. This will allow you to switch any AES/Stereo input of audio to any destination. (This source will be the same across all levels.)
378
Figure 8-30 Selecting Physical Source Names 5 When all sources have been configured, select the Logical Destinations tab to add destinations.(Additional source names are not required in this step.)
Figure 8-31 Adding Destinations 6 7 When destination naming has been completed, click OK to accept the changes and return to the main window. To download the configured matrix to the Platinum hardware, select the desired frame, right-click on it, and then select Download. At the About to Download window, choose Selected Devices.
379
Breakaway Mono Channels in an AES/Stereo Pair

1 If you have chosen to breakaway individual mono channels with in an AES stream or stereo pair(s), enter the name of the desired logical source; for example, VTR 1.
Figure 8-33 Entering Logical Source Names 2 Create a source name for each mono channel of audio that source has. For a source with two AES/stereo outputs, a total of four names will need to be created. See Figure 8-34.
380
Figure 8-34 Creating Source Names for Mono Channels 3 Assign the physical source input you want associated with that input name for each level by clicking on the top number and selecting the appropriate input number.
Figure 8-35 Assigning Physical Source Inputs 4 Select the physical source name for each of the different audio levels. What this will allow you to do is switch any mono input of audio to any destination. Note, this source will be the same across all levels.
381
Figure 8-36 Selecting Physical Source Names 5 Once all sources have been configured, select the Logical Destinations tab to add destinations. (Additional source names are not required in this step.)
Figure 8-37 Adding Destinations 6 7 Once destination naming has been completed, click OK. To download the configured matrix to the Platinum hardware, select the desired frame, right-click on it, and then select Download. At the About to Download window, choose Selected Devices.
382
383
Terminal Operation
A separate serial control port is used to control a Platinum router from an external computer or automation system. The serial port may be used to monitor the system matrix configuration, determine the current status of crosspoint connections, change crosspoint connections in any matrix, and setup pre-programmed crosspoint takes sequences, or salvos. These (and other) operations are assigned to the serial port via a series of commands called terminal operation commands. You can find a list of the terminal commands available for the Platinum router starting on page 385.
Establishing Terminal Operations Session

Before you configure your Platinum product, you will need to initiate a terminal operation session. You need to determine which type of setup you will use:
For a standalone or network system with serial connections, see Establishing Terminal Operation Sessions for Serial Control Interface Products on page 384. For a standalone or network system with Ethernet connections, see Establishing Telnet Sessions for Ethernet Control Interface Products on page 384.
384
Chapter 9 Terminal Operation
Establishing Terminal Operation Sessions for Serial Control Interface Products

1 Configure a host machine (such as a PC with HyperTerminal1 installed) for serial port communication at a baud rate of 38400 with these settings: Data on the serial control port is encoded as 8N1:

8 None 1 No flow-control
2 3
Connect a null modem serial cable from a PC serial port to the serial port on the back of the Platinum frame. Connect the X-Y to the router network. CAUTION: Make sure the X-Y network is terminated appropriately.
4 5 6
Start up both PC and terminal emulation application. Apply power to the Platinum frame. At the host machine keyboard, enter the letter Q. The Command Summary screen should appear on the PC screen.
Establishing Telnet Sessions for Ethernet Control Interface Products

Follow these steps to establish a Telnet session to the Platinum frame if the Telnet application is resident on a PC: 1 2 Connect an Ethernet crossover cable between the 10Base-T connector on a PC to the 10Base-T connector on the Platinum frame. Change the IP address of your PC to a static IP address compatible with the Platinum IP address. Invoking Telnet commands requires a valid username and password. The default username is leitch and the default password is leitchadmin. 3 4 5 6 7 At a DOS prompt, enter the word telnet and the IP address of the Platinum frame (for example, telnet 100.200.50.10). Press <Enter>. The Telnet screen will appear. Enter your login, and then press <Enter>. Enter your password, and then press <Enter>. The startup screen and the message Type Q for menu... will appear.
1 HyperTerminal,
a product of Hilgraeve Inc., is a communications applet that ships with Windows 95/ 98 and Windows NT 4.0.
385
Type in the letter Q (it will not appear on the screen), and then press <Enter>. The Command Summary screen will appear. Once a Telnet session is established, you will have access via the Telnet interface to the commands listed in this section.
Protocol Support for Platinum Routers

Table 9-1 Platinum Router Protocol Support Commands Command BUFFER Syntax BUFFER [#] [OFF|CLEAR] or B [#] [F|C] Input Parameters # = Buffer number F = Off C = Clear Result Depending on the input parameter: Causes a salvo buffer to be selected and automatically sets the Buffer mode ON Turns buffer OFF; subsequent crosspoint connection requests will be taken at the end of command line processing Clears the contents of a salvo buffer Cancels crosspoint or clears crosspoint request
CLEAR
CLEAR # [,#,#,...#] or C # [,#,#,...#] DESTINATION #[,#,...] or D# INFORMATION or I LEVEL # or L# POLL # or P# QUERY or Q
# = Destination numbers in currently selected level
DESTINATION
# = Destination number Completes crosspoint operations after the level number and the source number have been set None Provides information on the overall system as seen from the connection to the X-Y bus Sets the level number for a router that is connected to an active system Determines which destinations are connected to a specific source number Provides a list that includes a basic command syntax and brief description of each command
INFORMATION
LEVEL
#=Level number
POLL
#=Source number to be searched; may be any number 1 to 12 None
QUERY
386
Chapter 9 Terminal Operation
Table 9-1 Platinum Router Protocol Support Commands (Continued) Command READ Syntax READ or R Input Parameters None Result Lists all crosspoints within a frame in order by level numbers, and then by destination numbers that show which source is assigned to each of the destinations on that level Each crosspoint connection is represented by a numeric pair separated by a semicolon and a space: the first number is the destination number; the second number is the source number that is connected to that destination Sets the desired source number
SOURCE
SOURCE # or S#
# = Source number; can range from 1 to the maximum number of sources on that level, or X for disconnect ON = Turns on Echo mode OFF = Turns off Echo mode
TERMINAL
TERMINAL [ON|OFF] or T[/F]
When ECHO mode is ON, all the characters sent are echoed to the terminal When ECHO mode is OFF, messages sent are not echoed to the terminal
VERIFY
VERIFY # or V#
# = desired salvo buffer number (ranges from 1 to the maximum number of buffers available) [#L:]= Level number [#S] = Source number [#D,...] = Destination number
Shows current crosspoint requests stored in a particular salvo buffer
XPOINT XPOINT [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, .. ] (combines operations or of the LEVEL, X [#L:] [#S] [ ,#D,#D, ... ] SOURCE, and DESTINATION commands into one command; and allows multiple crosspoint connection requests in one command) ZERO ZERO or Z
The crosspoint is executed (you can use a READ command to confirm the crosspoint connection)
None
The device is restarted and status is cleared
387
Safety Precautions, Certifications,
Compliances Consignes de scurit, certifications, conformits

Carefully observe the safety alert symbols below for dangers, warnings, and cautions. They alert installers and operators of possible dangers or important information contained in this manual. Obervez prcautionneusement les symboles de scurit ci-aprs indiquant des dangers, des avertissements, et des prcautions. Ils alertent les installateurs et oprateurs des possibles dangers ou des importantes informations contenues dans ce manuel. Keep in mind, though, that warnings alone do not eliminate hazards, nor are they a substitute for safe operating techniques and proper accident prevention measures. Gardez l'esprit cependant que ces avertissements eux seuls n'liminent pas les risques et ne sont pas un remplacement aux techniques d'utilisation scuritaire et aux mesures de prvention des accidents. IMPORTANT! Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. The Platinum should be installed in a restricted access area, so that only qualified personnel have access to it. IMPORTANT! Seulement un personnel qualifi devrait effectuer les procdures de remplacement.
388
Appendix A Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances
Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual Termes de scurit et symboles utiliss dans ce manuel
WARNING: Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life. High voltage is present. AVERTISSEMENT: Message identifiant des conditions ou oprations qui peuvent rsulter en des blessures corporelles ou la perte de la vie. Une haute tension est prsente. CAUTION: Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property. ATTENTION: Message identifiant des conditions ou oprations qui peuvent rsulter en des dommages l'appareil ou aux installations.
Safety Terms and Symbols on the Product Termes de scurit et symboles sur l'appareil
DANGER: High voltage and indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessible as one reads the marking. DANGER: Haute tension et indique un risque de blesssures corporelles immdiatement accessible ds qu'une personne lit ce symbole. WARNING: Indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately accessible as one reads the marking. AVERTISSEMENT: Indique un risque de blesssures corporelles qui n'est pas immdiatement accessible ds qu'une personne lit ce symbole. CAUTION: Indicates a hazard to property, including the product, or to pay attention and refer to the manual. ATTENTION: Indique un risque aux installations, incluant l'appareil, ou de faire attention et de se referer au manuel. Protective ground (earth) terminal. Borne de terre de protection
389
Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Prvention des dcharges lectro-statiques

Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices. Prendre des prcautions durant la manipulation d'appareils sensibles aux charges lectro-statiques.
CAUTION: Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage components in the product. To prevent ESD, observe these precautions when directed to do so: ATTENTION: Les dcharges lectro-statiques peuvent endommager les composants de l'appareil. Pour prvenir ces dcharges, observez ces prcautions lorsque le manuel le demande 1 Use a ground strap. Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap to discharge the static voltage from your body while installing or removing sensitive components. Utiliser une connection de mise la terre. Porter un bracelet anti-statique connect une borne de mise la terre pour dcharger la tension lectro-statique de votre corps durant l'installation ou l'enlvement des composants sensibles. 2 Use a Safe work area. Do not use any devices capable of generating or holding a static charge in the work area where you install or remove sensitive components. Avoid handling sensitive components in areas that have a floor or benchtop surface capable of generating a static charge. Utiliser une zone de travail scuritaire. N'utiliser aucun appareil capable de gnrer ou retenir une charge statique dans la zone de travail o vous installez ou remplacez des composants sensibles 3 Handle components carefully. Do not slide sensitive components over any surface. Do not touch exposed connector pins. Handle sensitive components as little as possible. Manipuler les composants avec prcautions. Ne pas glisser des composants sensibles sur aucune surface. Ne pas toucher les contacts des connecteurs qui sont exposs. Manipuler les composants sensibles le moins souvent possible. 4 Transport and store carefully. Transport and store sensitive components in a static-protected bag or container. Transporter et ranger avec prcautions. Transporter et ranger les composants sensibles dans un sac anti-statique ou une bote.
390
Injury Precautions Prcautions contre les risques de blessures

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages are present within the frame during normal operation. The AC power cord must be disconnected from the frame before the top panel is removed. (In frames with multiple power supplies, remove ALL power cords.) Power should not be applied to the frame while the top is open unless properly trained personnel are servicing the unit. Pull out the plug(s) from the main socket before the removal of a cover. AVERTISSEMENT Des tensions mortelles peuvent tre prsentes l'intrieur d'un chassis durant son utilisation normale. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre dconnect du chassis avant d'enlever le panneau suprieur. Dans les chassis ayant des alimentations multiples, enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation. Le chassis ne devrait pas tre sous tension lorsque le panneau suprieur est enlev, sauf si un personnel qualifi est en train de faire l'entretien de l'unit. Retirer le cordon d'alimentation de la prise situe sur le chassis avant d'enlever un panneau de protection. Przod zdjeciem pokrywy wyciagnac wtyczke z gniazda sieciowego. WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD - DO NOT OPEN. AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE DE CHOC LECTRIQUE - NE PAS OUVRIR. INSTALLER SUR SUPPORT DE MONTAGE SEULEMENT (BAIE DE MONTAGE). Use proper power cord Utiliser un cordon d'alimentation convenable To avoid fire hazard, use only the power cord specified for this product. Afin d'viter les risques d'incendie, utiliser seulement le cordon d'alimentation spcifi pour cet appareil. Do not operate without covers Ne pas utiliser sans les panneaux de protection To avoid electrical shock or fire hazard, do not operate this product with covers or panels removed. Pour viter les risques de choc lectrique ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec les panneaux de protection enlevs. Do not operate in wet/damp conditions Ne pas utiliser dans des conditions humides To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in wet or damp conditions. Pour viter les risques de blessures ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet appareil dans des conditions humides.
391
Ground the product Connecter l'appareil la terre This is a Safety Class 1 product and is electrically grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid electrical shock, the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the products input or output terminals, ensure the product is properly grounded. Cet appareil appartient la classe 1 des normes de scurit Il est reli la terre au moyen du conducteur de mise la terre faisant partie du cordon d'alimentation. Pour viter tout risque de choc lectrique, le connecteur de mise la terre doit tre reli une borne de terre. Avant de faire les connections aux connecteurs d'entres et de sorties, s'assurer que l'appareil est correctement reli la terre. WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE GROUNDED. WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED. AVERTISSEMENT: CET APPAREIL DOIT RELIE A LA TERRE. VARNING: APPARATEN SKALL ANSLUTAS TILL JORDAT UTTAG NR DEN ANSLUTS TILL ETT NTVERK. Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere Ne pas utiliser dans une atmostphre explosive To avoid injury or fire hazard, do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere. Pour viter les risques de blessures ou d'incendie, ne pas utiliser cet appareil dans une atmosphre explosive. Avoid Exposed Circuitry Eviter les circuits exposs To avoid injury, remove jewelry such as rings, watches, and other metallic objects. Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present. Pour viter les risques de blessures, enlever les bijoux tels qu'anneaux, montres, et autres objets mtalliques. Ne pas toucher les composants et connections exposes lorsque l'alimentation est prsente.
392
Product Damage Precautions Prcautions pour viter les dommages l'appareil

Use Proper Power Source Utiliser une source d'alimentation approprie Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than the specified voltage. Ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec une source d'alimentation fournissant un voltage suprieur celui requis. Provide Proper Ventilation Fournir une correcte ventilation To prevent product overheating, provide proper ventilation. Pour prvenir une surchauffe de cet appareil, fournir une correcte ventilation. Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures Ne pas utiliser un appareil dfectueux If you suspect there is damage to this product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel. Si vous suspectez que cet appareil est endommag, faites-le inspecter par un personnel d'entretien qualifi. CAUTION: This unit can have more than one power supply cord. To de-energize the internal circuitry, you have to disconnect all power cords. ATTENTION: Cette unit peut avoir plus d'un cordon d'alimentation. Pour enlever toute source de voltage sur les circuits internes, vous devez enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation. ADVARSEL: Utstyret kan ha mere ennn en tilfrselsledning. For gjore interne deler spennigslse m alle tilfrselsledningene trekkes ut. VARNING: Denna apparat har mer n en ntanslutning. Samtliga ntkablar mste bortkopplas fr att gra de interna kretsarna spnningsfria. FUSE: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE AND RATING OF FUSE. FUSIBLE: REMPLACER AVEC LE MEME TYPE ET CALIBRE DE FUSIBLE. CAUTION: REPLACE WITH SAME TYPE FUSE. ATTENTION: UTILISER UN FUSIBLE DE RECHANGE DE MME TYPE. CAUTION: DISCONNECT SUPPLY CORD BEFORE CHANGING FUSE. ATTENTION: DBRANCHER AVANT DE REMPLACER LE FUSIBLE. ACHTUNG: VOR AUSWECHSELN DER SICHERUNG IST DAS GERT VOM NETZ ZU TRENNEN. Use Proper Power Source Utiliser une source d'alimentation approprie Do not operate this product from a power source that supplies more than the specified voltage. Ne pas utiliser cet appareil avec une source d'alimentation fournissant un voltage suprieur celui requis.
393
CAUTION ATTENTION This equipment has more than one power supply cord. To reduce the risk of electric shock, disconnect all power cords before servicing. Cet appareil possede plus d'un cordon d'alimentation Afin de reduire les risques de chocs electriques, enlever tous les cordons d'alimentation avant de faire l'entretien. CAUTION ATTENTION DC Platinum frames shoud be grounded using eight-gauge stranded copper wire crimped to the dual lug compression terminal provided on the frame. Les chassis Platinum aliments par courant continu devraient tre mis la terre par un fil conducteur multibrins en cuivre, de calibre 8, serti sur la cosse de connection deux vis fournie avec le chassis.
394
EMC and Safety Standards Normes de scurit et de compliance lectro-magntique (EMC)

This product has been tested and found to comply with the following IEC, FCC, UL, ICES, and CSA standards, per the provision of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/ 336/EEC of 3 May 1989 as amended by 92/31EEC of 28 April 1992 and 93/68/EEC, Article 5 of 22 July 1993, and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973. Cet appareil a t vrifi et trouv conforme avec les normes CEI, FCC, UL, NMB, et CSA, et les dispositions de la Directive sur la compatibilit lectro-magntique 89/336/EEC du 3 Mai 1989 et de ses amendements 92/31/EEC du 28 avril 1992 et 93/68/EEC, article 5, du 22 juillet 1993, et la Directive sur les basses tensions 73/23/EEC du 19 fvrier 1973. These devices are for professional use only and comply with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1 2 These devices may cause interference to radio and TV receivers in residential areas. These devices will accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Harris Corporation, the party responsible for compliance to the FCC Part 15 Rule, could void the users authority to operate this equipment legally in the United States. These devices do not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference standard entitled Digital apparatus, ICES-003, from Industry Canada. Cet appareil est pour usage professionnel seulement et est conforme avec la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes 1 2 Cet appareil peut causer des interfrences aux rcepteurs radio et TV situs dans des zones rsidentielles. Cet appareil acceptera toute interfrence reue, incluant les interfrences qui peuvent affecter son utilisation. Les remplacements ou modifications qui ne sont pas approuves par Harris CorporationMC, la compagnie responsable pour la conformit avec la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC, peuvent annuler l'autorisation de l'utilisateur utiliser cet appareil lgalement aux Etats-Unis. Cet appareil n'excde pas les limites de la Classe A pour les perturbations radio-lectriques provenant d'appareils numriques telles que dcrites dans la Norme sur le Matriel Brouilleur NMB-003, intitule Appareils numriques et publie par Industrie Canada.
Additional EMC Information Compatibilit lectro-magntique (CEM) - Information additionnelle

This device is for professional use in a controlled EMC environment, such as purpose-built broadcast studios.
395
Cet appareil est conu pour un usage professionnel dans un environnement rencontrant les normes de CEM, tel que des studios de diffusion spcialement construits cet effet. EMC regulations require that the radiation emitted from this unit does not exceed certain limits. These limits are only met when the front panel is closed and secured. Les rglements concernant la CEM exigent que les radiations mises partir de cette unit n'excdent pas certaines limites. Ces limites sont seulement rencontres lorsque le panneau frontal est ferm et les deux crous de fixation serrs. Compliance to the EMC regulations is also dependent on the use of suitably shielded (screened) cables. Coax cables should be of the double-shielded (screened) variety. Unused BNCs should be fitted with 75 terminations. La conformit avec les rglements de CEM depend aussi de l'utilisation de cbles convenablement blinds. Les cbles coaxiaux devraient avoir un double blindage. Les connecteurs BNC non utiliss devraient tre termins avec une charge de 75 Ohms. All audio cables should be screened with the shield (screen) making good contact with the metallic parts of the cable connectors. Tous les cbles audio devraient tre blinds avec le blindage ayant un bon contact avec les parties mtalliques du connecteur utilis pour ces cbles. D-type connectors used with this unit should always have metallic shells with the shield (screen) of the cable mechanically bonded to the metal shell. It is further recommended that the D-type cable connectors be of the dimple variety. These connectors make a better contact and consequently improve EMC performance. Les connecteurs de type D utiliss avec cette unit devraient toujours avoir des coquilles mtalliques et le blindage du cble attach mcaniquement la coquille mtallique. Il est de plus recommand que ces connecteurs de type D soient d'une varit avec empreinte. Ces connecteurs permettent un meilleur contact et ceci amliore la performance de la CEM. Table A-1 Harmonized and Reference IEC Safety and EMC Standards Harmonized Standard UL 60950-1/ CSA-C22.2 EN55103-1, 2 Reference IEC Standard IEC 60950-1 Description Safety of Information Technology Equipment for North America and Canada, with Certified Body (CB) Report with all country deviations FCC Part 15 regulations and European EMC standards for application of the CE Mark
EN55103-1, 2
396
397
Laser Safety Guidelines
General Laser Information

WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified in this document may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure. Optical fiber telecommunication systems, their associated test sets, and similar operating systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared (IR) light at wavelengths between approximately 800 nanometers and 1600 nanometers. The emitted light is above the red end of the visible spectrum, which is normally not visible to the human eye. Although radiant energy at near-IR wavelengths is officially designated invisible, some people can see the shorter wavelength energy even at power levels several orders of magnitude below any that have been shown to cause injury to the eye. Conventional lasers can produce an intense beam of monochromatic light. (The term monochromaticity means a single wavelength output of pure color that may be visible or invisible to the eye.) A conventional laser produces a small-sized beam of light, and because the beam size is small the power density (also called irradiance) is very high. Consequently, for their safe operation, lasers and laser products are subject to federal and applicable state (USA) regulations, as well as international standards. A conventional laser beam expands very little over distance, or is said to be very well collimated; thus, conventional laser irradiance remains relatively constant over distance. Lasers used in lightwave systems, however, have a large beam divergence, which is typically 10 to 20 degrees. Here, irradiance obeys the inverse square law (doubling the distance reduces the irradiance by a factor of 4) and rapidly decreases over distance.
398
Appendix B Laser Safety Guidelines
Lasers and Eye Damage

The optical energy emitted by laser and high-radiance LEDs in the 400-1400 nm range may cause eye damage. When a beam of light enters the eye, the eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina magnifying the irradiance. The irradiance of the energy that reaches the retina is approximately 105 or 100,000 times more than at the cornea and, if sufficiently intense, may burn the retina. The damage mechanism at the wavelengths used in an optical fiber telecommunications is thermal in origin, i.e., damage caused by heating. A specific amount of energy is required for a definite time to heat an area of retinal tissue. Damage to the retina occurs only when you look at the light sufficiently long that the product of the retinal irradiance and the viewing time exceeds the damage threshold. Optical energies above 1400 nm cause corneal and skin burns but do not affect the retina. The thresholds for injury at wavelengths greater than 1400 nm are significantly higher than for wavelengths in the retinal hazard region
Classification of Lasers
Manufacturers of lasers and laser products in the U.S. are regulated by the Food and Drug Administrations Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) under 21 CFR 1040. These regulations require manufacturers to certify each laser or laser product as belonging to one of four major Classes: I, II, IIa, IIIa, IIIb, or IV. The International Electro-Technical Commission is an international standards body that writes laser safety standards under IEC-60825. Classification schemes are similar with Classes divided into Classes 1, 2, 3A, 3B, and 4. Lasers are classified according to the accessible emission limits and their potential for causing injury. Optical fiber telecommunication systems are generally classified as Class I/1 because, under normal operating conditions, all energized laser transmitting modules are terminated on optical fibers which enclose the laser energy with the fiber sheath forming a protective housing. Also, a protective housing/access panel is typically installed in front of the laser modules frames. The modules themselves, however, may be FDA/CDRH Class I or IIIb; or IEC Class 1, 3A, or 3B.
Laser Safety Precautions for Optical Fiber Communication Systems

In its normal operating mode, an optical fiber communication system is totally enclosed and presents no risk of eye injury. It is a Class I/1 system under the FDA and IEC classifications. The fiber optic cables that interconnect various components of an optical fiber can disconnect or break, and may expose people to laser emissions. Also, certain measures and maintenance procedures may expose the technician to emission from the semiconductor laser during installation and servicing.
Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual Unlike more familiar laser devices, such as solid-state and gas lasers, the emission pattern of a semiconductor laser results in a highly divergent beam. In a divergent beam, the irradiance (power density) decreases rapidly with distance. The greater the distance, the less energy will enter the eye, and the less potential risk for eye injury. Inadvertently viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber with the unaided eye at distances greater than 5 to 6 in. (127 to 152 mm) normally will not cause eye injury, provided that the power in the fiber is less than a few milliwatts at the near IR wavelengths and a few tens of milliwatts at the far IR wavelengths.
399
Laser Safety
WARNING: Use of controls, adjustments, and procedures other than those specified in this document may result in hazardous laser radiation exposure. Optical fiber telecommunication systems use semiconductor laser transmitters that emit infrared light that is normally not visible to the human eye. Although a conventional laser produces a small beam of light, the power density is very high, and it can damage your eyes. If a beam of laser light enters the eye, the eye magnifies and focuses the energy on the retina. The energy that reaches the retina can be as much as 100,000 times more than at the cornea and, as a result, it can burn the retina. Laser transmission products are classified in four major groups (Class 1, 2, 3, and 4), according to their emissions and potential for causing injury. Fiber optic transmitter modules in this series are designated Class 1.
Precautions for Enclosed Systems

Under normal operating conditions, optical fiber telecommunication systems are completely enclosed; nonetheless, observe the following precautions: 1 2 3 Because of the potential for eye damage, technicians should not stare into optical connectors or broken fibers. Under no circumstance shall laser/fiber optic operations be performed by a technician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course. Since viewing laser emissions directly in excess of Class I/1 limits with an optical instrument such as an eye loupe greatly increases the risk of eye damage, appropriate labels must appear in plain view, in close proximity to the optical port on the protective housing/access panel of the terminal equipment. WARNING: Eye damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to stare at the energized fiber end.
400
Precautions for Unenclosed Systems

During service, maintenance, or restoration, an optical fiber telecommunication system is considered unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow these practices: CAUTION: Only authorized, trained personnel shall be permitted to do service, maintenance, and restoration. 1 Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated, energized optical connectors at close distances. Laser modules associated with the optical ports of laser circuit packs are typically recessed, which limits the exposure distance. Optical port shutters, Automatic Power Reduction (APR), and Automatic Power Shut Down (APSD) are engineering controls that are also used to limit the emissions. However, technicians removing or replacing laser modules should not stare or look directly into the optical port with optical instruments or magnifying lenses. (Normal eyewear or indirect viewing instruments such as Find-R-Scopes are not considered magnifying lenses or optical instruments). 2 3 4 Ensure that only authorized, trained personnel use optical test equipment during installation or servicing. Turn off all laser sources before scanning a fiber with an optical test set. Keep all unauthorized personnel away from the immediate area of the optical fiber systems during installation and service. For guidance on the safe use of optical fiber communication systems in the workplace, consult ANSI Z136.2, American National Standard for Safe Use of Lasers in the U.S. or outside the U.S., IEC-60825, Part 2.
401
Labels
The Class 1 Laser Products label (see Figure B-1) is applicable to Class 1 laser products. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001 CAUTION:INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.
Figure B-1 Label for Class 1 Laser Products The Class 1M Laser Radiation label (see Figure B-2) is applicable to Class 1M laser products.
CAUTION: LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. CAUTION: CLASS 1M INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS (magnifiers).
Figure B-2 Label for Class 1M Laser Radiation
Specifications
See page 119 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HS1310S-IB laser input modules. See page 125 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HSO-IB+ laser input modules. See page 255 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HSR1310S-OB laser output modules. See page 197 for a list of optical specifications for PT-HSRO-OB+ and PT-HSRO-OBG+ laser output modules.
402
403
Index
Symbols
162
A
Adding frames Add command 351 discovering 351 polling 351 Adjustable frame delay 143 ADS (ancillary data stripper) 139 Alarm module. See PM-ALARM-5; PT-ALARM Ancillary data 138 Append embedding 139, 140 Application parameters frame 347 RouterMapper 352355 Architecture frame sizes 3 matrix sizes 3 output monitoring 5RU 298 9RU 299 15RU 300 28RU 301 physical 46 Audio synchronization 143 test tone 138
PT-AEC-OBP 15, 221, 227, 330 PT-AECT-IBP 15 PT-AECT-OBP 15 PT-FO-BMI 15, 117, 121, 330 PT-FO-BMO 15, 255, 330 PT-HS-BP+ 15, 182 PT-SFP2X4+BM 15, 121 PT-V-BP 15, 59, 64, 67, 72, 92, 187, 202, 207,
211, 216, 235, 330
Block diagrams crosspoint modules basic signal flow 280,

281
B
B# command. See BUFFER command Back panel modules descriptions 14 installation 330 PT-A2-BP 14, 96, 98, 107, 108, 239, 246, 330 PT-A2-DTB 14 PT-AEB-IBP 14, 76, 83, 330 PT-AEB-OBP 14, 221, 227, 330 PT-AEC-BOC 15, 76, 83 PT-AEC-IBP 15, 76, 83, 330
output module basic signal flow 180 output monitoring module basic signal flow 302 PM-128128-3G9 280 PM-128128-X9 280 PM-4032-3G5 281 PM-6464-3G9 280 PM-6464-X9 280 PM-7264-3G5 281 PM-ADC-IB 102 PM-ADCT-IB 113 PM-AEB-IB 78 PM-AEB-OB 223 PM-AEBT-IB 86 PM-AEBT-OB 230 PM-AEC-IB 78 PM-AEC-OB 223 PM-AECT-IB 86 PM-AECT-OB 230 PM-ATDM16-X9 296 PM-ATDM9-X5 296 PM-DAC-OB 242 PM-DATC-OB 250 PM-DEC-IB 94 PM-ENC-DOB 237 PM-ENC-OB 237 PM-HS-IB+ 62, 66 PM-HSR-DOB 204 PM-HSR-OB 204 PM-HSR-OB+ 190 PM-HSR-OBG+ 185
404
Index
PM-S-IB 73 PM-S-IB+ 70 PM-SR-DOB 218 PM-SR-OB 218 PM-SR-OB+ 213 PM-SR-OBG+ 209 PT-128256-3G15 280 PT-128256-3G28 280 PT-128256-X15 280 PT-128256-X28 280 PT-ADC-IB 102 PT-ADCT-IB 113 PT-AEB-IB 78, 86 PT-AEB-OB 223 PT-AEBT-IB 86 PT-AEC-IB 78, 86 PT-AEC-OB 223 PT-AECT-IB 86 PT-ATDM16-X15 296 PT-ATDM32-X15 296 PT-ATDM32-X28 296 PT-ATDM64-X28 296 PT-DAC-OB 242 PT-DACT-OB 250 PT-DEC-IB 94 PT-DMX 134 PT-DMX-3G 134 PT-ENC-DOB 237 PT-ENC-OB 237 PT-FSDMX-IBG 152 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 152 PT-HS1310S-IB 119, 125 PT-HS-IB+ 62, 66 PT-HSO-IB+ 125 PT-HSR1310S-OB 198, 257 PT-HSR1D-IBG 161 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 161 PT-HSRAEC-OM 311 PT-HSR-DOB 204 PT-HSR-OB 204 PT-HSR-OB+ 190 PT-HSR-OBG+ 185 PT-HSR-OM 302, 305 PT-HSRO-OB+ 198 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 198 PT-MADI4C-OBG 267 PT-MUX 265, 311 PT-MUX-3G 265, 311 PT-S-IB 73 PT-S-IB+ 70 PT-SR-DOB 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB+ 209, 213 PT-SYNC 52 TDM signal flow 296 BUFFER command 385
C
Card-edge controls 344346 CLEAR command 385 Commands BUFFER 385 CLEAR 385 DESTINATION 385 INFORMATION 385 LEVEL 385 POLL 385 QUERY 385 READ 386 SOURCE 386 TERMINAL 386 VERIFY 386 XPOINT 386 ZERO 386 Common issues 340 Communications back panel. See PM5-CBP; PT-CBP Components frames 10, 2324, 2427, 2728, 2933, 34
37, 3840, 4142, 4344, 4647
modules 1115 replacing 342 Configuration crosspoint modules 295 PM-128128-X9 289 PM-4032-3G5 282 PM-6464-3G9 285 PM-6464-X9 285 PM-7264-3G5 286 PM-ADC-IB 99 PM-ADCT-IB 109 PM-AEB-IB 77 PM-AEB-OB 222 PM-AEBT-IB 84 PM-AEBT-OB 228 PM-AEC-IB 77 PM-AEC-OB 222 PM-AECT-IB 84 PM-AECT-OB 228 PM-DAC-OB 241 PM-DACT-OB 247 PM-ENC-DOB 235 PM-ENC-OB 235 PM-HS-IB 65 PM-HS-IB+ 60 PM-HSR-DOB 203 PM-HSR-OB 203 PM-HSR-OB+ 188 PM-HSR-OBG+ 183 PM-MI 24 PM-S-IB 72 PM-S-IB+ 68 PM-SR-DOB 216 PM-SR-OB 216
405
PM-SR-OB+ 211 PM-SR-OBG+ 207 PT-128256-3G15 291 PT-128256-3G28 291 PT-128256-X15 291 PT-128256-X28 291 PT-ADC-IB 99 PT-ADCT-IB 109 PT-AEB-IB 77 PT-AEB-OB 222 PT-AEBT-IB 84 PT-AEC-IB 77 PT-AEC-OB 222 PT-AECT-IB 84 PT-DAC-OB 241 PT-DACT-OB 247 PT-DEC-IB 92 PT-DMX 129 PT-DMX-3G 129 PT-ENC-DOB 235 PT-ENC-OB 235 PT-EXPS 44 PT-HS1310S-IB 117 PT-HS-IB 65 PT-HS-IB+ 60 PT-HSO-IB+ 122 PT-HSR1310S-OB 194, 255 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 157 PT-HSRAEC-OM 309 PT-HSR-DOB 203 PT-HSR-OB 203 PT-HSR-OB+ 188 PT-HSR-OBG+ 183 PT-HSR-OM 304 PT-HSRO-OB+ 194 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 194 PT-MI 24 PT-MUX 261 PT-MUX-3G 261 PT-PD 42 PT-S-IB 72 PT-S-IB+ 68 PT-SR-DOB 216 PT-SR-OB 216 PT-SR-OB+ 211 PT-SR-OBG+ 207 PT-SYNC 51 PT-SYNC-MI 53 RouterMapper 350355 Sync reference points 356363 TDM audio matrices 364?? Control packet 139 Controls card-edge 344346 features 1720 Crosspoint modules basic signal flow diagram 280 general description 278
installation 321 PM-128128-3G9 block diagram 280 configuration 289 description 13, 288 installation 288, 321 operation 288 parameters 289 specifications 289 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-128128-X9 block diagram 280 configuration 289 description 13, 288 installation 288, 321 operation 288 parameters 289 specifications 289 PM-4032-3G5 block diagram 281 configuration 282 description 13, 282283 installation 282 operation 282 parameters 283 specifications 283 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-6464-3G9 block diagram 280 configuration 285 description 13, 284, 284 installation 284, 319 operation 284 parameters 285 specifications 285 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-6464-X9 block diagram 280 configuration 285 description 13, 282, 284, 284, 286 installation 284, 319 operation 284 parameters 285 specifications 285 PM-7264-3G5 block diagram 281 configuration 286 description 13, 286287 installation 286 operation 286 parameters 287 specifications 287 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-ATDM16-X9 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 293 installation 295, 321
406
Index
operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PM-ATDM9-X5 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 293 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-128256-3G15 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 upgrade procedures 315318 PT-128256-3G28 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 upgrade procedures 315318 PT-128256-X15 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 PT-128256-X28 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 PT-ATDM16-X15 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-ATDM32-X15 block diagram 296 configuration 295
description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-ATDM32-X28 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-ATDM64-X28 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 TDM signal flow diagram 281, 296
D
D# command. See DESTINATION command De-embedder modules. See PT-DX-SB De-embedder modules. See PT-MXDX-SB De-embedding control parameter 138 Delay mode 142 Descriptions back panel modules 14 PT-A2-BP 14 PT-A2-DTB 14 PT-AEB-IBP 14 PT-AEB-OBP 14 PT-AEC-BOC 15 PT-AEC-IBP 15 PT-AEC-OBP 15 PT-AECT-IBP 15 PT-AECT-OBP 15 PT-FO-BMI 15 PT-FO-BMO 15 PT-HS-BP+ 15 PT-SFP2X4+BM 15 PT-V-BP 15 crosspoint modules 278 PM-128128-3G9 13, 288 PM-128128-X9 13, 288 PM-4032-3G5 13, 282283 PM-6464-3G9 13, 284, 284 PM-6464-X9 13, 282, 284, 284, 286 PM-7264-3G5 13, 286287 PM-ATDM16-X9 14, 292, 293
407
PM-ATDM9-X5 14, 292, 293 PT-128256-3G15 14, 290 PT-128256-3G28 14, 290 PT-128256-X15 14, 290 PT-128256-X28 14, 290 PT-ATDM16-X15 14, 292, 294 PT-ATDM32-X15 14, 292, 294 PT-ATDM32-X28 14, 292, 294 PT-ATDM64-X28 14, 292, 294 frame-specific modules 10, 2324, 2427,
2728, 2933, 3437, 3840, 41, 43, 46, 48, 53 input modules 1112, 5657 PM-ADC-IB 11, 96105 PM-ADCT-IB 11, 106116 PM-AEB-IB 11, 7576 PM-AEBT-IB 8289 PM-AEC-IB 11, 7576 PM-AECT-IB 8289 PM-DEC-IB 11, 9095 PM-HS-IB 11, 6366 PM-HS-IB+ 11, 5963 PM-HSO-IB+ 11, 120121 PM-S-IB 12, 7174 PM-S-IB+ 12, 67 PT-ADC-IB 11, 96105 PT-ADCT-IB 11, 106116 PT-AEB-IB 11, 7576 PT-AEBT-IB 11, 8289 PT-AEC-IB 7576 PT-AECT-IB 11, 8289 PT-DEC-IB 11, 9095 PT-DMX 11, 127134 PT-DMX-3G 11, 127134 PT-FSDMX-IBG 135154 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 135154 PT-HS1310S-IB 11, 116120 PT-HS-IB 11, 6366 PT-HS-IB+ 11, 5963 PT-HSO-IB+ 120121 PT-S-IB 12, 7174 PT-S-IB+ 12, 67 output modules 1213, 18??, 177178 PM-AEB-OB 12, 220225 PM-AEBT-OB 12, 226232 PM-AEC-OB 12, 220225 PM-AECT-OB 12, 226232 PM-DAC-OB 12, 239245 PM-DACT-OB 12, 246253 PM-ENC-DOB 12, 233238 PM-ENC-OB 12, 233238 PM-HSR-DOB 12, 200205 PM-HSR-OB 12, 200205 PM-HSR-OB+ 12, 186191 PM-HSR-OBG+ 13, 181186 PM-SR-DOB 13 PM-SR-OB 13, 215219 PM-SR-OB+ 13, 210214
PM-SR-OBG+ 13, 206210 PT-AEB-OB 12, 220225 PT-AEBT-OB 12, 226232 PT-AEC-OB 12, 220225 PT-AECT-OB 12, 226232 PT-DAC-OB 12, 239245 PT-DACT-OB 12, 246253 PT-ENC-DOB 12, 233238 PT-ENC-OB 12, 233238 PT-HSR1310S-OB 12, 254258 PT-HSR-DOB 12, 200205 PT-HSR-OB 12, 200205 PT-HSR-OB+ 12, 186191 PT-HSR-OBG+ 13, 181186 PT-HSRO-OB+ 13, 192199 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 13, 192199 PT-MUX 13, 259266 PT-MUX-3G 13, 259266 PT-SR-DOB 13, 215219 PT-SR-OB 13 PT-SR-OB+ 13, 210214 PT-SR-OBG+ 13, 206210 output monitoring modules 14, 298301 product description 1 DESTINATION command 385 Dolby-E header alignment 144
E
Electrical specifications 21 Embed mode parameters 139 Embedder ancillary data 139 Embedder modules. See PT-MX-SB Establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet control interface products 384 Establishing a terminal operation session for serial control interface products 384 External power supply frame. See PT-EXPS
F
Fail-safe parameters, frame 348350 Fan modules PM-FAN-5 10, 4647 PM-FAN-8 10, 48 PT-FAN-14 10, 48 PT-FAN-16 10, 48 Fast switch 138 Features 2, 1720 Fiber optical modules PT-HS1310S-IB back panel modules 117 block diagram 119 configuration 117 description 11, 116120
408
Index
installation 117, 323327 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 116117 specifications 119 PT-HSO-IB+ back panel modules 121 block diagram 125 configuration 122 description 11, 120121 installation 121122 laser safety guidelines 397401 parameters 122 specifications 126 PT-HSR1310S-OB back panel modules 255 block diagram 257 configuration 255 description 12, 254 installation 255, 323327 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 254255 parameters 256 specifications 257 PT-HSRO-OB+ 192199 back panel modules 193 block diagram 198 configuration 194 description 13 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 192?? output monitoring modules 193 specifications 199 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 192199 back panel modules 193 block diagram 198 configuration 194 description 13 installation 323327 operation 192?? output monitoring modules 193 specifications 199 Field upgrades 342 Frame synchronization, video 142 Frames adding frames 351 architecture 39 components 10, 2324, 2427, 2728, 29
33, 3437, 3840, 4142, 4344, 4647
PT-ALARM 3437 PT-CPB 2427 PT-EXPS 4344 PT-FAN-14 48 PT-FAN-16 48 PT-MI-15 23 PT-MI-28 23 PT-PD 4142 PT-PS 3840 PT-RES 2728 PT-SYNC 4953 PT-SYNC-MI 53 parameters application parameters 347 fail-safe parameters 348350 sizes 3 specifications electrical 21 mechanical 21
H
Horizontal timing 143
I
I command. See INFORMATION command Indicators 15 INFORMATION command 385 Injury precautions 390 Input modules applications integration 57 control requirements 57 general description 5657 installation 319 LEDs 57 PM-ADC-IB back panel modules 99 block diagram 102 configuration 99 description 11, 96 installation 99 operation 9698 parameters 100101 specifications 103105 PM-ADCT-IB back panel modules 109 block diagram 113 configuration 109 description 11, 106 installation 109 operation 106108 parameters 110112 specifications 114116 PM-AEB-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78 configuration 77
default settings 346 installing 340 modules crosspoint modules 277296 input modules 55135 output modules 175199 output monitoring modules 297312 PM-ALARM-5 3233 PM-FAN-5 4647 PM-FAN-8 48
409
description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 specifications 80 PM-AEBT-IB back panel module 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 operation 8283 parameters 8485 specifications 87 PM-AEC-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78 configuration 77 description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 specifications 80 PM-AECT-IB back panel modules 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 operation 8283 parameters 8485 specifications 89 PM-DEC-IB back panel modules 92 block diagram 94 description 11, 90, 9095 operation 9092 parameters 9293 specifications 95 PM-HS-IB back panel modules 64 configuration 65 description 11 installation 64 operation 63 parameters 65 specifications 66 PM-HS-IB+ back panel modules 59 block diagram 62, 66 configuration 60 description 11 installation 60 operation 59 parameters 6061 specifications 63 PM-S-IB back panel modules 72
block diagram 73 configuration 72 description 12, 71 installation 72 operation 71 parameters 7273 specifications 74 PM-S-IB+ back panel modules 67 block diagram 70 configuration 68 description 12, 67 installation 68 operation 67 parameters 6869 specifications 71 PT-ADC-IB back panel modules 99 block diagram 102 configuration 99 description 11, 96 installation 99 operation 9698 parameters 100101 specifications 103105 PT-ADCT-IB back panel modules 109 block diagram 113 configuration 109 description 11, 106 installation 109 operation 106108 parameters 110112 specifications 114116 PT-AEB-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78, 86 configuration 77 description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 specifications 80 PT-AEBT-IB back panel modules 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 parameters 8485 specifications 88 PT-AEC-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78, 86 configuration 77 description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576
410
Index
parameters 77 specifications 81 PT-AECT-IB back panel modules 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 parameters 8485 specifications 89 PT-DEC-IB back panel modules 92 block diagram 94 configuration 92 description 11, 90, 9095 installation 92 operation 9092 parameters 9293 specifications 95 PT-DMX description 11 PT-DMX-3G description 11 PT-HS1310S-IB back panel modules 117 block diagram 119, 125 configuration 117 description 11, 116120 installation 117, 323327 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 116117 specifications 120, 126 PT-HS-IB back panel modules 64 configuration 65 description 11 installation 64, 319 operation 63 parameters 65 specifications 66 PT-HS-IB+ back panel modules 59 block diagram 62, 66 configuration 60 description 11 installation 60 operation 59 parameters 6061 specifications 63 PT-HSO-IB+ back panel modules 121 block diagram 125 configuration 122 description 11, 120121 installation 121122 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 120121 parameters 122
specifications 126 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG back panel modules 156 block diagram 161 configuration 157 Input Expansion 156 installation 157 operation 155 parameters 158 PT-MADI4C-IBG back panel modules 164 block diagram 163 operation 164 parameters 172 Sample Mapping Scenarios 168 specifications 172 TDM Mapping 167 PT-S-IB back panel modules 72 block diagram 73 configuration 72 description 12, 71 installation 72 operation 71 parameters 7273 specifications 74 PT-S-IB+ back panel modules 67 block diagram 70 configuration 68 description 12, 67 installation 68 operation 67 parameters 6869 specifications 71 Installation back panel modules 330 checklist 340 crosspoint modules 295, 321 fans 337 fiber optical modules 323327 frames 340 input modules 319 output modules 319 output monitoring modules 328 PM-AEB-OB 221222, 319 PM-AEBT-OB 227228, 319 PM-AEC-OB 221222, 319 PM-AECT-OB 227228, 319 PM-ALARM-5 32 PM-ATDM16-X9 295, 321 PM-ATDM9-X5 295, 321 PM-DAC-OB 240, 319 PM-DACT-OB 247, 319 PM-ENC-DOB 235, 319 PM-ENC-OB 235, 319 PM-FAN-5 47, 337 PM-FAN-8 48, 337
411
PM-HS-IB+ 60 PM-HSR-DOB 202, 319320 PM-HSR-OB 202, 319320 PM-MI 24 PM-S-IB+ 68 PM-SR-DOB 216, 319 PM-SR-OB 216, 319 PM-SR-OB+ 211 PT-AEB-OB 221222, 319 PT-AEBT-OB 221, 319 PT-AEC-OB 221222, 319 PT-AECT-OB 221, 319 PT-ALARM 36, 329 PT-ATDM16-X15 295, 321 PT-ATDM32-X15 295, 321 PT-ATDM32-X28 295, 321 PT-ATDM64-X28 295, 321 PT-DAC-OB 240, 319 PT-DACT-OB 247, 319 PT-DMX 129 PT-DMX-3G 129 PT-ENC-DOB 235, 319 PT-ENC-OB 235, 319 PT-EXPS 43 PT-FAN 48, 337 PT-HS1310S-IB 117, 323327 PT-HS-IB+ 60 PT-HSO-IB+ 121122 PT-HSR1310S-OB 194, 255, 323327 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 157 PT-HSRAEC-OM 309 PT-HSR-DOB 202, 319 PT-HSR-OB 202, 319 PT-HSR-OM 304, 328 PT-HSRO-OB+ 194 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 194 PTM-ATDM64-X28 295 PT-MI 24 PT-MUX 261 PT-MUX-3G 261 PT-PS 39, 335336 PT-PS-DC 39, 335336 PT-RES 28, 331 PT-S-IB+ 68 PT-SR-DOB 211, 319 PT-SR-OB 211, 319 PT-SR-OB+ 211 PT-SYNC 51, 328 PT-SYNC-MI 53 Issues 340
labels 401 precautions 323327, 398400 safety guidelines 397401 LED indicators 15 LEVEL command 385
M
Main features 2 Matrix functional arrangement 1015 sizes 3 Mechanical specifications 21 Module interconnect, sync module. See PT-SYNC-MI Module interconnect. See PM-MI, PT-MI Modules components 1115 crosspoint modules general description 278 PM-128128-3G9 13, 288 PM-128128-X9 13, 288289 PM-4032-3G5 13, 282283 PM-6464-3G9 13, 284 PM-6464-X9 13, 282, 284, 286 PM-7264-3G5 13, 286287 PM-ATDM16-X9 14, 292296 PM-ATDM9-X5 14, 292296 PT-128256-3G15 14 PT-128256-3G28 14, 290291 PT-128256-X15 14, 290291 PT-128256-X28 14, 290291 PT-ATDM16-X15 14, 292296 PT-ATDM32-X15 14, 292296 PT-ATDM32-X28 14, 292296 PT-ATDM64-X28 14, 292296 de-embedder submodules PT-DMX 127134 PT-DMX-3G 127134 embedder submodules PT-MUX 259266 PT-MUX-3G 259266 frame synchronizer submodules PT-FSDMX-IBG 135154 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 135154 input modules applications integration 57 control requirements 57 general description 5657 LEDs 57 PM-ADC-IB 11, 96105 PM-ADCT-IB 11, 106116 PM-AEB-IB 11, 7581 PM-AEBT-IB 11, 8289 PM-AEC-IB 11, 7581 PM-AECT-IB 11, 8289 PM-DEC-IB 11, 9095 PM-HS-IB 11, 6366
L
L# command. See LEVEL command Lasers. See also Fiber optical modules classifications 398 eye damage 398 general information 397
412
Index
PM-HS-IB+ 11, 5963 PM-S-IB 12, 7174 PM-S-IB+ 12, 6771 PT-ADC-IB 11, 96105 PT-ADCT-IB 11, 106116 PT-AEB-IB 11, 7581 PT-AEBT-IB 11, 8289 PT-AEC-IB 11, 7581 PT-AECT-IB 11, 8289 PT-DEC-IB 11, 9095 PT-DMX 11 PT-DMX-3G 11 PT-HS1310S-IB 11, 116120 PT-HS-IB 11, 6366 PT-HS-IB+ 11, 5963 PT-HSO-IB+ 11, 120121 PT-S-IB 12, 7174 PT-S-IB+ 12, 6771 installation alarm modules 329 back panel modules 330 fan modules 337 fiber optical modules 323327 input modules 319 output modules 319 output monitoring modules 328 PM-FAN-5 337 PM-FAN-8 337 power supply 335336 PT-ALARM 329 PT-FAN 337 PT-PS 335336 PT-RES 331 PT-SYNC 328 resource module 331 sync module 328 output modules general description 177178 LEDs 177178 PM-AEB-OB 12, 220225 PM-AEBT-OB 12, 226232 PM-AEC-OB 12, 220225 PM-AECT-OB 12, 226232 PM-DAC-OB 12, 239245 PM-DACT-OB 12, 246253 PM-ENC-DOB 12, 233238 PM-ENC-OB 12, 233238 PM-HSR-DOB 12, 200205 PM-HSR-OB 12, 200205 PM-HSR-OB+ 12, 13, 186191 PM-HSR-OBG+ 181186 PM-SR-DOB 13, 215219 PM-SR-OB 13, 215, 215219 PM-SR-OB+ 13, 206, 210, 210214 PM-SR-OBG+ 13, 206210 PT-AEB-OB 12, 220225 PT-AEBT-OB 12, 226232 PT-AEC-OB 12, 220225
PT-AECT-OB 12, 226232 PT-DAC-OB 12, 239245 PT-DACT-OB 12, 246253 PT-ENC-DOB 12, 233238 PT-ENC-OB 12, 233238 PT-HSR1310S-OB 12, 254258 PT-HSR-DOB 12, 200205 PT-HSR-OB 12, 200205 PT-HSR-OB+ 12, 186191 PT-HSR-OBG+ 13, 181186 PT-HSRO-OB+ 13, 192199 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 13, 192199 PT-MUX 13 PT-MUX-3G 13 PT-SR-DOB 13, 215219 PT-SR-OB 13, 215, 215219 PT-SR-OB+ 206, 210, 210214 PT-SR-OBG+ 206210 output monitoring modules general description 298301 PT-HSRAEC-OM 14, 307 PT-HSR-OM 14, 303 sync modules. See also PM-4032-3G5 PT-SYNC 4953 PT-SYNC-MI 53
O
Operation crosspoint modules PM-ATDM16-X9 292295 PM-ATDM9-X5 292295 PT-ATDM16-X15 292295 PT-ATDM32-X15 292295 PT-ATDM32-X28 292295 PT-ATDM64-X28 292295 operation notes 345 PM-128128-3G9 288 PM-128128-X9 288 PM-4032-3G5 282 PM-6464-3G9 284 PM-6464-X9 284 PM-7264-3G5 286 PM-ADC-IB 9698 PM-ADCT-IB 106108 PM-AEB-IB 7576 PM-AEB-OB 220221 PM-AEBT-IB 8283 PM-AEBT-OB 226227 PM-AEC-IB 7576 PM-AEC-OB 220221 PM-AECT-IB 8283 PM-AECT-OB 226227 PM-DAC-OB 239 PM-DACT-OB 246247 PM-DEC-IB 9092 PM-ENC-DOB 233234 PM-ENC-OB 233234
413
PM-FAN-5 4647 PM-FAN-8 48 PM-HS-IB 63 PM-HS-IB+ 59 PM-HSR-DOB 200202 PM-HSR-OB 200202 PM-HSR-OB+ 186187 PM-HSR-OBG+ 181182 PM-MI 23 PM-S-IB 71 PM-S-IB+ 67 PM-SR-DOB 215216 PM-SR-OB 215216 PT-128256-X15 290 PT-128256-X28 290 PT-ADC-IB 9698 PT-ADCT-IB 106108 PT-AEB-IB 7576 PT-AEB-OB 220221 PT-AEBT-OB 226227 PT-AEC-IB 7576 PT-AEC-OB 220221 PT-AECT-OB 226227 PT-DAC-OB 239 PT-DACT-OB 246247 PT-DEC-IB 9092 PT-DMX 127 PT-DMX-3G 127 PT-ENC-DOB 233234 PT-ENC-OB 233234 PT-EXPS 43 PT-FAN 48 PT-FSDMX-IBG 135 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 135 PT-HS1310S-IB 116117 PT-HS-IB 63 PT-HS-IB+ 59 PT-HSO-IB+ 120121 PT-HSR1310S-OB 254255 PT-HSR1D-IBG 155 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 155 PT-HSRAEC-OM 307309 PT-HSR-DOB 200202 PT-HSR-OB 200202 PT-HSR-OB+ 186187 PT-HSR-OBG+ 181182 PT-HSR-OM 303304 PT-HSRO-OB+ 192?? PT-HSRO-OBG+ 192?? PT-MADI4C-IBG 164 PT-MADI4C-OBG 268 PT-MI 23 PT-MUX 259 PT-MUX-3G 259 PT-PD 4142 PT-PS 38 PT-PS-DC 38 PT-S-IB 71
PT-S-IB+ 67 PT-SR-DOB 206, 210211, 215216 PT-SR-OB 206, 210211, 215216 PT-SYNC 4950 PT-SYNC-MI 53 Operation notes 345 Optical specifications, laser modules 401 Output modules general description 177178 installation 319 LEDs 177178 PM-AEB-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 specifications 224, 232 PM-AEBT-OB back panel modules 227 block diagram 230 configuration 228 description 12, 226 installation 227228, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 PM-AEC-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 specifications 224, 232 PM-AECT-OB back panel modules 227 block diagram 230 configuration 228 description 12, 226 installation 227228, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 PM-DAC-OB back panel modules 239 block diagram 242 configuration 241 description 12, 239 installation 240, 319 operation 239 parameters 241 PM-DACT-OB back panel modules 246 block diagram 250 configuration 247 description 12, 246
414
Index
installation 247, 319 operation 246247 parameters 248249 PM-ENC-DOB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 236 specifications 238 PM-ENC-OB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 236 specifications 238 PM-HSR-DOB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200 installation 202, 319320 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PM-HSR-OB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200205 installation 202, 319320 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PM-HSR-OB+ back panel modules 187 block diagram 190 configuration 188 description 12, 13, 186 installation 188, 319320 operation 186187 parameters 188189 reclocker operating modes 187 specifications 190 submodules 188 PM-HSR-OBG+ back panel modules 182 block diagram 185 configuration 183 description 181 installation 183, 319320
operation 181182 output monitoring modules 182 parameters 184 reclocker operating modes 182 specifications 185 submodules 182 PM-SR-DOB back panel modules 216 block diagram 218 configuration 216 description 13 installation 216, 319 operation 215216 parameters 217 specifications 218 PM-SR-OB back panel modules 216 block diagram 218 configuration 216 description 13, 215 installation 216, 319 operation 215216 parameters 217 specifications 218 PM-SR-OB+ back panel modules 211 block diagram 213 configuration 211 description 13, 206, 210 installation 211 operation 210211 parameters 212 specifications 213 submodules 211 PM-SR-OBG+ back panel modules 207 block diagram 209 configuration 207 description 13 installation 207 operation 206 parameters 207208 specifications 209 submodules 207 PT-AEB-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 specifications 224 PT-AEBT-OB back panel modules 227 description 12, 226 installation 221, 319 operation 226227
415
parameters 228229 specifications 232 PT-AEC-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 specifications 224 PT-AECT-OB back panel modules 227 description 12, 226 installation 221, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 specifications 232 PT-DAC-OB back panel modules 239 block diagram 242 configuration 241 description 12, 239 installation 240, 319 operation 239 parameters 241 PT-DACT-OB back panel modules 246 block diagram 250 configuration 247 description 12, 246 installation 247, 319 operation 246247 parameters 248249 PT-ENC-DOB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 235236 specifications 238 PT-ENC-OB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 235236 specifications 238 PT-HSR1310S-OB back panel modules 255 block diagram 198, 257 configuration 194, 255 description 12 installation 194, 255, 323327
laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 254255 parameters 255 specifications 257258 PT-HSR-DOB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200 installation 202, 319 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PT-HSR-OB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200205 installation 202, 319 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PT-HSR-OB+ back panel modules 187 block diagram 190 configuration 188 description 12, 186 installation 188, 319320 operation 186187 parameters 188189 reclocker operating modes 187 specifications 190 submodules 188 PT-HSR-OBG+ back panel modules 182 block diagram 185 configuration 183 description 13, 181 installation 183, 319320 operation 181182 parameters 183184 reclocker operating modes 182 specifications 185 submodules 182 PT-HSRO-OB+ back panel modules 193 block diagram 198 configuration 194 description 13, 192 installation 194, 319320 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 192?? output monitoring modules 193 parameters 194196 specifications 199 submodules 193
416
Index
PT-HSRO-OBG+ back panel modules 193 block diagram 198 configuration 194 description 13, 192 installation 194 operation 192?? output monitoring modules 193 parameters 194196 specifications 199 submodules 193 PT-MADI4C-OBG block diagram 267 operation 268 parameters 273 Reference Locking 270 specifications 272 TDM Input 271 TDM Output Mapping 271 PT-MUX description 13 PT-MUX-3G description 13 PT-SR-DOB back panel modules 216 block diagram 209, 213, 218 configuration 216 description 13 installation 207, 211, 211, 216, 319 operation 206, 210211, 215216 parameters 212217 specifications 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB back panel modules 216 block diagram 209, 213, 218 configuration 216 description 13, 215 installation 207, 211, 211, 216, 319 operation 206, 210211, 215216 parameters 212217 specifications 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB+ back panel modules 211 block diagram 209, 213 configuration 211 description 206, 210 installation 211 operation 210211 parameters 212 specifications 209, 213 submodules 211 PT-SR-OBG+ back panel modules 207 configuration 207 installation 207 operation 206 parameters 207208 submodules 207
signal flow diagram 180 Output monitoring modules architecture 5RU 298 9RU 299 15RU 300 28RU 301 general description 298301 installation 328 PT-HSRAEC-OM 182 block diagram 311 configuration 309 description 14, 307 installation 309 operation 307309 parameters 309310 specifications 312 PT-HSR-OM 182, 187, 202 block diagram 302, 305 configuration 304 description 303 descriptionDescriptions
output
monitoring modules 14
installation 304, 328 operation 303304 parameters 304305 specifications 305 signal flow diagram 302 types real 303, 308 virtual 304, 308 Outputs audio channel source 138 test tone 138 Overwrite embedding 141
P
P# command. See POLL command Parameters frame-controllable application parameters 347 default settings 346 fail-safe parameters 348350 PM-128128-3G9 289 PM-128128-X9 289 PM-4032-3G5 283 PM-6464-3G9 285 PM-6464-X9 285 PM-7264-3G5 287 PM-ADC-IB 100101 PM-ADCT-IB 110112 PM-AEB-IB 77 PM-AEB-OB 222 PM-AEBT-IB 8485 PM-AEBT-OB 228229
417
PM-AEC-IB 77 PM-AEC-OB 222 PM-AECT-IB 8485 PM-AECT-OB 228229 PM-ALARM-5 3233 PM-ATDM16-X9 295 PM-DAC-OB 241 PM-DACT-OB 248249 PM-DEC-IB 9293 PM-ENC-DOB 236 PM-ENC-OB 236 PM-HS-IB 65 PM-HS-IB+ 6061 PM-HSR-DOB 203 PM-HSR-OB 203 PM-HSR-OB+ 188189 PM-HSR-OBG+ 184 PM-S-IB 7273 PM-S-IB+ 6869 PM-SR-DOB 217 PM-SR-OB 217 PM-SR-OB+ 212 PM-SR-OBG+ 207208 PT-128256-X15 291 PT-128256-X28 291 PT-ADC-IB 100101 PT-ADCT-IB 110112 PT-AEB-IB 77 PT-AEB-OB 222 PT-AEBT-IB 8485 PT-AEC-IB 77 PT-AEC-OB 222 PT-AECT-IB 8485 PT-AECT-OB 228229 PT-AETB-OB 228229 PT-ALARM 3637 PT-ATDM16-X15 295 PT-ATDM32-X15 295 PT-ATDM32-X28 295 PT-ATDM64-X28 295 PT-DAC-OB 241 PT-DACT-OB 248249 PT-DEC-IB 9293 PT-DMX 129 PT-DMX-3G 129 PT-ENC-DOB 235236 PT-ENC-OB 235236 PT-FSDMX-IBG 144 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 144 PT-HS-IB 65 PT-HS-IB+ 6061 PT-HSO-IB+ 122 PT-HSR1310S-OB 255 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG 158 PT-HSRAECAEC-OM 309310 PT-HSR-DOB 203 PT-HSR-OB 203 PT-HSR-OB+ 188189
PT-HSR-OBG+ 183184 PT-HSR-OM 304305 PT-HSRO-OB+ 194196 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 194196 PT-MADI4C-IBG 172 PT-MADI4C-OBG 273 PT-MUX 262 PT-MUX-3G 262 PT-S-IB 7273 PT-S-IB+ 6869 PT-SR-DOB 212217 PT-SR-OB 212217 PT-SR-OB+ 212 PT-SR-OBG+ 207208 PT-SYNC 51 RouterMapper-controllable application parameters 352355 Physical architecture 128128 4 256256 5 512512 6 6464 4 Pinouts PM-ADC-IB 103 PM-ADCT-IB 114 PM-AEB-IB 79 PM-AEB-OB 223 PM-AEBT-OB 231 PM-ALARM-5 31 PM-DAC-OB 243 PT-ADC-IB 103 PT-ADCT-IB 114 PT-AEB-IB 79 PT-AEB-OB 223 PT-AEBT-OB 231 PT-ALARM 36 PT-DAC-OB 243 PM-128128-3G9 block diagram 280 configuration 289 description 13, 288 installation 288, 321 operation 288 parameters 289 specifications 289 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-128128-X9 block diagram 280 configuration 289 description 13, 288 installation 288, 321 operation 288 parameters 289 specifications 289 PM-4032-3G5 block diagram 281 configuration 282 description 13, 282283
418
Index
installation 282 operation 282 parameters 283 specifications 283 upgrade procedures 315318 PM5-CBP description 10, 2427 operation 2427 PM-6464-3G9 block diagram 280 configuration 285 description 13, 284, 284 installation 284, 319 operation 284 parameters 285 specifications 285 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-6464-X9 block diagram 280 configuration 285 description 13, 282, 284, 284, 286 installation 284, 319 operation 284 parameters 285 specifications 285 PM-7264-3G5 block diagram 281 configuration 286 description 13, 286287 installation 286 operation 286 parameters 287 specifications 287 upgrade procedures 315318 PM-ADC-IB back panel modules 99 block diagram 102 configuration 99 description 11, 96 installation 99 operation 9698 parameters 100101 pinouts 103 specifications 103105 PM-ADCT-IB back panel modules 109 block diagram 113 configuration 109 description 11, 106 installation 109 operation 106108 parameters 110112 pinouts 114 specifications 114116 PM-AEB-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78 configuration 77
description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 pinouts 79 specifications 80 PM-AEB-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 pinouts 223 specifications 224, 232 PM-AEBT-IB back panel modules 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 operation 8283 parameters 8485 specifications 87 PM-AEBT-OB back panel modules 227 block diagram 230 configuration 228 description 12, 226 installation 227228, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 pinouts 231 PM-AEC-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78 configuration 77 description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 specifications 80 PM-AEC-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 specifications 224, 232 PM-AECT-IB block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 operation 8283
419
parameters 8485 specifications 89 PM-AECT-OB back panel modules 227 block diagram 230 configuration 228 description 12, 226 installation 227228, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 PM-ALARM-5 description 10, 32 installation 32 operation 2931 parameters 3233 pinouts 31 PM-ATDM16-X9 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 293 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PM-ATDM9-X5 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 293 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PM-DAC-OB back panel modules 239 block diagram 242 configuration 241 description 12, 239 installation 240, 319 operation 239 parameters 241 pinouts 243 specifications 244245 PM-DACT-OB back panel modules 246 block diagram 250 configuration 247 description 12, 246 installation 247, 319 operation 246247 parameters 248249 specifications 252253 PM-DEC-IB back panel modules 92 block diagram 94 description 11, 90, 9095 operation 9092 parameters 9293
specifications 95 PM-ENC-DOB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 236 specifications 238 PM-ENC-OB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 236 specifications 238 PM-FAN-5 description 10 installation 47, 337 operation 4647 PM-FAN-8 description 10 installation 48, 337 operation 48 PM-HS-IB back panel modules 64 configuration 65 description 11, 64 installation 64 operation 63 parameters 65 specifications 66 PM-HS-IB+ back panel modules 59 block diagram 62, 66 configuration 60 description 11, 60 installation 60 operation 59 parameters 6061 specifications 63 PM-HSR-DOB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200 installation 202, 319320 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PM-HSR-OB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203
420
Index
description 12, 200205 installation 202, 319320 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PM-HSR-OB+ back panel modules 187 block diagram 190 configuration 188 description 12, 13, 186 installation 188, 319320 operation 186187 parameters 188189 reclocker operating modes 187 specifications 190 submodules 188 PM-HSR-OBG+ back panel modules 182 block diagram 185 configuration 183 description 181 installation 183, 319320 operation 181182 output monitoring modules 182 parameters 184 reclocker operating modes 182 specifications 185 submodules 182 PM-MI configuration 24 description 10, 23 installation 24 operation 23 PM-S-IB back panel modules 72 block diagram 73 configuration 72 description 12, 71 installation 72 operation 71 parameters 7273 specifications 74 PM-S-IB+ back panel modules 67 block diagram 70 configuration 68 description 12, 67 installation 68 operation 67 parameters 6869 specifications 71 PM-SR-DOB back panel modules 216 block diagram 218 configuration 216 description 13 installation 216, 319
operation 215216 parameters 217 specifications 218 PM-SR-OB back panel modules 216 block diagram 218 configuration 216 description 13, 215 installation 216, 319 operation 215216 parameters 217 specifications 218 PM-SR-OB+ back panel modules 211 block diagram 213 configuration 211 description 13, 206, 210 installation 211 operation 210211 parameters 212 specifications 213 submodules 211 PM-SR-OBG+ back panel modules 207 block diagram 209 configuration 207 description 13 installation 207 operation 206 parameters 207208 specifications 209 submodules 207 POLL command 385 Polling 351 Power distribution module. See PT-PD Power supply frame. See PT-EXPS Power supply module. See PT-PS Precautions injury 390 laser safety 323327, 398400 product damage 392 Preventing electrostatic discharge 389 Procedures, commonly performed 341 Product damage precautions 392 Product description 1 Protective laser connector covers 323 Protocol support 385386 PT-128256-3G15 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 upgrade procedures 315318 PT-128256-3G28 block diagram 280
421
configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 upgrade procedures 315318 PT-128256-X15 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 PT-128256-X28 block diagram 280 configuration 291 description 14, 290 installation 291, 321 operation 290 parameters 291 specifications 291 PT-A2-BP 14, 96, 98, 107, 108, 239, 246, 330 PT-A2-DTB 14, 98, 108, 239, 246 PT-ADC-IB back panel modules 99 block diagram 102 configuration 99 description 11, 96 installation 99 operation 9698 parameters 100101 pinouts 103 specifications 103105 PT-ADCT-IB back panel modules 109 block diagram 113 configuration 109 description 11, 106 installation 109 operation 106108 parameters 110112 pinouts 114 specifications 114116 PT-AEB-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78, 86 configuration 77 description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 pinouts 79 specifications 80 PT-AEB-IBP 14, 76, 83, 330 PT-AEB-OB back panel modules 221
block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 pinouts 223 specifications 224 PT-AEB-OBP 14, 221, 227, 330 PT-AEBT-IB back panel modules 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 parameters 8485 specifications 88 PT-AEBT-OB back panel modules 227 description 12, 226 installation 221, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 pinouts 231 specifications 232 PT-AEC-BOC 15, 76, 83, 221, 227 PT-AEC-IB back panel modules 76 block diagram 78, 86 configuration 77 description 11, 75 installation 76 operation 7576 parameters 77 specifications 81 PT-AEC-IBP 15, 76, 83, 330 PT-AEC-OB back panel modules 221 block diagram 223 configuration 222 description 12, 220 installation 221222, 319 operation 220221 parameters 222 specifications 224 PT-AEC-OBP 15, 221, 227, 330 PT-AECT-IB back panel modules 83 block diagram 86 configuration 84 description 11, 82 installation 83 parameters 8485 specifications 89 PT-AECT-IBP 15 PT-AECT-OB back panel modules 227 description 12, 226
422
Index
installation 221, 319 operation 226227 parameters 228229 specifications 232 PT-AECT-OBP 15 PT-ALARM description 10, 36 installation 36, 329 operation 3435 parameters 3637 pinouts 36 PT-ATDM16-X15 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-ATDM32-X15 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-ATDM32-X28 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-ATDM64-X28 block diagram 296 configuration 295 description 14, 292, 294 installation 295, 321 operation 292295 parameters 295 special features 294295 specifications 296 PT-CBP description 10, 24 operation 2427 PT-DAC-OB back panel modules 239 block diagram 242 configuration 241 description 12, 239 installation 240, 319 operation 239 parameters 241
pinouts 243 specifications 244245 PT-DACT-OB back panel modules 246 block diagram 250 configuration 247 description 12, 246 installation 247, 319 operation 246247 parameters 248249 specifications 252253 PT-DEC-IB back panel modules 92 block diagram 94 configuration 92 description 11, 90, 9095 installation 92 operation 9092 parameters 9293 specifications 95 PT-DMX block diagram 134 configuration 129 description 11 installation 129 operation 127 parameters 129 specifications 134 PT-DMX-3G block diagram 134 configuration 129 description 11 installation 129 operation 127 parameters 129 specifications 134 PT-DX-SB 59, 121 PT-ENC-DOB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 235236 specifications 238 PT-ENC-OB back panel modules 235 block diagram 237 configuration 235 description 12, 233 installation 235, 319 operation 233234 parameters 235236 specifications 238 PT-EXPS configuration 44 description 43
423
installation 43 operation 43 PT-FAN description 10, 46, 48 installation 48, 337 operation 48 PT-FO-BMI 15, 117, 121, 330 PT-FO-BMO 15, 255, 330 PT-FSDMX-IBG 135154 block diagram 152 parameters 144 specifications 153, 154 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 135154 block diagram 152 operation 135 parameters 144 specifications 153, 154 PT-HS1310S-IB back panel modules 117 block diagram 119, 125 configuration 117 description 11, 116120 installation 117, 323327 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 116117 specifications 120, 126 PT-HS-BP+ 15, 182 PT-HS-IB back panel modules 64 configuration 65 description 11, 64 installation 64, 319 operation 63 parameters 65 specifications 66 PT-HS-IB+ back panel modules 59 block diagram 62, 66 configuration 60 description 11, 60 installation 60 operation 59 parameters 6061 specifications 63 PT-HSO-IB+ back panel modules 121 block diagram 125 configuration 122 description 11, 120121 installation 121122 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 120121 parameters 122 specifications 126 PT-HSR1310S-OB back panel modules 255 block diagram 198, 257 configuration 194, 255
description 12 installation 194, 255, 323327 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 254255 parameters 255 specifications 257258 PT-HSR1D-IBG block diagram 161 operation 155 PT-HSR8C1D-IBG block diagram 161 configuration 157 Input Expansion 156 installation 157 operation 155 parameters 158 specifications 162 PT-HSRAEC-OM 182 block diagram 311 configuration 309 description 14, 307 installation 309 operation 307309 parameters 309310 specifications 312 where used 182, 187, 193, 202, 221, 235,
240
PT-HSR-DOB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200 installation 202, 319 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PT-HSR-OB back panel modules 202 block diagram 204 configuration 203 description 12, 200205 installation 202, 319 operation 200202 parameters 203 reclocker operating modes 201 specifications 205 PT-HSR-OB+ back panel modules 187 block diagram 190 configuration 188 description 12, 186 installation 188, 319320 operation 186187 parameters 188189 reclocker operating modes 187 specifications 190 submodules 188
424
Index
PT-HSR-OBG+ back panel modules 182 block diagram 185 configuration 183 description 13, 181 installation 183, 319320 operation 181182 parameters 183184 reclocker operating modes 182 specifications 185 submodules 182 PT-HSR-OM 182, 187 block diagram 302, 305 configuration 304 description 14, 303 installation 304, 328 operation 303304 parameters 304305 specifications 305 where used 182, 187, 202, 221, 235, 240 PT-HSRO-OB+ back panel modules 193 block diagram 198 configuration 194 description 13, 192 installation 194, 319320 laser safety guidelines 397401 operation 192?? output monitoring modules 193 parameters 194196 specifications 199 submodules 193 PT-HSRO-OBG+ back panel modules 193 block diagram 198 configuration 194 description 13, 192 installation 194 operation 192?? output monitoring modules 193 parameters 194196 specifications 199 submodules 193 PT-MADI4C-IBG back panel modules 164 block diagram 163 operation 164 parameters 172 Sample Mapping Scenarios 168 specifications 172 TDM Mapping 167 PT-MADI4C-OBG block diagram 267 operation 268 parameters 273 Reference Locking 270 specifications 272 TDM Input 271
TDM Output Mapping 271 PT-MI configuration 24 description 10, 23 installation 24 operation 23 PT-MUX block diagram 265, 311 configuration 261 description 13 installation 261 operation 259 parameters 262 specifications 266 PT-MUX-3G block diagram 265, 311 configuration 261 description 13 installation 261 operation 259 specifications 266 PT-MUX-3G parameters 262 PT-MXDX-SB 67, 207, 211 PT-MX-SB 182, 188, 193 PT-MX-SD specifications 266 PT-PD configuration 42 description 10, 41 operation 4142 PT-PS description 10, 38 installation 39, 335336 operation 38 specifications 3940 PT-PS-DC description 10 installation 39, 335336 operation 38 specifications 3940 PT-RES description 10, 27 installation 28, 331 operation 2728 PT-SFP2X4+BM 15, 121 PT-S-IB back panel modules 72 block diagram 73 configuration 72 description 12, 71 installation 72 operation 71 parameters 7273 specifications 74 PT-S-IB+ back panel modules 67 block diagram 70 configuration 68
425
description 12, 67 installation 68 operation 67 parameters 6869 specifications 71 PT-SR-DOB back panel modules 216 block diagram 209, 213, 218 configuration 216 description 13 installation 207, 211, 211, 216, 319 operation 206, 210211, 215216 parameters 212217 specifications 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB back panel modules 216 block diagram 209, 213, 218 configuration 216 description 13, 215 installation 207, 211, 211, 216, 319 operation 206, 210211, 215216 parameters 212217 specifications 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB+ back panel modules 211 block diagram 209, 213 configuration 211 description 206, 210 installation 211 operation 210211 parameters 212 specifications 209, 213 submodules 211 PT-SR-OBG+ back panel modules 207 configuration 207 installation 207 operation 206 parameters 207208 submodules 207 PT-SYNC block diagram 52 configuration 51 description 10, 4950 installation 51, 328 operation 4950 parameters 51 specifications 52 PT-SYNC-MI configuration 53 description 10, 53 installation 53 operation 53 PT-V-BP 15, 59, 64, 67, 72, 92, 187, 202, 207,
211, 216, 235, 330
Q
Q command. See QUERY command QUERY command 385
R
R command. See READ command READ command 386 Real output monitoring 303, 308 Reclocker operating modes 182, 187, 201 Replacing components 342 Resource module. See PT-RES RouterMapper configuration 350355 RS-232 pin assignments 25 RS-422 pin assignments 26
S
S # command. See SOURCE command s PM-AECT-IB back panel modules 83 Safety precautions injury precautions 390 lasers 323327, 398400 classifications 398 eye damage 398 general information 397 labels 401 preventing electrostatic discharge 389 product damage precautions 392 safety terms and symbols in this manual 388 safety terms and symbols on the product 388 Serial control pin assignments RS-232 25 RS-422 26 Settings application parameters 347, 352355 default settings 346 fail-safe parameters 348350 SNMP 18 SOURCE command 386 Special features PM-ATDM16-X9 294295 PM-ATDM9-X5 294295 PT-ATDM16-X15 294295 PT-ATDM32-X15 294295 PT-ATDM32-X28 294295 PT-ATDM64-X28 294295 Specifications frames 21 laser modules optical 401 PM-128128-3G9 289 PM-128128-X9 289 PM-4032-3G5 283 PM-6464-3G9 285
426
Index
PM-6464-X9 285 PM-7264-3G5 287 PM-ADC-IB 103105 PM-ADCT-IB 114116 PM-AEB-IB 80 PM-AEB-OB 224, 232 PM-AEBT-IB 87 PM-AEC-IB 80 PM-AEC-OB 224, 232 PM-AECT-IB 89 PM-ATDM16-X9 296 PM-ATDM9-X5 296 PM-DAC-OB 244245 PM-DACT-OB 252253 PM-DEC-IB 95 PM-ENC-DOB 238 PM-ENC-OB 238 PM-HS-IB 66 PM-HS-IB+ 63 PM-HSR-DOB 205 PM-HSR-OB 205 PM-HSR-OB+ 190 PM-HSR-OBG+ 185 PM-S-IB 74 PM-S-IB+ 71 PM-SR-DOB 218 PM-SR-OB 218 PM-SR-OB+ 213 PM-SR-OBG+ 209 PT-ADC-IB 103105 PT-ADCT-IB 114116 PT-AEB-IB 80 PT-AEB-OB 224 PT-AEBT-IB 88 PT-AEBT-OB 232 PT-AEC-IB 81 PT-AEC-OB 224 PT-AECT-IB 89 PT-AECT-OB 232 PT-ATDM16-X15 296 PT-ATDM32-X15 296 PT-ATDM32-X28 296 PT-ATDM64-X28 296 PT-DAC-OB 244245 PT-DACT-OB 252253 PT-DEC-IB 95 PT-DMX 134 PT-DMX-3G 134 PT-ENC-DOB 238 PT-ENC-OB 238 PT-FSDMX-IBG 153, 154 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 153, 154 PT-HS1310S-IB 120, 126 PT-HS-IB 66 PT-HS-IB+ 63 PT-HSO-IB+ 126 PT-HSR1310S-OB 257258 PT-HSRAEC-OM 312
PT-HSR-DOB 205 PT-HSR-OB 205 PT-HSR-OB+ 190 PT-HSR-OBG+ 185 PT-HSR-OM 305 PT-HSRO-OB+ 199 PT-HSRO-OBG+ 199 PT-MADI4C-IBG 172 PT-MADI4C-OBG 272 PT-MUX 266 PT-MUX-3G 266 PT-MX-SD 266 PT-PS 3940 PT-PS-DC 3940 PT-S-IB 74 PT-S-IB+ 71 PT-SR-DOB 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB 209, 213, 218 PT-SR-OB+ 209, 213 PT-SYNC 52 Submodules PT-DMX 127134 block diagram 134 configuration 129 installation 129 operation 127 parameters 129 specifications 134 PT-DMX-3G 127134 block diagram 134 configuration 129 installation 129 operation 127 parameters 129 specifications 134 PT-DX-SB 59, 121 PT-FSDMX-IBG 135154 block diagram 152 operation 135 parameters 144 specifications 153, 154 PT-FSDMXO-IBG 135154 block diagram 152 operation 135 parameters 144 specifications 153, 154 PT-HSR1D-IBG block diagram 161 operation 155 PT-MUX 259266 block diagram 265, 311 configuration 261 installation 261 operation 259 parameters 262 specifications 266 PT-MUX-3G 259266 block diagram 265, 311
427
configuration 261 installation 261 operation 259 specifications 266 PT-MUX-3G parameters 262 PT-MXDX-SB 67, 207, 211 PT-MX-SB 182, 188, 193 specifications 266 Sync mode 142 Sync module. See PT-SYNC Sync reference points configuration 356
363
establishing a terminal operation session 383 Test tone frequencies 138
U
Upgrade procedures for 3 Gb modules 315318
V
V # command. See VERIFY command VERIFY command 386 Vertical timing 143 Video frame synchronization 142 Video fast switch 138 Virtual output monitoring 304, 308
Synchronization audio 143 video frame 142
T
T command. See TERMINAL command TDM audio matrices configuration 364?? Terminal block adapter 99, 109 TERMINAL command 386 Terminal operations establishing a session for serial control interface products 384 establishing a Telnet session for Ethernet control interface products 384
X
X # command. See XPOINT command XPOINT command 386
Z
Z command. See ZERO command ZERO command 386
428
Index

Harris Platinum Frame and System Edition

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Harris Platinum Frame and System Edition

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Edition T PT-FR MAN

About This Manual ................................................................................................xv

Applications Integration ........................................................................................... 18 Frame Specifications..................................................................................................... 21

Frame Modules ....................................................................................................... 23

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Input Modules ........................................................................................................ 55

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Output Modules ...................................................................................................175

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Crosspoint Modules ...........................................................................................277

Output Monitoring Modules ..........................................................................297

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Terminal Operation ............................................................................................383

Safety Precautions, Certifications, Compliances ...............................387

Laser Safety Guidelines ..................................................................................397

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

About This Manual

About This Manual

November 2010 February 2011 July 2011

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules

CAPS Code > or hyperlink Internet address

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

About This Manual

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules

Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Returning a Platinum Product

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

About This Manual

Platinum Product Standards

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules

PT-PS Power Supply

EMC Compliance Standards

Restriction on Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Compliance

About This Manual

Figure P-1 RoHS Compliance Emblem

Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Compliance

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules

Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Figure P-2 WEEE Compliance Emblem

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

About This Manual

Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Routing for large systems

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Figure 1-1 7264 Physical Architecture (Front View)

Crosspoint module (128128)

Figure 1-2 128128 Physical Architecture (Front View)

Copyright 2006-2011, Harris Corporation

Platinum Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation Manual

Crosspoint module (128256)